Programming Manual

NWA-088653-001
ISSUE 6.0
 LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC Platforms reserves the right to change the specifications, func-

tions,or features, at any time, without notice.

NEC Platforms has prepared this document for use by its employees
and customers. The information contained herein is the property of
NEC Platforms and shall not be reproduced without prior written
approval from NEC Platforms.

All brand names and product names on this document are

trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Copyright 2014-2020

NEC Platforms, Ltd.

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE ................................................................................................................ 1
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ................................................................................... 2
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ....................................................................................... 3
PBX System Designation ................................................................................................. 3
Attendant Console Name ................................................................................................. 3
Paging Adapter Name ..................................................................................................... 3
Terminal Name ................................................................................................................ 3
REFERENCE MANUAL ........................................................................................... 5
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ............................................................................... 6
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................ 8
System Data Backup ....................................................................................................... 8

Chapter 1 BUSINESS FEATURES

ACCOUNT CODE .................................................................................................... 1-3
ADD-ON MODULE ................................................................................................... 1-4
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY ..................................................................................... 1-6
ANALOG PORT ADAPTER (APR-L Adapter) .......................................................... 1-9
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE .................................................................................. 1-12
ANSWER KEY .......................................................................................................... 1-20
ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING ......................................................................... 1-21
ATTENDANT CAMP-ON .......................................................................................... 1-23
ATTENDANT CONSOLE ......................................................................................... 1-24
SN716 DESKCON ........................................................................................................... 1-24
ATTENDANT CALLED/CALLING NAME DISPLAY ........................................................ 1-31
ATTENDANT CALL SELECTION .................................................................................... 1-35
ATTENDANT DO NOT DISTURB SETUP AND CANCEL .............................................. 1-36
ATTENDANT INTERPOSITION CALLING/TRANSFER ................................................. 1-37
ATTENDANT LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER ............................................................... 1-38
ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE ....................................................................................... 1-41
ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING ...................................................................................... 1-42
CALL QUEUING .............................................................................................................. 1-44
CALL WAITING DISPLAY ............................................................................................... 1-45
COMMON ROUTE INDIAL .............................................................................................. 1-46
DIALED NUMBER IDENTIFICATION SERVICE (DNIS) ................................................. 1-49

i
 INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................... 1-51
INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS ....................................................................................... 1-52
MULTI-FUNCTION KEY .................................................................................................. 1-53
MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION .............................................................................. 1-54
PUSHBUTTON CALLING-ATTENDANT ONLY .............................................................. 1-55
TRUNK GROUP BUSY DISPLAY ................................................................................... 1-56
UNSUPERVISED TRUNK-TO-TRUNK TRANSFER BY ATTENDANT ........................... 1-57
ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ................................................................ 1-58
ATTENDANT OVERFLOW ...................................................................................... 1-60
ATTENDANT OVERRIDE ........................................................................................ 1-63
AUTHORIZATION CODE ......................................................................................... 1-64
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT .................................................................................... 1-67
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) ............................................................. 1-73
BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-ACD .............................................................................................. 1-76
CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD ................................................................................. 1-77
DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD .................................................................................... 1-82
HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-ACD .................................................................................... 1-85
IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-ACD ...................................................................................... 1-86
PRIORITY QUEUING-ACD ............................................................................................. 1-87
QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-ACD ........................................................................................ 1-88
SILENT MONITOR-ACD ................................................................................................. 1-89
AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) WITH
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS) .................................................... 1-92
AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON .......................................................................................... 1-93
AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME ........................................... 1-94
AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI) ..................................................... 1-99
AUTOMATIC RECALL ............................................................................................. 1-104
BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING ................................................................................ 1-105
BROKER’S CALL ..................................................................................................... 1-108
CALL BACK .............................................................................................................. 1-109
CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE ........................................................................... 1-111
CALL FORWARDING ............................................................................................... 1-119
ATTENDANT CALL FORWARDING SET-UP AND CANCEL ......................................... 1-121
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS .................................................................................. 1-122
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE .................................................................................. 1-127
CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER .............................................................................. 1-130
CALL FORWARDING-DESTINATION ............................................................................ 1-135
CALL FORWARDING-OVERRIDE .................................................................................. 1-136
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE ............................................................... 1-137
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER ............................................................ 1-138

ii
 SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS ....................................................................... 1-139
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE ....................................................................... 1-143
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER ................................................................... 1-147
GROUP DIVERSION ....................................................................................................... 1-154
CALL HISTORY ........................................................................................................ 1-157
INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK) ............................................................. 1-157
OUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL) .................................................................. 1-162
CALL PARK .............................................................................................................. 1-164
CALL PARK-SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 1-164
CALL PARK-TENANT ..................................................................................................... 1-167
CALL PICKUP .......................................................................................................... 1-168
CALL PICKUP-DIRECT ................................................................................................... 1-168
CALL PICKUP-GROUP ................................................................................................... 1-169
CALL PICKUP-DESIGNATED GROUP ........................................................................... 1-171
CALL REDIRECT ..................................................................................................... 1-172
CALL TRANSFER .................................................................................................... 1-173
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS ....................................................................................... 1-173
CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT ..................................................................................... 1-177
CALLER ID ............................................................................................................... 1-178
CALLER ID CLASS ......................................................................................................... 1-178
CALLER ID DTMF ........................................................................................................... 1-181
CALLER ID DISPLAY ...................................................................................................... 1-184
CALLER ID-STATION ..................................................................................................... 1-185
CALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK) .................................................................................. 1-190
CID CALL ROUTING ....................................................................................................... 1-191
NO CID CALL ROUTING ................................................................................................. 1-200
CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING ...................................................................................... 1-208
CENTREX COMPATIBILITY .................................................................................... 1-211
CLASS OF SERVICE ............................................................................................... 1-213
CODE RESTRICTION .............................................................................................. 1-216
CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY) ................................................................. 1-223
CONFERENCE (16 PARTY) .................................................................................... 1-225
CONFERENCE (32 PARTY) .................................................................................... 1-228
CONFERENCE (WEB SCHEDULE) ........................................................................ 1-235
CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING ........................................................................... 1-238
CONSULTATION HOLD .......................................................................................... 1-250
CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT) ................................................ 1-251
DATA LINE SECURITY ............................................................................................ 1-254
DELAYED HOTLINE ................................................................................................ 1-255
DELAYED RINGING ................................................................................................ 1-258

iii
DIAGNOSTICS ......................................................................................................... 1-259
DIAL BY NAME ........................................................................................................ 1-260
DIAL CONVERSION ................................................................................................ 1-270
DIAL MASK FOR TRUNK CALL .............................................................................. 1-272
DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE ................................................................................ 1-273
SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................... 1-273
DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID) ............................................................................ 1-295
DID CALL WAITING ........................................................................................................ 1-299
DID DIGIT CONVERSION ............................................................................................... 1-300
DID NAME DISPLAY ....................................................................................................... 1-305
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) ......................................................... 1-307
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA ............................................................................... 1-311
DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT) .................................................................. 1-316
DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD) ...................................................................... 1-318
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE ......... 1-321
DISTINCTIVE RINGING ........................................................................................... 1-323
DO NOT DISTURB ................................................................................................... 1-346
OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR SETTING SPEECH SYNTHESIS LANGUAGE ........ 1-355
DO NOT DISTURB-GROUP .................................................................................... 1-357
ECOLOGY ................................................................................................................ 1-360
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE) ................................................. 1-360
POWER SAVING MODE ................................................................................................. 1-368
TIMER FOR LCD BACKLIGHT ....................................................................................... 1-369
BRIGHTNESS REDUCTION IN NUMERICAL KEYPAD BACKLIGHT
FOR DT800/DT900 SERIES ........................................................................................... 1-370
EMERGENCY CALL NOTIFICATION ...................................................................... 1-371
ENHANCED 911 ...................................................................................................... 1-376
EXECUTIVE CALLING ............................................................................................. 1-384
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE ......................................................................................... 1-385
EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME .................................................................... 1-386
FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR ..................................................................................... 1-407
FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................... 1-411
FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ............................................................................... 1-415
FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT ........................................................................ 1-417
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE .................................................................................... 1-421
GROUP CALL BY PILOT NUMBER DIALING ......................................................... 1-424
GROUP LISTENING ................................................................................................ 1-426
HOLD ........................................................................................................................ 1-427
AUTOMATIC HOLD ......................................................................................................... 1-427
CALL HOLD ..................................................................................................................... 1-428

iv
 DUAL HOLD .................................................................................................................... 1-429
EXCLUSIVE HOLD .......................................................................................................... 1-430
HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE .................................................................................... 1-431
INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS ....................................................................... 1-435
INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT ............................................................................. 1-437
INTERCOM .............................................................................................................. 1-438
MANUAL INTERCOM ...................................................................................................... 1-438
AUTOMATIC INTERCOM ............................................................................................... 1-439
DIAL INTERCOM ............................................................................................................. 1-441
INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING .................................................................... 1-443
INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME .......................................................... 1-445
LAST NUMBER REDIAL .......................................................................................... 1-447
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT ......................................................................... 1-448
LINE LOCKOUT ....................................................................................................... 1-463
LINE PRESELECTION ............................................................................................. 1-464
MALICIOUS CALL BLOCK ....................................................................................... 1-465
MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI) ................................................................. 1-474
SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................... 1-474
HARDWARE REQUIRED ................................................................................................ 1-476
SYSTEM OPERATION .................................................................................................... 1-477
PROGRAMMING ............................................................................................................. 1-485
MESSAGE REMINDER ............................................................................................ 1-493
MESSAGE WAITING ............................................................................................... 1-497
MFC INCOMING CALL/OUTGOING CALL .............................................................. 1-500
NOTICE ON PROGRAMMING ........................................................................................ 1-500
OUTLINE OF MFC-R2 SIGNALING ................................................................................ 1-501
MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS ...................................................................... 1-543
CCSA ACCESS ............................................................................................................... 1-543
CODE CALLING EQUIPMENT ACCESS ........................................................................ 1-544
DICTATION EQUIPMENT ACCESS ............................................................................... 1-545
FOREIGN EXCHANGE (FX) ACCESS ........................................................................... 1-547
RADIO PAGING EQUIPMENT ACCESS ........................................................................ 1-548
WIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE (WATS) ACCESS ............................................... 1-552
MOBILITY ACCESS ................................................................................................. 1-553
MULTILINE TERMINAL ............................................................................................ 1-571
AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN ........................................................................................... 1-598
CALLING NAME AND NUMBER DISPLAY ..................................................................... 1-599
DYNAMIC DIAL PAD ....................................................................................................... 1-612
GROUP FEATURE KEY .................................................................................................. 1-613
MUTE KEY ...................................................................................................................... 1-614

v
 MY LINE NUMBER DISPLAY .......................................................................................... 1-615
PRESET DIALING ........................................................................................................... 1-617
PRIME LINE PICKUP ...................................................................................................... 1-618
RECALL KEY ................................................................................................................... 1-619
RELAY CONTROL FUNCTION KEY ............................................................................... 1-620
RING FREQUENCY CONTROL ...................................................................................... 1-624
RINGING LINE PICKUP .................................................................................................. 1-628
SOFT KEY ....................................................................................................................... 1-629
VOLUME CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 1-632
MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION ................................................... 1-633
MULTIPLE LANGUAGE DISPLAY ........................................................................... 1-642
MUSIC ON HOLD ..................................................................................................... 1-646
NIGHT SERVICE ...................................................................................................... 1-661
ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER ................................................................................... 1-661
CALL REROUTING ......................................................................................................... 1-662
DAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY STATION DIALING ................................................... 1-663
DAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY SYSTEM CLOCK ...................................................... 1-665
NIGHT CONNECTION-FIXED/NIGHT CONNECTION-FLEXIBLE ................................. 1-674
OVERFLOW FOR TAS QUEUE ...................................................................................... 1-676
QUEUE LIMIT FOR TAS ................................................................................................. 1-677
TRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION (TAS) ........................................................................ 1-680
OFF-HOOK ALARM ................................................................................................. 1-687
OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS .............................................................................. 1-689
ONE-TOUCH GROUP MESSAGING ....................................................................... 1-693
OPERATOR MONITORING ..................................................................................... 1-698
PAD LOCK ............................................................................................................... 1-699
PC PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................ 1-703
FAULT MESSAGE ........................................................................................................... 1-705
FAULT REPORT SCHEDULING ..................................................................................... 1-706
PASSWORDS ................................................................................................................. 1-707
PEG COUNT ................................................................................................................... 1-709
REMOVE AND RESTORE SERVICE ............................................................................. 1-710
STATION LINE STATUS DISPLAY ................................................................................. 1-711
PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE ...................................................................... 1-712
POOLED LINE ACCESS .......................................................................................... 1-713
PRIORITY CALL ....................................................................................................... 1-715
PRIVACY .................................................................................................................. 1-716
PRIVATE LINES ....................................................................................................... 1-718
REMOTE HOLD ....................................................................................................... 1-719
RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY ........................................................... 1-721

vi
ROUTE ADVANCE ................................................................................................... 1-724
SAVE AND REPEAT ................................................................................................ 1-725
SCAM CALL PREVENTION ..................................................................................... 1-726
SECURITY ALARM .................................................................................................. 1-732
SEMI-AUTOMATIC ATTENDANT CAMP-ON .......................................................... 1-733
SET RELOCATION (STATION DATA SWAP) ......................................................... 1-735
SET RELOCATION (STATION KEY DATA COPY) ................................................. 1-736
SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS) ...................................................................... 1-738
SINGLE DIGIT FEATURE ACCESS CODE ............................................................. 1-739
SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE (VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS) ................................ 1-742
STATION HUNTING ................................................................................................. 1-743
STATION HUNTING-CIRCULAR .................................................................................... 1-743
STATION HUNTING-TERMINAL .................................................................................... 1-745
STATION HUNTING-SECRETARIAL .............................................................................. 1-746
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) ............................................. 1-748
SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................... 1-748
BILLING DATA STORAGE TO SMDR ............................................................................ 1-752
COMBINATION OF SMDR SERVICE ............................................................................. 1-753
HARDWARE REQUIRED ................................................................................................ 1-754
PROGRAMMING SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 1-755
PROGRAMMING ............................................................................................................. 1-756
STATION SPEED DIALING ..................................................................................... 1-770
STEP CALL .............................................................................................................. 1-780
SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ................................. 1-781
SYSTEM CLOCK SETUP BY STATION DIALING ................................................... 1-782
SYSTEM SPEED DIALING ...................................................................................... 1-783
TENANT SERVICE .................................................................................................. 1-793
TIE LINES ................................................................................................................. 1-797
TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING ............................................................................. 1-804
TIMED FORCED RELEASE ..................................................................................... 1-805
TIMED NOTIFICATION ............................................................................................ 1-807
TIMED QUEUE ......................................................................................................... 1-814
TIMED REMINDER .................................................................................................. 1-815
TRUNK-DIRECT APPEARANCES ........................................................................... 1-829
TRUNK QUEUING-OUTGOING ............................................................................... 1-837
TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION ........................................................................ 1-838
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) ................................................................. 1-840
BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-UCD .............................................................................................. 1-843
CALL WAITING INDICATION-UCD ................................................................................. 1-844
DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-UCD .................................................................................... 1-849

vii
 HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-UCD .................................................................................... 1-854
IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-UCD ...................................................................................... 1-855
PRIORITY QUEUING-UCD ............................................................................................. 1-856
QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-UCD ....................................................................................... 1-857
SILENT MONITOR-UCD ................................................................................................. 1-858
UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP)-VOICE AND DATA ..................................... 1-861
USER WEB PORTAL ............................................................................................... 1-869
VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS ......................................................................... 1-886
VOICE GUIDE .......................................................................................................... 1-887
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION (ANALOG) ................................................................. 1-890
VOICE MAIL LIVE RECORD .................................................................................... 1-895
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER ......................................................................................... 1-896
VRS WAITING MESSAGE ....................................................................................... 1-897
WHISPER PAGE ...................................................................................................... 1-902

Chapter 2 HOTEL FEATURES

HOTEL SYSTEM OUTLINE ..................................................................................... 2-2
HOTEL SYSTEM CAPACITY ................................................................................... 2-7
HOTEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 2-8
HOTEL FEATURE LIST ........................................................................................... 2-9
HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING SUMMARY ...................................................... 2-10
HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING ......................................................................... 2-11
PRECAUTION ................................................................................................................. 2-11
HOTEL FEATURE PROGRAMMING .............................................................................. 2-12
AUTOMATIC WAKE UP .................................................................................................. 2-13
CHECK IN/CHECK OUT ................................................................................................. 2-34
DIRECT DATA ENTRY .................................................................................................... 2-40
DO NOT DISTURB-HOTEL/MOTEL ............................................................................... 2-42
DO NOT DISTURB-SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 2-47
HOTEL/MOTEL ATTENDANT CONSOLE ...................................................................... 2-50
HOTEL/MOTEL DID NUMBER ALLOCATION TO GUEST STATION ............................ 2-51
HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT ............................................................... 2-52
HOTEL/MOTEL TOLL RESTRICTION CHANGE-GUEST STATION ............................. 2-55
HOUSE PHONE .............................................................................................................. 2-60
MAID STATUS ................................................................................................................. 2-61
MESSAGE REGISTRATION ........................................................................................... 2-66
MESSAGE WAITING ....................................................................................................... 2-68
PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE ..................................................... 2-71
ROOM CUTOFF .............................................................................................................. 2-89
ROOM CUTOFF-GROUP ................................................................................................ 2-90

viii
 ROOM STATUS .............................................................................................................. 2-94
SINGLE DIGIT DIALING .................................................................................................. 2-95
SUITE ROOM SERVICE ................................................................................................. 2-97

Chapter 3 ISDN FEATURES

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................... 3-2
SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-PRI ................................................................................... 3-2
SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-BRI ................................................................................... 3-3
SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-VPN ................................................................................. 3-5
SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN TELEPHONE ................................................................... 3-7
PRT .................................................................................................................................. 3-9
BRT .................................................................................................................................. 3-10
PLO .................................................................................................................................. 3-12
CONDITIONS FOR ISDN DATA COMMUNICATION .............................................. 3-13
ISDN SYSTEM CONDITIONS .................................................................................. 3-14
LINE DISTANCE BETWEEN PBX AND NT1/ISDN TELEPHONE .................................. 3-14
PRT SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 3-15
FRAME CONFIGURATION OF 24PRT ........................................................................... 3-15
FRAME CONFIGURATION OF 30PRT ........................................................................... 3-19
ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................... 3-21
PRIMARY RATE INTERFACE TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT ........................................ 3-21
ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................... 3-35
BRT ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................................................... 3-35
ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING .......................................................................... 3-47
CLI TRANSPARENCY ............................................................................................. 3-48
DID ADDRESSING ................................................................................................... 3-54
MEGACOM® ACCESS ............................................................................................. 3-58
SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT/CPN TO NETWORK-PRESENT ............................ 3-59
SID TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY ................................................................ 3-72
CPN TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY ............................................................... 3-73
SUBADDRESS-PRESENT ....................................................................................... 3-75
TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION .................................................... 3-81
CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTION ................................................................... 3-82
AVAILABLE SERVICES .................................................................................................. 3-82
CALL BY CALL LCR PROGRAMMING ........................................................................... 3-83
FEATURES ...................................................................................................................... 3-84
ADVICE OF CHARGE-DISPLAY ............................................................................. 3-89
ALTERNATE ROUTING FOR ISDN ......................................................................... 3-91
CENTREX SHF OVER ISDN ................................................................................... 3-92

ix
 OVERLAP SENDING ............................................................................................... 3-93
OVERLAP RECEIVING ............................................................................................ 3-96
ADDRESSING .......................................................................................................... 3-101
CHANNEL NEGOTIATION ....................................................................................... 3-104
CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (COLP)/
CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION RESTRICTION (COLR) .............................. 3-105
MALICIOUS CALL TRACE ....................................................................................... 3-107
CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS) ......................................... 3-108
ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING ................................................................................... 3-110
ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMING ........................................................... 3-112
BRT ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................................................... 3-112
POINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION .................................................................................. 3-116
POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION ....................................................................... 3-117
INDIVIDUAL TERMINAL CALL ....................................................................................... 3-119
GROUP CALL .................................................................................................................. 3-123

Chapter 4 OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE (OAI) FEATURES

OAI SYSTEM OUTLINE ........................................................................................... 4-2
OAI SYSTEM CONDITIONS .................................................................................... 4-3
LIST OF OAI COMMANDS ...................................................................................... 4-4
OAI BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT ............................................................................ 4-12
MSF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-14
TMF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-19
MRF DATA ASSIGNMENT ...................................................................................... 4-21
SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-22
FLF DATA ASSIGNMENT ........................................................................................ 4-35
KTF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-36
ACF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-37
SSF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-38
SMF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-42
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ETHER ........................................................................ 4-48

Appendix A CHARACTER CODE TABLE

x
 INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
This manual explains the feature programming and hardware requirements for each business, hotel, ISDN
and OAI service in the SV9300.

NOTE: As for the parts described as [9300V3 STEP2 software required] in this manual support
9300V3 STEP2 (SC - 4351 LYRA BSC PROG - V3.2.0) software or later.

1
 INTRODUCTION
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual consists of five chapters and one appendix. The following paragraphs summarize Chapters 1
through 4, and Appendix A.

CHAPTER 1 BUSINESS FEATURES

This chapter explains the programming procedure and hardware requirements for
Business Features in this system.

CHAPTER 2 HOTEL FEATURES

This chapter explains the system outline, system capacity, system specifications,
system programming and hardware requirements for the Hotel System.

CHAPTER 3 ISDN FEATURES

This chapter explains the programming procedure to provide the ISDN feature to
the PBX.

CHAPTER 4 OAI FEATURES

This chapter explains the programming procedure to provide OAI to the PBX.

APPENDIX A CHARACTER CODE TABLE

This appendix contains the character code table to set a station name displayed on
Multiline Terminal or Attendant Console.

NOTE: As for the equipment name and function of chassis and circuit blades and system capacity, refer
to the System Hardware Manual.

2
 INTRODUCTION
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

PBX System Designation
PBX system is usually designated as “PBX” or “system”.
When we must draw a clear line between the PBX systems, they are designated as follows.
SV9300 : UNIVERGE SV9300
SV8300 : UNIVERGE SV8300
2000 IPS : NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER
2400 IPX: 2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Attendant Console Name

Attendant Console is usually designated as “Attendant Console”.
When the console type is limited by a service, it is designated as follows:

DESKCON: Desk Console (SN716 DESKCON)

Paging Adapter Name

With the release of the new Paging Adapter model, the current model “PGD(2)-U10 ADP” is integrated to
the new model “IP8WW-2PGDAD-A”. Therefore, as for the term of “PGD(2)-U10 ADP” or “PGD(2)-
U10” described in this manual, please read them as “IP8WW-2PGDAD-A” or “Paging Adapter”.

Terminal Name
The term of “DESI-less terminal” described in this manual is the same meaning as the “Self-Labeling ter-
minal”.As for the following terminal names, please read “DESI-less” as “Self-Labeling”.

DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 Series DESI-less: DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 Series Self-Labeling

DT830 DESI-less: DT830 Self-Labeling
DT830DG DESI-less: DT830DG Self-Labeling
DT820 DESI-less: DT820 Self-Labeling
DT730 DESI-less: DT730 Self-Labeling
DT710 DESI-less: DT710 Self-Labeling
DT430 DESI-less: DT430 Self-Labeling
DT330 DESI-less: DT330 Self-Labeling

3
 INTRODUCTION
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

In this manual, the following terminals are usually designated as each common term unless other type of
terminal is specified.

COMMON TERMS TERMINAL NAMES

term
Multiline Digital Multiline Terminal D Dterm85 (Series i)
Terminal DT500 Series DT530
DT400 Series DT410
DT430
DT300 Series DT310
DT330
IP Station IP Multiline Terminal IP Enabled Digital Dterm85 (Series i)
Multiline Terminal (IP Adapter Type)
DtermIP INASET
DtermIP Dterm85 (Series i)
(IP Bundled Type)
DT900 Series DT920 DT920
Series DT920 Self-Labeling
DT930 DT930
Series DT930 Touch Panel
DT800 Series DT820/820C
DT830/DT830CG/DT830DG
DT700 Series DT710
DT730/DT730CG/DT730DG
DT750
DT770G
Soft Phone DtermSP30
SP350
SIP Wireless Terminal MH240
IP Single Standard SIP Terminal GT890 (ST500 for GT890 is installed.)
Line ST500 (for iOS or for Android)
Telephone Third-party SIP Terminal
(SIP)

NOTE: DT770G (Cradle Phone) is normally used together with a smart device. The operation and the
condition depend on the specifications of application on smart device.

4
 INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL

REFERENCE MANUAL
During installation, also refer to the manuals below:

System Hardware Manual:

Contains the installation procedure for the PBX system and the hardware installation procedure for
the SV9300.

Command Manual:
Contains the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command functions and data re-
quired for programming the system.

System Data Programming Manual:

Contains the Customer Specifications Sheets and the System Data Programming Sheets.

Programming Manual:
Contains procedure for programming each business, hotel, ISDN and OAI feature.

System Maintenance Manual:

Contains the system maintenance service and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.

Networking Manual:
Contains the system description and the programming procedure for the CCIS, Q-SIG and Remote
Unit System.

SMDR/MCI/PMS Interface Specifications:

Contains the interface specifications for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), Message Cen-
ter Interface (MCI), Property Management System (PMS) and the PMS operation.

PC Programming Manual:
Contains the functional description and the installation procedure of PCPro.

UM8000 Installation Manual:

Contains the system description and the programming procedure for UM8000.

5
 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

Chapter 1 through Chapter 4 explains the feature programming for each service about the following items.

PROGRAMMING
This section explains the programming procedure for each service.
The meanings of (1), (2) and marking are as follows.

(1) : 1st data

(2) : 2nd data

: Default
With the system data clear command (CM00, CM01), the data with this marking is automatically
set for each command.

RESET : A reset of the CPU blade is required after data setting.

Press RESET switch on the CPU blade.
BLADE RESET : A reset of the blade by CME0 Y=3 is required after data setting.
OFF LINE : Commands with this marking can be used only under Off-Line mode of the CPU
blade. To set Off-Line mode,
(1) Set SENSE switch on the CPU blade to “E” or “F”.
(2) Press RESET switch on the CPU blade.

6
 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

HARDWARE REQUIRED
In this section, required hardware for each service is listed, except the following:

Single line telephone set and interface blade (LC blade)

Central Office Trunk blade (COT blade)
Attendant Console and interface blade

For Direct Digital Interface, Message Center Interface (MCI), and Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR), the following sections explain the system for further details.

SYSTEM OUTLINE
DTI*
PLO*
SYSTEM OPERATION**
TIME SLOT ALLOCATION*
DTI SPECIFICATIONS*
PROGRAMMING SUMMARY***

* : Direct Digital Interface only

** : MCI only
***: SMDR only

7
 INTRODUCTION
PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS
System Data Backup

CAUTION
• If you operate as follows without system data backup after system data setting or service
memory setting (registration of the features such as “Call Forwarding” and “Speed Dialing”
from a station), the data that has been set is invalid.
You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.
-Turning Off the system
-System Reset (reset of CPU blade)
-Changing the CPU blade to Off-Line Mode
-Changing the CPU blade to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode
In addition, the VRS data backup is also required when any data is recorded or changed in
the VRS.
• You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.
-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00
(If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)
As the system data backup is performed, the VRS data backup is also performed at the
same time.
-Executing the system data backup from PCPro/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0: 0
• Do not reset the CPU blade while “SYSD” LED on the CPU blade is flashing.

8
UNIVERGE SV9300
Programming Manual

BUSINESS FEATURES
Chapter

This chapter explains the programming procedure and hardware re-

1
quirements for Business Features in this system.
Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the feature names
except the features on the next page.

1-1
 Chapter 1 BUSINESS FEATURES

The following features require no programming.

• Alarm Indications • Night Service

• Attendant Console – Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant
– Call Splitting Console
– Serial Call • Non-exclusive Hold
• Attendant Lockout • PC Programming
• Elapsed Call Timer – Battery Release Control
• Feature Activation from Secondary Extension – Configuration Report
• Handsfree Answerback • Power Failure Transfer
• Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring • Reserve Power
• Multiline Terminal • Voice Mail Private Password
– Called Station Status Display
– Handsfree Unit
– I-Hold/I-Use Indication
– Microphone Control
– Multiple Line Operation

For the following features, refer to the SV9300 manuals mentioned below.

Refer to the System Manual:

• Automatic Program Download for IP Multiline • Modem over IP
Terminal • SIP
• Bandwidth Control • SNMP
• Brute-force Login Attempt Protection • Terminal Login via NAT
• Call Forwarding-Logout (IP Multiline Terminal) • VoIP Encryption
• FAX over IP

1-2
 ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify whether Service Set Tone should be (1) 362

sent after dialing the access code for Account (2) 0 : No Tone
Code entry. 1 : Service Set Tone

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for • Y=02

Account Code entry to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Account Code in Service Restriction • Y=030

Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM42 Specify the maximum number of digits for (1) 10

Account Codes with CPU. (2) 01-16 : 1 digit-16 digits
NONE : 10 digits
NOTE: If the SMDR message format (2400
IMS Format) is assigned, the
maximum number of digits is 10.

CM20 Assign an access code for Account Code entry. • Y=0-3: Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A085

CM90 Assign an Account Code feature access key to • Y=00

a Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0085

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

SMDR

1-3
 ADD-ON MODULE

ADD-ON MODULE
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number for DLC blade. • Y=0
BLADE RESET (1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 10: DLC blade

CM10 Assign the Add-On Module number to a Phys- • Y=00

ical Port number associated to the DLC blade. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE: The same number (the last two digits YY: 01-18: Slot No.
of the data) should not be used for ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
both DSS Console (E100-E131) and (2) EC00-EC31: Add-On Module No. NOTE
Add-on Module (EC00-EC31).

Assign the Add-On Module to be equipped • Y=01

with the DT700/DT800/DT900 Series through (1) 0000-1499: Virtual Port No.
the LAN connection (Side Connection). (For IP terminal)
(2) EC00-EC31: Add-On Module No.

CM98 Assign the Multiline Terminal which is associ- • Y=0

ated with the Add-On Module. (1) 00-31: Last two digits of Add-On
Module No.
EC00-EC31
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

CM12 Assign the Service Restriction Class for the • Y=05

accommodation of Single Line Telephone to (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Multiline Terminal. (Assignment for Single- (2) 0: Accommodated
Line Telephone only).

CM90 Assign the station and trunk numbers to the • Y=00

keys on each Add-On Module. (1) My Line No. + , + Add-On Module Key
No. (30-54)
NOTE: Single-Line, Virtual Line or My Line (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. NOTE
can be assigned on Add-On Module. DXXX
XXX: 000-511 (Trunk No.)

1-4
 ADD-ON MODULE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign the Automatic/Manual/Dial Intercom • Y=00

key to each Add-On Module, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Add-On Module Key
For details, refer to INTERCOM. No. (30-54)
(2) A000-A031, A100-A131:
Automatic Intercom No.
A200-A700, A201-A701...A224-A724:
Manual Intercom No.
B000-B900, B001-B901...B024-B924:
Dial Intercom No.

Assign the Station Speed Dialing to the keys • Y=00

on each Add-On Module, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Add-On Module Key
For details, refer to STATION SPEED No. (30-89)
DIALING. (2) F11XX
XX: 00-99: Station Speed Dialing 00-99

Assign the Delayed Ringing feature to each • Y=02

line/trunk key on an Add-On Module, if (1) My Line No. + , + Add-On Module Key
required. No. (30-45) NOTE
(2) 0: Delayed Ringing
NOTE: Delayed Ringing can be assigned to
the first 16 line/trunk keys
(Key No. 30-45).

CM41 Specify the Delayed Ringing timing. • Y=1

(1) 09
(2) 01-20: 2048-40960 ms.
(2048 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 10240 ms.

CM30 Provide Trunk-Direct Appearances to the • Y=18

trunk number. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 0: To provide

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

DSS Console
DLC blade

1-5
 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY

ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
PROGRAMMING

To specify the Type of Clock/Calendar Display on Multiline Terminal, do the following programming.

• When specifying the Type of Clock/Calendar Display for each system:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the Type of Clock/Calendar Display (1) 2001

on Multiline Terminal. (2) 00 : DD MMM WWW hh: mmAP
01 : hh: mmAP MMM DD WWW
02 : hh: mmAP WWW DD MMM
03 : MM-DD WWW hh: mmAP
04 : hh: mmAP WWW DD MMM
YYYY
10 : DD MMM WWW HH: mm
11 : HH: mm MMM DD WWW
12 : HH: mm WWW DD MMM
13 : MM-DD WWW HH: mm
14 : HH: mm WWW DD MMM
YYYY
NONE : As per Display Language

NOTE 1: The meanings of 2nd data are shown below.

YYYY : Year
MMM : Month (Displayed in 3 alphabetical characters according to the display language
(such as Jan and Feb for English)).
* When the display language is represented by Japanese/Simplified Chinese/Tradi-
tional Chinese characters, this data is displayed in English.
MM : Month (Displayed in numeric characters) [01-12]
DD : Date [01-31]
WWW : Day (Displayed in 3 alphabetical characters according to the display language
(such as Sun and Mon for English)).
* When the display language is represented by Japanese/Simplified Chinese/Tradi-
tional Chinese characters, this data is displayed in English.
HH : Hour (24-hour clock) [00-23]
hh : Hour (12-hour clock) [00-11]
mm : Minute [00-59]
AP : AM/PM

NOTE 2: After setting/changing this data, the assigned data is applied to each Multiline terminal by
resetting the terminal manually or executing CM12 Y=29.

1-6
 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Apply the LCD display setting to each multi- • Y=29

line terminal in the system. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0: To execute

NOTE: When this data is set to 0 (To execute) after changing any system data relating to the LCD
display of Multiline Terminal, the changes are applied to the Multiline Terminal. After the
data is applied, this data returns to 1 (Not executed).

END

1-7
 ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY

• When specifying the Type of Clock/Calendar Display for each station:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Specify the Type of Clock/Calendar Display • Y=58

on Multiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00 : DD MMM WWW hh: mmAP
01 : hh: mmAP MMM DD WWW
02 : hh: mmAP WWW DD MMM
03 : MM-DD WWW hh: mmAP
04 : hh: mmAP WWW DD MMM
YYYY
10 : DD MMM WWW HH: mm
11 : HH: mm MMM DD WWW
12 : HH: mm WWW DD MMM
13 : MM-DD WWW HH: mm
14 : HH: mm WWW DD MMM
YYYY
29 : Not displayed
[9300V7 software required]
30 : As per Display Language
NONE : As per CM08>2001

NOTE 1: The meanings of 2nd data are shown below.

YYYY : Year
MMM : Month (Displayed in 3 alphabetical characters according to the display language
(such as Jan and Feb for English)).
* When the display language is represented by Japanese/Simplified Chinese/Tradi-
tional Chinese characters, this data is displayed in English.
MM : Month (Displayed in numeric characters) [01-12]
DD : Date [01-31]
WWW : Day (Displayed in 3 alphabetical characters according to the display language
(such as Sun and Mon for English)).
* When the display language is represented by Japanese/Simplified Chinese/Tradi-
tional Chinese characters, this data is displayed in English.
HH : Hour (24-hour clock) [00-23]
hh : Hour (12-hour clock) [00-11]
mm : Minute [00-59]
AP : AM/PM

NOTE 2: After setting/changing this data, the assigned data is applied to each Multiline terminal by
resetting the terminal manually or executing CM12 Y=29.

NOTE 3: When using DT900 Series with Portal Mode and the duplicated information on the LCD
(the calendar display on the information area) is not necessary, set the second data 29.

END

1-8
 ANALOG PORT ADAPTER (APR-L Adapter)

ANALOG PORT ADAPTER (APR-L Adapter)

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: This feature is available for DT300/DT400/DT500 Series.

To assign the Single Port Mode:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Provide the Analog Port Adapter connection to • Y=32

the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0: To connect

Assign the Single Port Mode to the required • Y=33

stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
BLADE RESET (2) 1 : Single port mode

Specify whether a ringing signal is sent to the • Y=35

analog terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0 : Not sent
1 : To send

END

To assign the Dual Port Mode:

(1) Data Assignment for Digital Multiline Terminal accommodates the Analog Port Adapter

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Provide the Analog Port Adapter connection to • Y=32

the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0: To connect

Assign the Dual Port Mode to the required • Y=33

stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
BLADE RESET (2) 0: Dual port mode

END

1-9
 ANALOG PORT ADAPTER (APR-L Adapter)

(2) Data Assignment for Analog Terminal connected to the Analog Port Adapter

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM10 Assign an analog terminal station number to • Y=00

the required Physical Port number. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 1: For detail of Dual Port Mode, refer YY: 01-18: Slot No.
to “Setting Method of Port number/ ZZ : 17-32: Circuit No.
Station number in Dual port mode” (2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal
in CM10 of the Command Manual. Station No.

NOTE 2: The Physical Port number corre-

sponds to the station that is accom-
modating the APR-L adapter
(Example: Station Port No. 010101/
APR-L Port No. 010117, Station
Port No. 010102/APR-L Port No.
010118).

CM90 Assign a key for analog terminal. • Y=00

(1) Analog Terminal Station No. + , + Key
No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal
Station No. assigned
by CM10 Y=00

CM93 Assign an analog terminal station number as (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal Station
Prime Line. No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal Station
No.

CM13 Provide the Analog Port Adapter connection to • Y=32

the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal Station
No.
(2) 0: To connect

Specify whether a ringing signal is sent to the • Y=35

analog terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0 : Not sent
1 : To send

END

1-10
 ANALOG PORT ADAPTER (APR-L Adapter)

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Analog Port Adapter

1-11
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE
PROGRAMMING

To access the Voice Response System (VRS) from a station or C.O./Tie Line party:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the multiple connections of the (1) 124

Voice Response System (VRS) on (2) 0: Available
Announcement Service.

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for • Y=02

Announcement Service to the required (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
stations. (2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Announcement Service in Service • Y=034 Announcement Service Group 0

Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (Replay)
• Y=035 Announcement Service Group 1
(Replay)
• Y=036 Announcement Service Group 2
(Replay)
• Y=037 Announcement Service Group 3
(Replay)
• Y=038 Announcement Service Group 4
(Replay)
• Y=039 Announcement Service Group 0-4
(Record)
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

1-12
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign access codes for Announcement • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Service. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A103: Announcement Service Group 0-4
(Record)
A104: Announcement Service Group 0
(Replay)
A105: Announcement Service Group 1
(Replay)
A106: Announcement Service Group 2
(Replay)
A107: Announcement Service Group 3
(Replay)
A108: Announcement Service Group 4
(Replay)
A109: Announcement Service Group 0-4
(Delete)

CM41 When Multiple Connections are provided • Y=0

(CM08>124=0), specify the duration of (1) 53
message replay timer for the Announcement (2) 01-99: 4-396 seconds
Service. (4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 60-64
seconds.

CM49 Assign the function for each Voice Response • Y=00

System. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 04X Z
X: 0-4: Announcement Service Group No.
Z : 0-9: Announcement Service Message
No.

CM35 To allow a C.O./Tie Line party with this • Y=069 Announcement Service Group 0
service, assign the Announcement Service • Y=070 Announcement Service Group 1
Group 0-4 to the required trunk routes. • Y=071 Announcement Service Group 2
• Y=072 Announcement Service Group 3
• Y=073 Announcement Service Group 4
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Allow

END

1-13
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

NOTE 1: A maximum of five different announcements can be accessed. There is a limit of 8/16 Voice
Response System Circuit for each of the five different announcements. When recording an
announcement, each Voice Response System Circuit must be recorded individually.
NOTE 2: Each time a station is connected to a Voice Response System Circuit, the message will be
repeated three times. The station will then be disconnected.
NOTE 3: For the single connection of a Voice Response System Circuit, the duration of an announcement
is limited to 120 seconds.
NOTE 4: For the multi-connection of a Voice Response System Circuit, the duration of replay for an an-
nouncement is programmable from 4 to 396 seconds.

To provide a voice message when an incoming C.O. line/Tie line call has been transferred and encounters
a busy or no answer condition:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice • Y=02

Response System Access (Record/Replay/De- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
lete). (2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Voice Response System Access in • Y=033

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM65 Provide a voice message connection to a • Y=50 No Answer

transferred trunk when the transferred destina- (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
tion does not answer or the transferred destina- (2) 0: To provide
tion is busy to the required tenant.
• Y=51 Busy
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM08 Assign the Transferred C.O. call to a busy (1) 146

station is automatically Camped-on when (2) 0 : Recall transferring station
transferring station goes on-hook.

1-14
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM49 Assign the function for each Voice Response • Y=00

System. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 06XX: No Answer
XX : 00-63: Message No.
07XX: Busy
XX : 00-63: Message No.

• Y=06 No Answer
• Y=07 Busy
(1) XX: 00-63: Tenant No. of transferring
station
(2) XX: 00-63: Message No. assigned by
CM49 Y=00

CM20 To record, replay and delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3
the respective Voice Response System access (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
code. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay
A102: Delete

CM04 Assign the Maximum number of channels for • Y=10

Speech synthesis and Voice Response System. (1) 05
(2) 00-08 : Maximum number of channels
NOTE: The number of channels for Voice for Speech synthesis
Response System (default: 8 chan- NONE : 8 channels
nels) is that subtracted the number
of channels for Speech synthesis
from the number of simultaneously
usable channels (16 channels).

END

1-15
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

NOTE: Announcement Service can be used to provide a voice message when an incoming C.O. line/Tie
line call has been transferred and encounters a busy or no answer condition. After the voice
message is given, normal call processing continues.
• This application can be programmed on a tenant basis.
• Only one (1) message within 120 seconds can be recorded on an individual Voice Response
System Circuit.
• In this application, a minimum of two Voice Response System Circuits are needed: one is for
busy condition and the other is for no answer.
• More than one Voice Response System Circuit can be used, depending on traffic conditions.
• System programming can be set to, wait until circuits become free or immediately follow pre-
programmed normal call handling, if a busy condition is encountered.
• Voice Response System Circuits can be shared among tenants.
• This feature does not function on Attendant transferred calls.

To provide a voice message when an incoming DID line/Tie line call has been terminated to a station and
encounters a busy or no answer condition:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice • Y=02

Response System Access (Record/Replay/De- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
lete). (2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Voice Response System Access in • Y=033

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
Y=02. assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM41 Specify the transferred timing when an • Y=0

incoming DID Line/Tie Line call encounters a (1) 01
no answer condition. (2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

1-16
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM49 Assign the function for each Voice Response • Y=00

System. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 0D00: No Answer
0E00 : Busy

CM51 Assign the Voice Response System as the des- • Y=00 No Answer
tination of the DID call on each tenant. • Y=03 Busy
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
No.

Assign the Voice Response System as the des- • Y=01 No Answer

tination of the Tie Line call on each tenant. • Y=04 Busy
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
No.

CM20 To record, replay and delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3
the respective Voice Response System access (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
code. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay
A102: Delete

END

NOTE: Announcement Service can be used to provide a voice message when an incoming DID line/Tie
line call has been terminated to a station and encounters a busy or no answer condition. After
the voice message is given, normal call processing continues.
• This application can be programmed on a tenant basis.
• Only one (1) message within 120 seconds can be recorded on an individual Voice Response
System Circuit.

1-17
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

To provide an Internal Recorded Message from a Voice Response System (VRS) in place of Music On
Hold:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM48 Define the type of call to be provided with • Y=0

Hold Message. (1) 00: C.O. Line Call
01: Tie Line Call
02: Station
(2) 0500: Hold Message
CM49 Assign the data for Message on Hold Service • Y=00
to the Voice Response System. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 05XX: Message on Hold
XX: 00-63: Message No.

• Y=05
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 00-63: Message No. assigned by CM49
Y=00
CM41 Specify the Message on Hold Service with • Y=0
VRS guard timer. (1) 164
(2) 01-12: 10-120 minutes
(10 minutes increment)
If no data is set, the default setting is 30 minutes.

CM20 To record, replay, or delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3
the respective Voice Response System access (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
code. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay
A102: Delete

END

NOTE: A voice message in place of Music-On-Hold can be provided when a call has been placed on
hold.
• Different messages can be programmed on a tenant basis.
• Different messages can be programmed, depending on the type of line (C.O. line, Tie line or
station) on Hold.
• More than one connection can be made to a Voice Response System Circuit. Only the first
connection can be assured of hearing the message from the beginning.
• Announcement will be repeated until the call is removed from hold.

1-18
 ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE

To provide the Night Announcement by Voice Response System (VRS):

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign the terminating system in Night Mode • Y=03

for incoming C.O. calls. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 04: Direct-In Termination

Assign the Voice Response System number to • Y=05

each incoming trunk. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
No.

CM49 Assign the function of the Voice Response • Y=00

System to Night Announcement. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 03000: Night Announcement Service

CM20 To record, replay, or delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 (Numbering Plan Group 0-3)
the respective Voice Response System access (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
code. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay
A102: Delete

END

NOTE: A voice message can be sent to incoming C.O. lines during Night Mode.
• Different messages can be programmed on each C.O. line.
• The voice message can be programmed for Day/Night Mode.
• More than one connection can be made to a Voice Response System Circuit. Only the first
connection can be assured of hearing the message from the beginning.
• Announcements may be programmed to be repeated from 4 to 120 seconds in four-second
increments.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

CPU blade (VRS using a built-in Flash ROM)

1-19
 ANSWER KEY

ANSWER KEY
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class B for Answer • Y=02

Key to the required Multiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15 Allow Answer Key in Service Restriction • Y=072

Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0: Allow

END

NOTE: An ANSWER key is initially assigned on each Multiline Terminal.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade

1-20
 ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING

ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the Access code for an operator call. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code (0)
(2) 800: Operator call

CM60 Allocate the ATT Group number to each • Y=00

DESKCON. (1) 0-7: DESKCON No. assigned by CM10
(2) 0-3 : ATT Group No.
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is NONE : No data
required after this data setting.

Assign the Master DESKCON within the ATT • Y=01

Group. (1) 0-7: DESKCON No. assigned by CM10
(2) 0 : Master ATT
NOTE 1: Assign one Master DESKCON for 1 : Not Master ATT
each ATT Group.

NOTE 2: Even if an ATT Group consists of

only one DESKCON, specify the
DESKCON as a Master DESKCON.

NOTE 3: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is

required after this data setting.

CM62 Specify the tenants to be handled by each ATT • Y=0-3 ATT Group No. 0-3 assigned by
Group. CM60 Y=00
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is (2) 0: To be handled
required after this data setting.

CM08 Specify the Attendant access (DESKCON No. (1) 142

0) capability provided from the stations (2) 0 : Allowed
belonging to a tenant with no Attendant 1 : Restricted
Console.

Provide the system with Passing Dial Tone. (1) 048

(2) 1 : Available

1-21
 ATTENDANT ASSISTED CALLING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Attendant Night (1) 018

Transfer, if required. (2) 0 : Not available
1 : Available

Specify the Individual Attendant access (1) 143

capability provided from a station belonging to (2) 0 : Restricted
a different tenant. 1 : Allowed

END

1-22
 ATTENDANT CAMP-ON

ATTENDANT CAMP-ON
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify Attendant Camp-On as a type of (1) 542

Camp-On to activate from the Attendant (2) 1 : Attendant Camp-On
Console.

Specify the Camp-On Tone sent to busy station (1) 068

(2) 0 : Send out only once
1 : Repeat at 4 second intervals

CM41 Specify the Attendant Recall timing of Camp- • Y=0

On. (1) 00
(2) 01-14: 2.4-33.6 seconds
(2.4 second increments)
15-24: 38.4-124.8 seconds
(9.6 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 31.2-33.6
seconds.

END

To display the busy station number and name on an Attendant Console when reentering a Camped-On
trunk by pressing the loop key:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the Attendant Console with the busy (1) 441
station number/name display when reentering (2) 0: Available
a Camped-On trunk.

END

1-23
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM04 Display Language for DESKCON LCD. • Y=00

(1) 00
NOTE 1: Russian (2nd data=15) and Turkish (2) 00 : Japanese
(2nd data=16) cannot be displayed 01 : English
on DESKCON LCD. 02 : French (Canadian French)
03 : Spanish (Latin Spanish)
NOTE 2: After setting/changing this data, the 04 : Portuguese (Brazilian Portuguese)
assigned data is reflected to each 05 : German
Multiline terminal by resetting the 06 : Italian
terminal or executing CM12 Y=29. 07 : Netherlandish
08 : French (Europe)
09 : Spanish (Europe)
10 : Portuguese (Europe)
11 : Swedish
12 : Danish
13 : Catalan
31 : English

1-24
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number for DLC blade. • Y=0
BLADE RESET (1) XX ZZ
XX: 01: Unit No.
NOTE 1: DESKCON can only be accommo- ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
dated to Unit01. (2) 10: DLC blade

NOTE 2: Maximum 2 of DESKCON can be

accommodated to each DLC blade.

NOTE 3: This data assignment is not required

when DESKCON is added on to
existing DLC blade.

NOTE 4: The firmware of DLC blade must be

version 2.3 or later.

CM10 Assign the DESKCON number to its associat- • Y=00

ed Physical Port number. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
BLADE RESET XX: 01: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE 1: Blade reset is required when DESK- ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
CON is added on to existing DLC (2) E000-E007: DESKCON No.
blade.

NOTE 2: DESKCON cannot be added on to

DLC blade when PGD(2)-U10 ADP
is accommodated to existing DLC
blade.

CM30 Set the terminating system for the incoming • Y=02 Day Mode
calls to DESKCON. • Y=03 Night Mode
• Y=40 Mode A
• Y=41 Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 14: Attendant Console

CM41 Set the D11 data receiving time after PSW (For • Y=0
DLC) to 06 (6 ms.). (1) 142
BLADE RESET (2) 06: 6 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 3 ms.

1-25
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign the required Attendant Call Selection • Y=00

keys and Function keys to each DESKCON, (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
according to the key label. To assign Multi- No.
Function Key, refer to MULTI-FUNCTION (2) F6000-F6068: Type of Calls to be assigned
KEY. Page 1-53 F6100-F6245: Functions to be assigned

(01) (02) (03) (04)

Night
LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall PAGE
(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)

BV Call Park SC Start Mute Position Busy

(23) (24) (26) (27) (31) (32)

Cancel
L6 (12) Volume
(95)
1 2 3 SRC DEST
L5 (11)
Talk
L4 (10) 4 5 6 (93)
(90) (91)

L3 (09) 7 8 9 Release Hold Answer

L2 (08)
0 # (96)
(97) (94)
L1 (07)

Key No. Data Description (Key Label)

13 F6000 C.O. Incoming 0 (LDN)
14 F6040 Tie Line Incoming 0 (TIE)
15 F6064 Call Forwarding-Busy Line (Busy)
16 F6060 Operator Call (ATND)
17 F6063 Call Forwarding-No Answer (NANS)
18 F6061 Recall (Recall)
21 F6150 Paging (PAGE)
24 F6107 Busy Verification (BV)
90 F6200 Source (SRC)
91 F6201 Destination (DEST)
93 F6203 Talk (Talk)
94 F6204 Hold (Hold)
95 F6202 Cancel (Cancel)
96 F6252 Answer (Answer)
97 F6253 Release (Release)

NOTE: When the DESKCON is used to set hotel features, the Reset key should be assigned to one
of the feature keys (i.e key 21) in the Idle state mode.

1-26
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM60 Assign the ATT Group number to each DESK- • Y=00

CON. (1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
(2) 0-3 : ATT GROUP 0-3
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is NONE : No data
required after this data setting.

Specify the Master DESKCON within the ATT • Y=01

Group assigned by CM60 Y=00. (1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
(2) 0 : Master ATT
NOTE 1: Assign one Master DESKCON for 1 : Not Master ATT
each ATT Group.

NOTE 2: Even if an ATT Group consists of

only one DESKCON, specify the
DESKCON as a Master DESKCON.

NOTE 3: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is

required after this data setting.

When the Master DESKCON is specified by • Y=06

CM60 Y=01, make the NT Switch effective by (1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
the Day/Night Mode Change key. (2) 0: Effective

NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is

required after this data setting.

Assign the password for DESKCON Lockout. • Y=30

(1) 0
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is (2) X-X...X: Password (Maximum 8 digits)
required after this data setting. X : 0-9, A (*), B (#)
If no data is set, the default setting is NONE.
In this case, the password is set to “12345678”.

When providing 2nd Ringing feature on the • Y=16

DESKCON, make Off-Hook Ringing (1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
effective. (2) 0: Effective

NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is

required after this data setting.

1-27
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM60 Allow or restrict the system to keep the volume • Y=23

level changed by the volume button on DESK- (1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
CON, after the call is finished. (2) 0 : Allow
1 : Restricted
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is
required after this data setting.

CM62 Specify the tenants to be handled by each ATT • Y=0-3

Group. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : To handle
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is 1 : Not handled
required after this data setting.

CM60 Assign the tenant number for DESKCON. • Y=35

(1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
(2) 00-63 : Tenant No.
NONE : No data

CM08 Specify the tenant number for calling from (1) 1008
DESKCON. (2) 0 : Tenant No. for each DESKCON
(assigned by CM60 Y=35)
NOTE: If tenant No. for DESKCON 1 : The lowest tenant No. of station
(assigned by CM60 Y=35) is not tenants for each ATT group (assigned
assigned, tenant No. for calling from by CM62)
DESKCON is set to the lowest
tenant No. of station tenants for
each ATT group (assigned by
CM62) when this data is set to “0”.

1-28
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

DESCRIPTION DATA
E

CME0 Execute the blade reset for all slots of the Unit • Y=3
accommodated the DLC blade. (1) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 1: Set the same Unit No. and Slot No. YY: 01-18: Slot No.
assigned by the first data. (2) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 2: “00000000-FFFFFFFF” is dis- YY: 01-18: Slot No.
played as the second data when this
command is executed. You can con-
firm the port status of the blade
which is accommodated to the spec-
ified slot by this data display.
00000000: All ports are not in use
Other than 00000000: Ports in use
are included.

NOTE 3: For the blade reset while the system

is operating, be sure to check the
port status. The blade reset must be
executed when all ports are not in
use.

END

1-29
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
SN716 DESKCON

Ringing Pattern/Tone Ringer for DESKCON

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM60 Select the ringing signal patterns of DESK- • Y=36

CON. (1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
(2) 0 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
1 : 1 second ON-1 second OFF
2 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF
3 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF

Tone Ringer for DESKCON • Y=27

(1) 0-7: DESKCON No.
(2) 0 : 600 + 700×16 (Hz)
1 : 480 + 606×8 (Hz)
2 : 1024 + 1285×16 (Hz)
3 : 480 + 606×16 (Hz)

END

DESKCON Soft Reset

Execute the following command after setting of CM60, 62 (commands that require a reset of the DESK-
CON).

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM60 DESKCON Soft Reset. • Y=90

(1) 0
NOTE: Reset DESKCON soft after confirm- (2) 0: To reset
ing all the DESKCON are not used.

END

1-30
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT CALLED/CALLING NAME DISPLAY

ATTENDANT CALLED/CALLING NAME DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the time to go back to Data and Time (1) 120
display after the call answered. (2) 0 : 10 seconds later
1 : 6 seconds later

Specify the duration to display the name. (1) 121

(2) 0 : Until call finished
1 : As per CM08>120

Specify the duration of displaying the destina- (1) 538

tion information (called number/name) indi- (2) 0 : Until call is finished
cated on Attendant Console when the outgoing 1 : 6 seconds
call is answered by the destination (except
CCIS).

Specify the duration of displaying the caller in- (1) 580

formation (calling number/name) indicated on (2) 0 : 6 seconds
Attendant Console when the outgoing call is 1 : Until call is finished
answered by the destination via CCIS.

CM20 Assign the access code for Name Display, used • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
from individual stations. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code (62)
(2) A110: Name Display
See NAME DISPLAY REGISTRATION
FROM MULTILINE TERMINAL.
Page 1-33

CM35 Assign a trunk name number to each trunk • Y=003

route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-14: Trunk Name No. 00-14
15 : Kind of trunk route assigned by
CM35 Y=000 is displayed
16-63: Trunk Name No. 16-63

1-31
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT CALLED/CALLING NAME DISPLAY

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM77 Assign the desired station user name to each • Y=0 By Character Code
station number by CM77 Y=0 or Y=1. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) Character Code 20-7F (Maximum 32 dig-
its)
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2

• Y=1 By Character using PCPro

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) A-Z, 0-9: Character
(Maximum 16 characters)

Assign the desired trunk name to each trunk • Y=2 By Character Code
route by CM77 Y=2 or Y=3. (1) 00-14, 16-63: Trunk Name No. assigned by
CM35 Y=003
(2) Character Code 20-7F (Maximum 8 digits)
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2

• Y=3 By Character using PCPro

(1) 00-14, 16-63: Trunk Name No. assigned by
CM35 Y=003
(2) A-Z, 0-9: Character
(Maximum 4 characters)

END

1-32
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT CALLED/CALLING NAME DISPLAY

NAME DISPLAY REGISTRATION FROM MULTILINE TERMINAL

• You can configure the station number from the Multiline Terminal to which the station number
belongs.
• Register the characters from PCPro/CAT to SLT, Multiline Terminal without LCD and Trunk.
• The characters are specified by the number of pressing the keys (0-9, *, #).
• Refer to “Character Table”. Page 1-34

Example: To register “A”, press 2 key twice.

By pressing same key 11 times, the character returns to the one pressed once.

• To register characters, press Hold key after each character registration.

• To switch between alphabet upper case (A-Z) and alphabet lower case (a-z), press Recall key.
• To delete the data, overwrite by blank.
• The following is the example to register “john”:
(1) LNR/SPD (DT receiving)
(2) Register the access code specified for Name Display
(SPDT receiving).
(3) 5 5 Hold j
(4) 6 6 6 6 Hold o
(5) 4 4 4 Hold h
(6) 6 6 6 Hold n
(7) LNR/SPD

1-33
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT CALLED/CALLING NAME DISPLAY

Character Table

KEY
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * #
NUMBER
OF TIMES
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * #

2 A D G J M P T W * #

3 B E H K N Q U X * #

4 C F I L O R V Y * #

5 S Z * #

6
7
8 -

9 !

10 ?

1-34
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT CALL SELECTION

ATTENDANT CALL SELECTION

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the ATT call Selection key to which • Y=015

incoming calls from each trunk route (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
terminate. (2) ATT Call Selection Key:
00-07: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7
10-17: FX Incoming Call 0-7
[North America Only]
20-27: WATS Incoming Call 0-7
[North America Only]
30-37: CCSA Incoming Call 0-7
[North America Only]
40-47: Tie Line Incoming Call 0-7

CM90 Assign the ATT Call Selection Keys required • Y=00

according to the key label. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F60XX
XX: 00-07 (C.O. Incoming Call 0-7)
10-17 (FX Incoming Call 0-7)
20-27 (WATS Incoming Call 0-7)
(01) (02) (03) (04)
30-37 (CCSA Incoming Call 0-7)
LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall PAGE
Night
40-47 (Tie Line Incoming Call 0-7)
(13) (14)

BV
(15) (16)

Call Park
(17)

SC
(18) (19) (20) (21)

Start
(22)

Mute Position Busy

50-53 (Special Operator Call 0-3)
(23) (24) (26) (27) (31) (32)
54 (Priority Call 0)
L6 (12)
1 2 3
Cancel
(95)
Volume 55 (Priority Call 1)
SRC DEST
L5 (11)

4
Talk 56 (Emergency Call)
5 6 (93)
60 (Operator Call)
L4 (10) (90) (91)

L3 (09) 7 8 9
61 (Recall)
Release Hold Answer

L2 (08)

62 (Serial Call)
0 # (96)
(97) (94)
L1 (07)

63 (Call Forwarding-No Answer)

64 (Call Forwarding-Busy Line)
65 (Call Forwarding-Intercept)
66 (Off Hook Alarm)
67 (Interposition Calling/Transfer)

Key No. Data Description (Key Label)

13 F6000 C.O. Incoming 0 (LDN)
16 F6060 Operator Call (ATND)
18 F6061 Recall (Recall)

END

1-35
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT DO NOT DISTURB SETUP AND CANCEL

ATTENDANT DO NOT DISTURB SETUP AND CANCEL

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Provide Do Not Disturb-System to the re- • Y=00

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM90 Assign Do Not Disturb and Do Not Disturb • Y=00

Override function keys to each DESKCON, if (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
required. No.
(2) F6102: Do Not Disturb
F6108: Do Not Disturb Override
F6104: Reset

END

1-36
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT INTERPOSITION CALLING/TRANSFER

ATTENDANT INTERPOSITION CALLING/TRANSFER

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for Interposition Trans- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
fer. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A095: Inter Position Transfer

CM90 Assign the Attendant Call Selection Key for • Y=00

this feature on the DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6067: Attendant Interposition Calling/
Transfer (Transferred ATTEN-
DANT CONSOLE Answer key/
lamp)

CM08 Specify the Inter-Position Transferred call to (1) 143

another tenant’s Attendant Console. (2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allowed
If the data is set to 1, a call from any station can
be transferred to another Attendant Console
regardless of Tenant Allocation by CM62.

END

1-37
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER

ATTENDANT LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with diversion display. (1) 204

(2) 0: Available

CM35 Specify the Incoming Call Identification (ICI) • Y=015

key to which each LDN call or Tie Line call (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
from each trunk route will terminate. (2) 00-07: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7
40-47: Tie Line Incoming Call 0-7

CM90 Assign the required number of ICI key on the • Y=00

DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. + , + Key No.
(2) F60XX
F6000-F6007: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7
F6040-F6047: Tie Line Incoming Call 0-7

CM50 Assign the indialed number to each LDN key • Y=01 For DID
or Tie Line key assigned by CM90. (1) 0 : Effective data in CM35 Y=015
The indialed number should be different from 1-8: LDN Key 0-7 assigned by CM90
any numbers assigned by CM10 and CM11. (2) X-XXXX: Indialed No.

• Y=02 For Tie Line

(1) 0 : Effective data in CM35 Y=015
1-8: Tie Line Key 0-7 assigned by CM90
(2) X-XXXX: Indialed No.

END

1-38
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER

To provide the LDN Diversion feature, the following programming is also required.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with the LDN Diversion (1) 205
feature. (2) 0: Available

CM58 Assign the data for LDN Diversion to each • Y=00 Tenant No. of LDN
indialed number assigned by CM50 Y=01/02. (1) 00 : Effective data in CM35 Y=15
01-08: LDN key 0-7 assigned by CM50
NOTE: A call is diverted to LDN0-7/TIE0-7 Y=01
keys as specified by CM58 Y=02-07, 10 : Effective data in CM35 Y=15
even if CM50 Y=01/02>1-8 has 11-18: Tie Line Key 0-7 assigned by CM50
been set. Y=02
(2) 00-63: Tenant No.

• Y=01 TAS Group No.

(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00-63: TAS Group No. assigned by
CM44>13

• Y=02 Day Mode Destination of LDN

(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00-07: LDN/TIE key 0-7
08 : To TAS
09 : To the station/outside party assigned
by CM58 Y=08

• Y=03 Night Mode Destination of LDN

(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00-07: LDN/TIE key 0-7
08 : To TAS
09 : To the station/outside party assigned
by CM58 Y=09

• Y=04 Day Mode diversion for busy

destination station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00: To Attendant Console (BUSY key)
08: To TAS
09: Camped on

1-39
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM58 • Y=05 Night Mode diversion for busy

destination station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) Same as CM58 Y=04

• Y=06 Day Mode diversion for non-

answering destination station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00: To Attendant Console (NANS key)
08: To TAS

• Y=07 Night Mode diversion for non-

answering destination station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) Same as CM58 Y=06

If a station is designated by CM58 Y=02, 03, • Y=08 Day Mode station number
assign the station number or abbreviated code (1) Same as CM58 Y=00
for outside party to which the call is to be (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
diverted. CXX : Abbreviated code for
outside party
XX: 00-31 given by
CM71>66

• Y=09 Night Mode station number

(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) Same as CM58 Y=08

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

DIT blade (DID Trunk)

ODT blade (Tie Line Trunk)

1-40
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE

ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with the Attendant Loop (1) 014: Attendant Loop Release
Release feature. (2) 0: Available

END

To reenter the call that has been released from a loop before Automatic Recall:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Pickup-Direct. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A021: Call Pickup-Direct

END

1-41
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING

ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM60 Assign the password for Attendant • Y=30

Programming. (1) 1
(2) X-X...X : Password (Maximum 8 digits)
X : 0-9, A (*), B (#)
NONE : 12345678
If no data is set, the default setting is NONE.
In this case, the password is set to “12345678”.

CM71 Specify the usage of memory area for register- (1) 64: To use exclusively for Attendant Con-
ing called party numbers to use exclusively for sole
Attendant Console. (2) XXX ZZZ
XXX: 000-299: Starting Memory Slot No.
in Block
ZZZ : 001-300: Number of Slots to be as-
signed in Block

CM72 Assign Called No. to the memory area, and • Y=0

also register Called Party Name to be dis- (1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
played on LCD, if required. (2) XXXX + , + ZZ...Z
XXXX: Trunk Access Code (Maximum 4
digits)
ZZ...Z : Called Party No. (Maximum 26
digits)

• Y=1
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXX...X: Called Party Name in Character
Codes (Maximum 32 digits, i.e.
Maximum 16 characters) See
Character Code Table.
Page A-2

• Y=2
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXX...X: Called Party Name by using PC-
Pro/CAT (Maximum 16 charac-
ters)

1-42
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign the program key for providing Atten- • Y=00

dant Programming on the DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6111: Programming

CM20 Assign the access code for providing Atten- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
dant Programming for the DESKCON, if re- (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
quired. (2) A156: Programming

END

1-43
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
CALL QUEUING

CALL QUEUING

PROGRAMMING

Refer to “CALL WAITING DISPLAY”. Page 1-45

1-44
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
CALL WAITING DISPLAY

CALL WAITING DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM42 Specify the number of waiting calls which (1) 00

cause the Call Waiting lamp to flash. (2) 01-48 : 1-48 calls
NONE : 6 calls

END

1-45
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
COMMON ROUTE INDIAL

COMMON ROUTE INDIAL

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Diversion Display. (1) 204

(2) 0: Available

CM90 Assign the required number of LDN keys on • Y=00

the DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6000-F6007: LDN key 0-7

CM50 Assign the indialed number to each LDN key • Y=01

assigned by CM90. The indialed number (1) 1-8: LDN key 0-7 assigned by CM90
should be different from any numbers assigned (2) X-XXXX: Indialed No.
by CM10 and CM11.

CM51 Assign the destination to which a DID call is • Y=06 For DID Call
transferred when an unassigned number is (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
dialed. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000 : Attendant Console

END

1-46
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
COMMON ROUTE INDIAL

To provide the LDN Diversion feature, the following programming is also required.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with the LDN Diversion (1) 205
feature. (2) 0: Available

CM58 Assign the data for LDN Diversion to each • Y=00 Tenant No. of LDN
indialed number assigned by CM50 Y=01. (1) 01-08: LDN key 0-7 assigned by CM50
Y=01
(2) 00-63: Tenant No.

• Y=01 TAS Group No.

(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00-63: TAS Group No. assigned by CM44>
13

NOTE: A call is diverted to LDN0-7 keys as • Y=02 Day Mode destination of LDN
specified by CM58 Y=02-07, even if (1) Same as CM58 Y=00
CM50 Y=01>1-8 has been set. (2) 00-07: LDN0-7 key
08 : To TAS
09 : To the station/outside party assigned
by CM58 Y=08

• Y=03 Night Mode destination of LDN

(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00-07: LDN key 0-7
08 : To TAS
09 : To the station/outside party assigned
by CM58 Y=09

• Y=04 Day Mode diversion for busy desti-

nation station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00: To Attendant Console (BUSY key)
08: To TAS
09: Camped on

1-47
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
COMMON ROUTE INDIAL

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM58 • Y=05 Night Mode diversion for busy

destination station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) Same as CM58 Y=04

• Y=06 Day Mode diversion for non-

answering destination station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) 00: To Attendant Console (NANS key)
08: To TAS

• Y=07 Night Mode diversion for non-

answering destination station
(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) Same as CM58 Y=06

If a station is designated by CM58 Y=02, 03, • Y=08 Day Mode destination station
assign the station number to which the call is to (1) Same as CM58 Y=00
be diverted. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

• Y=09 Night Mode destination station

(1) Same as CM58 Y=00
(2) Same as CM58 Y=08

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

DIT blade (DID Trunk)

1-48
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
DIALED NUMBER IDENTIFICATION SERVICE (DNIS)

DIALED NUMBER IDENTIFICATION SERVICE (DNIS)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Diversion Display. (1) 204

(2) 0: Available

CM35 Specify the Incoming Call Identification (ICI) • Y=015

key to which each LDN call or Tie Line call (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
from each trunk route will terminate. (2) 00-07: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7
40-47: Tie Line Incoming Call 0-7

CM90 Assign the required number of LDN keys on • Y=00

the DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6000-F6007: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7
F6040-F6047: Tie Line Incoming Call 0-7

CM50 Assign the indialed number to each LDN key • Y=01 For DID
or Tie Line key assigned by CM90. The (1) 0 : Effective data in CM35 Y=015
indialed number should be different from any 1-8: LDN key 0-7 assigned by CM90
numbers assigned by CM10 and CM11. (2) X-XXXX: Indialed No.

• Y=02 For Tie Line

(1) 0 : Effective data in CM35 Y=015
1-8: Tie Line key 0-7 assigned by CM90
(2) X-XXXX: Indialed No.

CM58 Assign the tenant number to the LDN assigned • Y=00

by CM50 Y=01/02. (1) 00 : Effective data in CM35 Y=015
01-08: LDN Key 0-7 assigned by CM90
(2) 00-63: Tenant 00-63

END

1-49
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
DIALED NUMBER IDENTIFICATION SERVICE (DNIS)

To provide the LDN Diversion feature, the following programming is also required.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with LDN Diversion (1) 205

feature. (2) 0: Available

CM58 Assign the data for LDN Diversion to each in- • Y=02 Day Mode Destination of LDN
dialed number assigned by CM50 Y=01/02. (1) 00 : Effective data in CM35 Y=15
01-08: LDN key 0-7 assigned by CM90
NOTE: A call is diverted to LDN keys 0-7 as 10 : Effective data in CM35 Y=15
specified by CM58 Y=02, Y=03, 11-18: Tie Line key 0-7 assigned by CM90
even if CM50 Y=01/02>1-8 has (2) 00-07: LDN/TIE key 0-7
been set.
• Y=03 Night Mode destination of LDN
(1) Same as CM58 Y=02
(2) 00-07: LDN/TIE key 0-7

• Y=08 Day Mode destination station

(1) Same as CM58 Y=02
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
CXX : Abbreviated code for
outside party
XX: 00-31 given by
CM71>66

• Y=09 Night Mode destination station

(1) Same as CM58 Y=02
(2) Same as CM58 Y=08

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

DIT blade (DID Trunk)

ODT blade (Tie Line Trunk)

1-50
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION

INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION

PROGRAMMING

Refer to the following.

SN716 DESKCON Page 1-24
ATTENDANT CALLED/CALLING NAME DISPLAY Page 1-31
ATTENDANT CALL SELECTION Page 1-35
ATTENDANT LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER Page 1-38
COMMON ROUTE INDIAL Page 1-46

1-51
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS

INDIVIDUAL TRUNK ACCESS

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for Individual Trunk • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Access. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A081: Individual Trunk Access

CM30 Assign the Trunk ID code to each trunk. • Y=19

(1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10
NOTE: The Trunk ID code is the code to be Y=00 (D000-D511)
dialed after the access code, and (2) XXXX: Trunk ID code
displayed on the Attendant Console. Set any desired number (4 digits).

END

1-52
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
MULTI-FUNCTION KEY

MULTI-FUNCTION KEY

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM60 Provide each DESKCON Multi-Function key • Y=17

capability. (1) 0-7: DESKCON No. assigned by CM10
Y=00
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is (2) 1 : Effective
required after this data setting.

CM90 Assign the required Multi-Function keys to the • Y=00

each DESKCON. (1) EXX Y + , + Multi-Function key No.
(01-04: DESKCON)
NOTE 1: The following data is assigned as XX: 00-04: DESKCON Status No.
default data. 00: Idle State NOTE 2
Key No. 01: When answering or originating
DESKCON 01 02 03 04 02: When called station is busy
Status No.
03: When called station is DND
00 F6110 F6111
MODE PROG 04: When accessing Hotel feature
01 F6112 F6113 F6106
Y : 0-7: DESKCON No.
SPB LPB SHF (2) F6100: Room Cutoff
02 F6101: Message Waiting
03 F6108 F6102: Do Not Disturb
DDOV F6106: Flash over trunk
04 F6100 F6101 F6102 F6109 F6108: Do Not Disturb Override
RC MW DD WW
F6109: Wake Up
F6111: Programming
NOTE 2: When setting or canceling a group F6112: Out pulse (PB Signal) Short
of stations in Do Not Disturb/Room F6113: Out pulse (PB Signal) Long
Cutoff, DESKCON Status number
00 should be used.

END

1-53
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION

MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION

PROGRAMMING

Refer to ATTENDANT CONSOLE (SN716 DESKCON). Page 1-24

1-54
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
PUSHBUTTON CALLING-ATTENDANT ONLY

PUSHBUTTON CALLING-ATTENDANT ONLY

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the type of signaling to Outgoing and • Y=001

Bothway Trunk Routes. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
BLADE RESET (2) 7 : DP/DTMF (Incoming)
DTMF (Outgoing)

END

1-55
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
TRUNK GROUP BUSY DISPLAY

TRUNK GROUP BUSY DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign the trunk group number to each trunk • Y=09

(Several trunks may be assigned to one trunk (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
group number). (2) 01-62: Trunk Group No. for DESKCON

CM90 For providing the Trunk Group Busy Lamps • Y=00

on Attendant Console, assign the trunk group (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
number to required key. No.
(2) F12XX
NOTE 1: Maximum 6 keys per DESKCON XX: 01-62: Trunk Group No. assigned by
can be assigned. Any six trunk group CM30 Y=09
number out of trunk group numbers
01-62 can be assigned.

NOTE 2: Key numbers 1-4 should not be

assigned to provide a Trunk Group
Busy Lamp.

CM44 For providing external Trunk Group Busy • Y=00

Lamps, assign the trunk group number to the (1) XX Y
required circuit number on the external relay XX: 00-31: Relay Group No.
control. Y : 0-3: Circuit No.
313: External Relay Interface of CPU blade
(2) 11XX
XX: 01-62: Trunk Group No. assigned by
CM30 Y=09

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide the Trunk Group Busy Lamps externally:

Lamp indicator provided by customer

1-56
 ATTENDANT CONSOLE
UNSUPERVISED TRUNK-TO-TRUNK TRANSFER BY ATTENDANT

UNSUPERVISED TRUNK-TO-TRUNK TRANSFER BY ATTENDANT

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with this feature. (1) 206

(2) 1 : Available

END

NOTE: The trunk associated with at least one side of the call must be programmed for answer and/or
release signals to ensure that the trunks do not lock up.
Refer to TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION Page 1-838 for the data to be assigned to
each trunk.

1-57
 ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT

ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Allow the Announcement Service via Voice • Y=074

Response System on Attendant Delay (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
Announcement. (2) 0: Allow

CM49 Assign the function of the Voice Response • Y=00

System to Attendant Delay Announcement. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 0F XX: Attendant Delay Announcement
XX: 00-63 (Message No.)

Assign the tenant number to the message num- • Y=0A

ber assigned by CM49 Y=00. (1) 00-63: Tenant No. assigned by CM30
Y=01/CM76 Y=18/19/20/21
(2) 00-63: Message No. assigned by CM49
Y=00

CM08 Specify the replay timer of the message (1) 165

recorded in the Voice Response System. (2) 0 : Replay at an interval assigned by
CM41 Y=0>47
1 : Replay only once

CM20 To record, replay, and delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
the Voice Response System access codes, (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
respectively. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay
A102: Delete

CM41 Specify the unanswered timing of message • Y=0

replay. (1) 16
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36 sec-
onds.

1-58
 ATTENDANT DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the Attendant Delay Announcement • Y=0

connection timer. (1) 67
(2) 01-99: 4-396 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 8-12 sec-
onds.

Specify the interval time of message replay. • Y=0

(1) 47
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36 sec-
onds.

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

CPU blade (VRS using a built-in Flash ROM)

1-59
 ATTENDANT OVERFLOW

ATTENDANT OVERFLOW
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Attendant Overflow. (1) 067

(2) 0: Available

CM30 Assign the data for terminating system in Day/ • Y=02 Day Mode
Night Mode for each trunk. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 14: Termination to Attendant Console

• Y=03 Night Mode

(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 04: Direct-in Termination

• Y=05 Night Station Assignment

(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

CM35 Restrict the Attendant Delay Announcement. • Y=74

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Restricted

CM41 Specify the timing interval for Attendant Over- • Y=0

flow. (1) 01
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36 sec-
onds.

END

1-60
 ATTENDANT OVERFLOW

To set a station or an outside party as the Attendant Overflow destination:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide Call Forwarding-All Calls on • Y=173

Attendant Overflow. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Available

CM51 Assign the destination of Attendant Overflow • Y=31

to the incoming trunk tenant. (1) 00-63: Incoming Trunk Tenant No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE: For an outside number, assign the Virtual Line Station No.
Virtual Line station number. assigned by CM11

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number to the (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
required Virtual Port number. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the • Y=02

Virtual Line station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
assigned by CM11
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside in • Y=026

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CME6 Assign the destination number for Call • Y=00

Forwarding-All Calls-Outside to the Virtual (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
Line station number assigned by CM11. assigned by CM11
(2) Destination No.: X-XXXX + , + YY...Y
X-XXXX: Outgoing Trunk/LCR Group
Access Code (1-4 digits)
, : Separate Mark
YY...Y : Called No. (Maximum 26 dig-
its)

1-61
 ATTENDANT OVERFLOW

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 To apply Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside, • Y=005

set the trunk route combinations for Tandem (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
Connection. (2) 1 : Release signal arrives

CM36 • Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=005
(2) 0: Allow

END

NOTE: When a station or an outside party is set as the Attendant Overflow destination, the destination
has priority over the delay announcement and Night station.

1-62
 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE

ATTENDANT OVERRIDE
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Attendant Override. (1) 012

(2) 1 : Available

Specify the Warning Tone sent to the connect- (1) 045

ed parties during Attendant Override. (2) 0 : Only once
1 : Every 4 seconds

Specify whether the Warning Tone is sent to (1) 076

C.O. line, when an operator overrides a busy (2) 0 : To send
station which is connected to a C.O. line. 1 : Not sent

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Attendant Override called side in the • Y=009

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

END

NOTE: This feature cannot be used in conjunction with Attendant Lockout.

1-63
 AUTHORIZATION CODE

AUTHORIZATION CODE
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Authorization Code. (1) 216

(2) 0: By PBX (Related to CM2A)
NOTE: If no setting has been performed for
OAI, the default setting of this data
(2nd data=1 [By OAI]) means the
same as 2nd data=0 (By PBX).

Specify whether Service Set Tone should be (1) 362: Service Set Tone after dialing the ac-
provided after dialing the access code for cess code
Authorization Code. (2) 0 : No tone
1 : Service Set Tone

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Autho- • Y=02

rization Code to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Authorization Code in Service Restric- • Y=031 Authorization Code

tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

Specify the entry of Authorization Code after • Y=401

dialing an LCR access code and desired (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
number. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0 : Allow
NOTE: To provide this operation, the 7 : Restricted
following data assignments are
required.
- Toll restriction
(CM12 Y=01,
CM8A Y=5XXX: 000, CM81)
- LCR origination
(CM20 Y=0-3: A126/A127/A128/
A129, CM8A Y=5XXX: 180,
CM85)

1-64
 AUTHORIZATION CODE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for Authorization • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Code. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A086: Authorization Code

CM42 Specify the maximum number of digits for (1) 11

Authorization Code with CPU. (2) Maximum number of digits
01-16 : 1 digit-16 digits
NONE : 10 digits

CM2A Assign the ID Code Development number for • Y=A0

Authorization Code. (1) 0: Authorization Code
(2) 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

NOTE: CM2A Y=00-09 is determined by this

data.

Assign the ID Code for Authorization Code. • Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09
(1) X-XX...XX (Maximum16 digits):
ID Code for Authorization Code
(2) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the valid range of ID Code. • Y=10

(1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 0 : Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code/Remote Access to System (DI-
SA)
1 : Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code
3 : Invalidate the ID Code

Assign the desired Trunk Restriction Class for • Y=11

each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 1 : Unrestricted (RCA)
2 : Non-Restricted-1 (RCB)
3 : Non-Restricted-2 (RCC)
4 : Semi-Restricted-1 (RCD)
5 : Semi-Restricted-2 (RCE)
6 : Restricted-1 (RCF)
7 : Restricted-2 (RCG)
8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

1-65
 AUTHORIZATION CODE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM2A Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A • Y=12

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B • Y=13

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C • Y=14

to each ID Code. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

END

NOTE: Approximately 3000 Authorization Codes including Forced Account Codes and DISA codes
can be defined.

Number of the codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code.
For details, refer to “BUSINESS/HOTEL/DATA FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS”.

1-66
 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign the data for Automated Attendant to the • Y=02 Terminating System in Day Mode
required trunks. • Y=03 Terminating System in Night Mode
• Y=40 Terminating System in Mode A
• Y=41 Terminating System in Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 09: Automated Attendant

• Y=30 Handling of busy/not available Auto-

mated Attendant destination in Day
Mode
• Y=31 Handling of busy/not available Auto-
mated Attendant destination in Night
Mode
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00 : C.O. line release
01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator
03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console
04 : Forwarded to DIT Station
05 : Music and DT connection for Redial
06 : DT connection for redial
08 : 2nd Answering Message + DT
NOTE: When providing a Night Message connection for redial NOTE
for Automated Attendant, the 2nd 15 : C.O. line release
Answering Message which is
assigned by CM49 Y=00 2nd data • Y=32 Handling of timed-out Automated
02XX is used for the Night Message. Attendant call in Day Mode
In that case, the 2nd data 08 of • Y=37 Handling of timed-out Automated
CM30 Y=30, 31 cannot be specified Attendant call in Night Mode
for handling of Busy/Not Available (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
Automated Attendant destination. (2) 00 : C.O. line release
01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator
03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console
04 : Forwarded to DIT station
06 : DT connection for redial
15 : C.O. line release

1-67
 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 • Y=33 Handling of all PBR busy when

Y=30, 31 is set to data 08
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00 : C.O. line release
01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator
03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console
15 : C.O. line release

CM63 Specify whether inter-tenant connection is • Y=2

allowed on an Automated Attendant incoming (1) XX ZZ
call. XX: 00-63: Tenant No. of called station
ZZ : 00-63: Tenant No. of trunk
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allowed

CM64 Assign the answering method for the Automat- • Y=0

ed Attendant, to the required tenants. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 00 : DT Connection
01 : Hold Tone on CPU blade + DT
Connection
02 : 1st Answering Message + DT
Connection
03 : DT Connection

For providing a Night Message, assign the • Y=2

answering method of Night Mode, to the (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
required tenants. (2) 00 : DT Connection
01 : Hold Tone Source on CPU blade +
DT Connection
02 : Night Message + DT Connection
03 : As per CM64 Y=0

CM48 Specify whether no Dial Tone connection is • Y=2

required for the answering method assigned by (1) 06
CM64 Y=0. (2) 0 : No Dial Tone
1 : Dial Tone

1-68
 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the ringing cadence for an Automated (1) 180

Attendant call. (2) 0 : For Multiline Terminal:
0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
[For North America]
Special Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344
[For other than North America]
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345
1 : As per CM35 Y=033

Specify the process when a call is transferred (1) 359

by an Automated Attendant to a predetermined (2) 0 : Disconnect call
station and time-out occurs. 1 : Continue call

Specify the process for an Automated Atten- (1) 363

dant call when a caller dials while receiving (2) 0 : Not allowed (Allowed after receiving
the message or music. the message or music)
1 : Allowed

1-69
 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the time before answering by Auto- • Y=0

mated Attendant. (1) 59
(2) 00-08: 0-32 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 4-8
seconds.

Specify the timing before unanswered Auto- • Y=0

mated Attendant call forwards. (1) 34
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

Specify the timing of unanswered call after • Y=0

forwarding to predetermined station in Auto- (1) 39
mated Attendant. (2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

Specify the time before Dial Tone timeout in • Y=0

Automated Attendant. (1) 43
(2) 01-14: 1-14 seconds
(1 second increment)
If no data is set, the default setting is 14 seconds.

END

1-70
 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

When the 1st and/or the 2nd answering message is required: CM30 Y=30, 31 2nd data 08, CM64 Y=0>2nd
data 02, or Night Message is required: CM64 Y=2 2nd data 02, do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM49 Assign the function of the Voice Response • Y=00

System. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 01XX: 1st Answering Message
02XX: 2nd Answering Message/Night
Message
XX : 00-63: Message No.

Assign the Message number to the required • Y=01 For 1st Answering Message
tenants. • Y=02 For 2nd Answering Message/Night
Message
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 00-63: Message No. assigned by CM49
Y=00

CM20 To record, replay, or delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
the respective Voice Response System access (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
codes. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay
A102: Delete

CM41 Specify the message replay timer for Automat- • Y=0

ed Attendant. (1) 51
(2) 01-31: 8-128 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 64-68 sec-
onds.

END

1-71
 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

To provide Automated Attendant to a trunk, do the following programming in addition to the programming
of Automated Attendant and Code Restriction on Page 1-216.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the Trunk Restriction Class for Auto- • Y=097

mated Attendant to a trunk. (1) 00-63: Route No.
(2) X Z
NOTE: Assign this data to an incoming X: 1-8: Day Class
trunk route. Z : 1-8: Night Class
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCE)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

Allow the Trunk Restriction of outgoing • Y=051-058 Outgoing Trunk Restriction

connection. Data (RCA-RCH)
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Allow

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

For providing the first and/or second Answering Message/Night Message

CPU blade (VRS using a built-in Flash ROM)

1-72
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)

[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM17 For each ACD group, assign station numbers, • Y=0

one by one, in the order of hunting. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Another station No. to
NOTE 1: Up to 60 stations can be assigned be linked
into a single ACD group.

Example: For setting station numbers 200,

201, 202 into one ACD group.

1st Operation (1) 200

(2) 201 1st 200 3rd
2nd Operation (1) 201
(2) 202
3rd Operation (1) 202 201 202
(2) 200 2nd

NOTE 2: CM17 Y=0 assignment is not re-

quired for a ACD group including
only a station. In that case, assign
CM17 Y=1/2 and other commands
accordingly.

Assign the Pilot station or Member station to • Y=1

the stations included in ACD group. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: ACD station No.
(2) 0 : Member station
NOTE: Pilot station must be a non- 1 : Pilot station
equipped Physical Port number
(CM10 Y=00) phantom.

Assign the ACD group number. • Y=2

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: ACD station No.
(2) 00-99: ACD Group 00-99

1-73
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM17 Specify ACD service for each type of call. • Y=4 Internal Call
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD
group
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

• Y=5 C.O. (DDD/FX/WATS) Incoming Call

X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD
group
(1) 0 : Not provided
(2) 1 : To provide

• Y=6 Tie Line Incoming Call

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD
group
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

• Y=7 DID/Automated Attendant Call

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD
group
(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

• Y=B Designation of number of queuing in

each ACD group
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD
group
(2) 0 : To provide (As per CM42>16)
1 : Not provided (No limit)

CM42 Specify the maximum number of queuing in (1) 16

each ACD group. (2) 01-99 : 1 call-99 calls
NONE : No limit

CM41 Specify the call waiting time before answer or • Y=0

abandonment in PEG Count analysis. (1) 16
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

1-74
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for ACD Station Busy • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Out Set and Reset. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A044: Busy Out Set
A045: Busy Out Reset

CM90 Assign the ACD Busy Out key on the Multi- • Y=00
line Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0044: ACD Busy Out

Assign the Release key on the Multiline Termi- • Y=00

nal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1020: Release

CM08 Specify the processing for an incoming call (1) 212

when all ACD stations are busy. (2) 0 : Busy Tone Connection
1 : Queuing

Specify the processing for a held call after the (1) 214: For the held call from Tie Line
agent sets the ACD Busy Out. (2) 0 : Reconnected by Switch Hook Flash
1 : Disconnected

(1) 215: For the held call from C.O. Line

(2) 0 : Reconnected by Switch Hook Flash
1 : Disconnected

Specify whether the transferred C.O. call from (1) 227

a station or an attendant is placed into queuing (2) 0 : The call is placed into queuing
mode when all ACD stations are busy. mode NOTE
1 : Recall to the transferring station when
NOTE: This data is effective only when the call is transferred from a station, or
CM08>212 is set to 1. attendant Camp-On is set when the
call is transferred from Attendant

Enable the ACD Busy Out set and reset from (1) 442
the secondary extension. (2) 0: Available

Specify whether the MIS command is sent (1) 854

while hearing busy tone on ACD termination. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

END

To provide DID Number Conversion for an ACD Group:

See DID DIGIT CONVERSION. Page 1-300

1-75
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-ACD

BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-ACD

[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

To provide ACD Busy Out display on DSS Console:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with ACD Busy Out (1) 265
display on DSS Console. (2) 0: To provide

CM97 Assign the function key used for ACD Busy (1) DSS Console No. (00-31) + , + Function
Out display on each DSS Console. Key No. (57-59)
(2) F1055: ACD Busy Out display

END

1-76
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD

CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD

[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

To provide Call Waiting (CW) Lamps on the Multiline Terminal:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the incoming call to queuing mode (1) 212

when all ACD stations are busy. (2) 1 : Queuing

CM42 Specify the maximum number of queuing in (1) 15

each ACD group for controlling call waiting (2) 01-99 : 1-99 calls
lamp of a Multiline Terminal. NONE : 1 call

NOTE: Depending on the number of queuing station/trunk, Lamp Indication pattern on a Multiline
Terminal is different as shown below:

N=Number of queuing station/trunk

CONDITIONS LAMP INDICATION

2nd Data=01 Steady on red irrespective of number of queuing station/trunk
1N<2nd Data (2nd Data01) Steady on red
2nd DataN (2nd Data01) Flashing red

CM90 Assign the ACD Call Waiting Lamp Indication • Y=00

to the required Multiline Terminal, as required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1500-F1599: ACD Group 00-99
(Busy Lamp)

END

1-77
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD

To provide an external Call Waiting Indicator:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the incoming call to queuing mode (1) 212

when all ACD stations are busy. (2) 1 : Queuing

CM42 Specify the maximum number of queuing in (1) 15

each ACD group for controlling external indi- (2) 01-99 : 1-99 calls
cator lamp. NONE : 1 call

NOTE: Depending on the number of queuing station/trunk, Lamp indication pattern on the exter-
nal indicator is different as shown below:

N=Number of queuing station/trunk

CONDITIONS LAMP INDICATION

2nd Data=01 Lamp on irrespective of number of queuing station/trunk (For the
indication pattern, see CM59 in this page.)
N<2nd Data (2nd Data01) Lamp off
2nd DataN (2nd Data01) Lamp on (For the indication pattern, see CM59 in this page.)

CM59 Specify the external ACD Call Waiting indica- (1) 00

tion pattern. (2) 01 : 30 IPM (1 second ON/OFF)
02 : 60 IPM (0.5 seconds ON/OFF)
03 : 120 IPM (0.25 seconds ON/
OFF)
07 : Steady on
NONE : 120 IPM (0.25 seconds ON/
OFF)

A B

To use the External Relay To use the PGD(2)-U10

Interface on CPU ADP

1-78
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM44 Set the function of ACD Calling Waiting • Y=00

Indication to the External Relay Interface on (1) 312, 313: External Relay Interface on CPU
CPU. (2) 14XX
XX: 00-99:ACD Group No. assigned by
CM17

END

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: When the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is (2) 10: DLC blade
accommodated to the Remote Unit,
execute the system data copy by
CMEC Y=8 before executing the
blade reset.

CM10 Assign the station number connected to • Y=00

PGD(2)-U10 ADP to its associated Physical (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Port number. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
(2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Station No.

CM12 Assign the Kind of PGD(2)-U10 station for ex- • Y=65

ternal relay/external key. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 3: External relay/external key only
NOTE: After this data setting, a reset of the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Unplugged and
plugged in/Blade Reset) is required.

1-79
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=03

ADP, set the Message Waiting/Stored Call Re- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
cord lamps not to be lit. (2) 1: Not provided

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=41

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=49

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=60

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=61

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

Allow the accommodation of PGD(2)-U10 • Y=63

ADP. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
BLADE RESET (2) 0: To accommodate

NOTE 1: Set this data only for a Base Port No. (Circuit No. 01) of DLC blade.

NOTE 2: Whether the following equipment can be accommodated to the same DLC blade or not de-
pends on this data.
- When the second data is set to “0”
Accommodatable : DT300/DT400/DT500/Dterm85/PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Unaccommodatable: DESKCON
- When the second data is set to “1”
Accommodatable : DT300/DT400/DT500/Dterm85/DESKCON
Unaccommodatable: PGD(2)-U10 ADP

NOTE 3: When the second data is set to 0, and accommodating DT300/DT400 series DESI-less to
the same DLC blade to which PGD(2)-U10 ADP is accommodated, the Line Key of the
DT300/DT400 series DESI-less does not light up (however, Character Display or Icon
Display on the DESI-less screen is provided).

1-80
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM44 Set the function of ACD Calling Waiting • Y=00

Indication to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP. (1) XX Y
XX: 00-31: Relay Group No.
Y : 0-3: Circuit No.
(2) 14XX
XX: 00-99:ACD Group No. assigned by
CM17

Associate the PGD(2)-U10 station number • Y=01

with the Relay Group number. (1) 00-31: Relay Group No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: PGD(2)-U10 Station No.
NONE : No data

END

1-81
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD

DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD
[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice • Y=02

Response System Access to the required sta- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
tions. (2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Voice Response System Access in • Y=033

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM17 Specify the pattern of message sent to each • Y=A

ACD group periodically. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of ACD
group
(2) 0 : To send periodically
1 : To send only once

Select the ACD group for Delay Announce- • Y=C

ment (for Incoming Trunk call)/Overflow An- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of ACD
nouncement. group
(2) 00-99 : Use VRS of ACD group number
NOTE 1: Set this data when sharing a VRS 00-99
assigned by CM49 Y=00: 0B0XX/ NONE : Use VRS of own ACD Group
11XX/12XX with multiple ACD (CM17 Y=2)
groups and using VRS other than
own group number.

NOTE 2: Set this data for the pilot station

(assigned by CM17 Y=1).

CM41 If the data for CM17 Y=A is “0”, set the • Y=0
interval time for ACD Delay Announcement. (1) 47
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

1-82
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the maximum ACD call waiting time • Y=0

before answer or abandonment for ACD PEG (1) 16
Count, and waiting time before ACD Delay (2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
Announcement. (4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

CM49 Assign the ACD Delay Announcement • Y=00

function to the required Voice Response (1) 000-015: VRS No.
System. (2) 0B0XX
XX: 00-99: ACD Group No.

CM51 When transferring the call to a station or Atten- • Y=17

dant after the 1st interval time of ACD Delay (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
Announcement, assign the destination. (2) Destination:
X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE: This is a separate feature called E000 : Attendant Console
“Delay Overflow”. ACD Delay
Announcement is required in order
for this feature to work.

CM20 To record, replay and delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
the Voice Response System access code, (1) X-XXXX: Access code
respectively. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay
A102: Delete

CM08 Specify a diversion display on a Multiline Ter- (1) 357

minal or Attendant Console when transferring (2) 0 : Available
an ACD call. 1 : Not available

END

1-83
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD

When sending the ACD second delay announcement:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Busy Tone Connec- (1) 212
tion for processing when all ACD stations are (2) 0: Busy Tone Connection
busy.

CM17 Specify the pattern of message sent to each • Y=A

ACD group periodically. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station number of
ACD group
(2) 0: To send periodically

CM41 Set the interval time of ACD Delay Announce- • Y=0

ment. (1) 47
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

Specify the maximum ACD call waiting time • Y=0

for ACD PEG Count, and waiting time before (1) 16
ACD Delay Announcement. (2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

CM49 Assign the ACD Delay Announcement func- • Y=00

tion to the required Voice Response System. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 11XX: Second Announcement of ACD
Delay Announcement
XX: 00-99: ACD Group No.

END

1-84
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-ACD

HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-ACD

[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER. Page 1-130

1-85
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-ACD

IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-ACD
[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE. Page 1-127

1-86
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
PRIORITY QUEUING-ACD

PRIORITY QUEUING-ACD
[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

To provide Priority Queuing per trunk route:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide Priority Queuing per trunk route. • Y=060

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

END

To provide Priority Queuing per DID incoming LDN:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide DID digit conversion to the trunk • Y=018

route number. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

Provide Priority Queuing per trunk route. • Y=060

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM76 Provide the Number Conversion Block num- • Y=00

ber for Development Table 0. (1) X-XXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999 : Number Conversion Block No.
NONE : No data

Provide Priority Queuing per DID incoming • Y=11

LDN. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00
(2) 1 : To provide

END

1-87
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-ACD

QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-ACD

[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

Refer to AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD). Page 1-73

1-88
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
SILENT MONITOR-ACD

SILENT MONITOR-ACD
[For North America/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

To monitor an ACD call, with or without warning tone:

NOTE: Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Con-
sult a legal advisor before implementing the monitoring of telephone conversations. Some fed-
eral and state laws require a party monitoring a telephone conversation to use beep-tones, to
notify all parties to the telephone conversation, and/or obtain consent from all parties to the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws provide strict penalties for illegal monitoring of
telephone conversations.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the warning tone sent to connected (1) 259

stations when monitoring a station-to-station (2) 0 : Not sent
or station-to-trunk call. 1 : To send (only once)

Specify whether the warning tone is sent to the (1) 076

outside party when a station monitor is on. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for • Y=02

monitoring stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow monitoring stations in Service Restric- • Y=103

tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for • Y=02

monitored stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

1-89
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
SILENT MONITOR-ACD

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM15 Allow being monitored in Service Restriction • Y=104

Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for monitoring, if • Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3
required. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A033: Monitor

CM90 Assign a monitoring function key to the Multi- • Y=00

line Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0033: Monitoring

CM08 Specify the action of monitoring station after (1) 560

the hold/hooking key is pressed in the moni- (2) 0 : Keep monitoring
tored station or the monitored station becomes 1 : Stop monitoring
idle.

CM48 When setting the second data of CM08>560 to • Y=3

0 (keep monitoring), set the music for Hold (1) 01
Tone that is sent to monitoring station. (2) 00 : Nocturne
01 : Minuet
NOTE: This data setting is effective only for 02 : Fur Elise
Single Line Telephone/Digital Mul- 03 : The Maiden’s Prayer
tiline Terminal. 04 : When the saints go marching in
For IP Station, this data setting is 06 : Spring (by four seasons)
not effective. IP Station uses the tone 08 : Ich bin ein Musikante (German
source in IP Adapter (Minuet). folk song)
10 : Amaryllis (French folk song)
NONE : Minuet

Define the type of call to be provided with • Y=0

Hold Tone on the CPU blade. (1) 02: Internal Call
(2) 1400: Hold Tone Source on CPU blade

END

1-90
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
SILENT MONITOR-ACD

HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide the delay announcement for ACD:

CPU blade (VRS using a built-in Flash ROM)

To provide the external Call Waiting Indicator:

CPU blade (with built-in External Equipment Interface)
External Indicator

Requirement for External Indicator

Control Method: Ground/Battery (Maximum125 mA)
Type: Visual and/or Audible type with volume control

1-91
 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS)

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) WITH

MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS)
NOTE: Additional programming is required for MIS, once ACD has been programmed. Refer to the
CallCenterWorX System Manual. If you use the CallCenterWorX, the maximum digit of a
station number must be 5 digits.

1-92
 AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON

AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the Camp-On Tone pattern. (1) 068

(2) 0 : Send out only once
1 : Repeat at 4 second intervals

CM30 Assign Automatic Camp-On to the required • Y=13 In Day Mode

DIT trunks. • Y=14 In Night Mode
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 06: Automatic Camp-On

END

1-93
 AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM43 Specify the automatic change time of the sys- • Y=8

tem clock from standard time to daylight-sav- (1) 00
ing time (for change pattern 0). (2) MM W D
MM: 01-12 (Change Month)
NOTE: The change of system clock is exe- W: 1-4/9 (Change Week)
cuted at 2:00 am (in standard time) 1-4: First-Fourth Week
of the specified day. 9 : Final Week
D : 0-6 (Change Day of the week)
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
NONE : Automatic clock change is not
provided

Specify the automatic change time of the sys- • Y=8

tem clock from daylight-saving time to stan- (1) 01
dard time (for change pattern 0). (2) MM W D
MM: 01-12 (Change Month)
NOTE: The change of system clock is exe- W: 1-4/9 (Change Week)
cuted at 3:00 am (in daylight-saving 1-4: First-Fourth Week
time) of the specified day. 9 : Final Week
D : 0-6 (Change Day of the week)
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
NONE : Automatic clock change is not
provided

1-94
 AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM43 Specify the automatic change time of the sys- • Y=8

tem clock from standard time to daylight-sav- (1) 04
ing time (for change pattern 1). (2) MM W D
MM: 01-12 (Change Month)
NOTE: The change of system clock is exe- W: 1-4/9 (Change Week)
cuted at 2:00 am (in standard time) 1-4: First-Fourth Week
of the specified day. 9 : Final Week
D : 0-6 (Change Day of the week)
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
NONE : Automatic clock change is not
provided

Specify the automatic change time of the sys- • Y=8

tem clock from daylight-saving time to stan- (1) 05
dard time (for change pattern 1). (2) MM W D
MM: 01-12 (Change Month)
NOTE: The change of system clock is exe- W: 1-4/9 (Change Week)
cuted at 3:00 am (in daylight-saving 1-4: First-Fourth Week
time) of the specified day. 9 : Final Week
D : 0-6 (Change Day of the week)
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
NONE : Automatic clock change is not
provided

1-95
 AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM67 Assign the automatic clock change pattern to • Y=31

each location number. (1) 00-63: Location No.
(2) 0 : Change Pattern 0 (assigned by
CM43 Y=8>00/01)
1 : Change Pattern 1 (assigned by
CM43 Y=8>04/05)
NONE : Automatic clock change is not
provided

Set the daylight-saving time to each location. • Y=30

(1) 00-63: Location No.
NOTE: Usually do not set this command by (2) 0 : To operate with Daylight-Saving
PCPro/CAT. This command is set Time
automatically when automatic NONE : To operate with Standard Time
system clock change has been exe-
cuted by CM43 Y=8/CM67 Y=31.
If the system power is off at the time
for clock change, set this data.

CM08 Specify the system clock used for the SMDR (1) 836
output of outgoing/incoming call. (2) 0 : System clock of the unit that the seized
trunk is accommodated (for outgoing
call)/System clock of unit that the ter-
minated trunk is accommodated (for
outgoing call)
1 : System clock of Main Unit

Specify the system clock used for the SMDR (1) 837
output of station to station call. (2) 0 : System clock of the unit that the seized
trunk/calling station is accommodated
1 : System clock of Main Unit

END

1-96
 AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

To read the system clock which the automatic clock change was executed (for change pattern 0/change
pattern 1):

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM43 Read the system clock which the automatic • Y=8

clock change was executed from standard time (1) 02
to daylight-saving time (for change pattern 0). (2) YYYY MM DD
YYYY : 2014-2099 (Year)
MM : 01-12 (Month)
DD : 01-31 (Date)
NONE : Automatic clock change has not
been executed

Read the system clock which the automatic • Y=8

clock change was executed from daylight- (1) 03
saving time to standard time (for change pat- (2) YYYY MM DD
tern 0). YYYY : 2014-2099 (Year)
MM : 01-12 (Month)
DD : 01-31 (Date)
NONE : Automatic clock change has not
been executed

Read the system clock which the automatic • Y=8

clock change was executed from standard time (1) 06
to daylight-saving time (for change pattern 1). (2) YYYY MM DD
YYYY : 2014-2099 (Year)
MM : 01-12 (Month)
DD : 01-31 (Date)
NONE : Automatic clock change has not
been executed

Read the system clock which the automatic • Y=8

clock change was executed from daylight- (1) 07
saving time to standard time (for change pat- (2) YYYY MM DD
tern 1). YYYY : 2014-2099 (Year)
MM : 01-12 (Month)
DD : 01-31 (Date)
NONE : Automatic clock change has not
been executed

END

1-97
 AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

To read out of daylight-saving time of Main Unit:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM02 Read out of daylight-saving time of Main Unit. (1) 3

(2) HH MM SS
HH : 00-23 (Hour)
MM: 00-59 (Minute)
SS : 00-59 (Second)

END

1-98
 AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)

AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)

[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

(1) DTI Assignment for ANI

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign a trunk route number to each DTI. • Y=00

BLADE RESET (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.

Specify the Terminating System in Day Mode, • Y=02 Day Mode

Night Mode, Mode A and Mode B for incom- • Y=03 Night Mode
ing calls. • Y=40 Mode A
• Y=41 Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 31 : DID, Tie line and any call which is
not handled by the PBX

CM35 Assign the trunk route data to each DTI route. • Y=000 Kind of trunk route
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DDD (C.O./DID), ISDN trunk

• Y=004 Answer signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives

• Y=005 Release signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives

• Y=009 Incoming connection signaling

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 03: Wink Start

• Y=010 2nd DT sending on call termination

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: 2nd Dial Tone is not sent

1-99
 AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the trunk route data to each DTI route. • Y=020 Sender Start Condition
BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: Wink Start

Assign calling number sending method from • Y=129 Calling No. Sending Method
the network to each trunk route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Caller ID (Class SM)
1: T1-ANI

END

(2) MF Signaling Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide required DID trunk route with MF • Y=037 MF Signaling Assignment
Signaling. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Available

Assign Busy/Idle information not to be sent to • Y=048 Busy/Idle Sending to T1 Network

T1 network. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Not available

END

1-100
 AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)

(3) ANI Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM31 Assign the Signal Pattern received from T1 • Y=3

network. (1) 00: Signal Pattern from T1 Network NOTE
(2) 02 : ANI
NOTE: • When the signal pattern from T1 NONE : ANI + Called No.
network is FGD format: Assign
the data to “NONE”.
• When the signal pattern from T1
network is ANI format: Assign the
data to “02”.

Assign the number of digits of Called Number • Y=1

received from T1 network. (1) 2: Number of Digits of Called No.
(2) 01-31 : 1-31 digits
NONE : No data

Assign the signal kind of Called Number sent • Y=A

from T1 network. (1) 17: Signal Kind of Called No. NOTE
(2) 0 : DP
NOTE: • When the signal pattern from T1 1 : DTMF
network is FGD format: Assign
the data to “1”.
• When the signal pattern from T1
network is ANI format: Assign the
data to “0”.

Assign the ACK-WINK Signal to be sent to • Y=A

the DTI when the signal kind of Called from (1) 16: Sending of ACK-WINK Signal on Re-
T1 network is MF Signal. ceiving MF Signal NOTE
(2) 0 : To send
NOTE: • When the signal pattern from T1 1 : Not sent
network is FGD format: Assign
the data to “0”.
• When the signal pattern from T1
network is ANI format: Assign the
data to “1”.

1-101
 AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM31 Assign the ACK-WINK Signal to be sent to • Y=A

the DTI when the signal kind of called number (1) 18: Sending of ACK-WINK Signal on
received from T1 network is DP Signal. Receiving DP Signal NOTE
(2) 0 : To send
NOTE: • When the signal pattern from T1 1 : Not sent
network is FGD format: Assign
the data to “1”.
• When the signal pattern from T1
network is ANI format: Assign the
data to “0”.

Assign the number of digits to be deleted from • Y=A

ANI, if required. (1) 14: Number of Deleting Digits from ANI
(2) 00 : No digit deletion
< An example of FGD Format > 01-10: Leading 1-10 digits deletion
15 : No digit deletion
Received digits:
Key Pulse + XX + 1234567890 + Stop Pulse

ANI (10 digits)

Information digits (2 digits)

• 2 digits deletion
• Identification on the terminal:
10 digits (ANI)

CM08 Assign whether ANI is sent to the OAI (1) 462: Sending ANI to OAI terminal
terminal or not. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

Assign whether ANI is sent to the SMDR (1) 463: Sending ANI to SMDR terminal
terminal or not. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

END

1-102
 AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)

When the signal pattern of the called number sent from T1 network is as shown below, Signal pattern:
Called Number=NPA + NNX + Called Station Number do the following programming, if required.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the Digit Addition/Deletion on tie line • Y=017 Digit Addition/Deletion Assign-
incoming calls. ment
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-09: “0” add -“9” add
10 : 2-digit addition (CM50 Y=00>0)
11 : 1 digit deletion
12 : 2 digits deletion
15 : Addition/deletion is not performed

CM20 Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A126: LCR Group 0
A127: LCR Group 1
A128: LCR Group 2
A129: LCR Group 3

CM8A Assign an area code for Intra-Office • Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development
Termination. No. 5-7
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Area Code, 1-8 digits
(2) 8000: Intra-Office Termination

END

NOTE: FGD format and ANI format are:

SIGNAL PATTERN CALLED NUMBER ANI
FGD format MF Signal MF Signal
ANI format DP Signal MF Signal

HARDWARE REQUIRED

DTI blade

1-103
 AUTOMATIC RECALL

AUTOMATIC RECALL
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the timing for Automatic Recall. • Y=0

(1) 00: Attendant Recall
(2) 01-14: 2.4-33.6 seconds
(2.4 second increments)
15-24: 38.4-124.8 seconds
(9.6 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is
31.2-33.6 seconds.
If no data is set, the default setting is 31.2-33.6
seconds.

(1) 11: Attendant Hold Recall

(2) 01-14: 2.4-33.6 seconds
(2.4 second increments)
15-24: 38.4-124.8 seconds
(9.6 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 31.2-33.6
seconds.

(1) 26: Camp-On Recall

(2) 01-15: 16-128 seconds
(8 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 24-32 sec-
onds.

END

1-104
 BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING

BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING
PROGRAMMING

To set up the Secretary station with the Multiline Terminal:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Assign the Secretary station to the required sta- • Y=12

tion number. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. of Secre-
tary
(2) 0: Secretary station

If the Boss station is a Single Line Telephone • Y=03

with MW lamp, provide the Message Waiting (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No.
service to the Boss station. (2) 0: To provide

CM90 Assign the Boss line key as a Secondary • Y=00

Extension line to the Secretary’s Multiline Ter- (1) My Line No. of Secretary + , + Key No.
minal. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No. /Boss
My Line No.

Assign the MW SET/MW RESET keys to the • Y=00

Secretary’s Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. of Secretary + , + Key No.
(2) F0040: MW Set
F0041: MW Reset

If the Boss station is a Multiline Terminal, as- • Y=00

sign a MW Lamp to the Boss’ Multiline Termi- (1) My Line No. of Boss + , + Key No.
nal. (2) F1005: MW Lamp

CM20 Assign the access code for MW Set/MW Reset • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
to the secretary’s Multiline Terminal, if re- (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
quired. (2) A040: MW Set
A041: MW Reset

CM08 Assign whether to delete Call History-No An- (1) 234

swer/Message Waiting irrespective of the sta- (2) 0 : To delete
tion answering when calling back to the Call 1 : Not delete (To delete only when an-
History-No Answer or the Message Waiting. swering)

Specify the MW lamp indication pattern for (1) 294

Multiline Terminal. (2) 0 : Flashing (60 IPM)
1 : Steady lighting

1-105
 BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM51 Assign the destination of the call from the Boss • Y=15
station to which Message Waiting has been set. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Secretary Station No.

CM12 To provide Boss/Secretary Override, assign For Secretary Station:

Service Restriction Class A for Call Waiting to • Y=02
the Secretary station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call waiting to the Secretary station in • Y=043 Calling Side
Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM12 To provide Boss/Secretary Override, assign For Boss Station:

Service Restriction Class A for Call Waiting to • Y=02
the Boss station. (1) X-XXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call waiting to the Boss station in • Y=044 Called Side
Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

END

1-106
 BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING

To assign the Boss station as a Single Line Telephone:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Specify whether to accommodate the Boss line • Y=05

to the Secretary Sub line. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No.
(2) 0 : Accommodated
1 : Not accommodated

CM13 Specify whether to send ringing signal to the • Y=08

Boss station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No.
(2) 0 : Not sent
1 : To send

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade

1-107
 BROKER’S CALL

BROKER’S CALL
PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL HOLD. Page 1-428

1-108
 CALL BACK

CALL BACK
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with the Single Digit (1) 156: Ringback Tone
Feature Access Code while the calling station (2) 0: Available
hears ringback tone/busy tone.
(1) 208: Busy Tone
(2) 0: Available

To activate the Single Digit Feature Access (1) 050: * button as Switch Hook Flash
Code, set CM08>050, 051, 069 and 148 to “1”. (2) 1 : Ineffective

(1) 051: # button as Switch Hook Flash

(2) 1 : Ineffective

(1) 069: Single Digit Dialing on BT Connec-

tion
(2) 1 : Step Call

(1) 148: Same Last Digit Redialing on BT

Connection
(2) 1 : Ineffective

NOTE 1: A single digit access code “2” is fixedly assigned to this feature.

NOTE 2: While the calling Multiline Terminal, DP or DTMF telephone is holding the other call, the
single digit access code “2” is not available.

NOTE 3: From a DTMF telephone a hooking operation is required before dialing the single digit
access code.

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the • Y=02

required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

1-109
 CALL BACK

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM15 Allow Call Back in Service Restriction Class • Y=003

A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

Allow Call Back-Multiple Assignment in the • Y=046

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02, if required. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Outgoing Trunk • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Queuing/Call Back. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A004: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back
Set
A005: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back
Cancel

CM90 Assign a Call Back key to the Multiline Termi- • Y=00

nals, as required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0004: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade if required

1-110
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

[9300V3 software required]

PROGRAMMING

Programming Summary for Call Back to Mobile Phone

START

Basic Data Assignment Page 1-112

Remote Access to Mobility Access

System (DISA) System
System for Call Back to
Mobile Phone

Data Assignment for Remote Access Data Assignment for Mobility Access
to System (DISA) System

Page 1-113 Page 1-116

END

1-111
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

• Basic Data Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM10 Assign the station number for callback origina- • Y=01

tion. (1) 0000-1535: Virtual Port No.
(2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: IP Station No.
X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

CM13 Select the Call Back Mobile Phone station to • Y=86

the station number assigned by CM10 Y=01. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : For Call Back Mobile Phone
1 : Not for Call Back Mobile Phone

NOTE 1: For a callback station, assign only one station in a system.

NOTE 2: Every user cannot use a Call Back Mobile Phone station as an ordinary station.

NOTE 3: The system capacity license (port key) is not required for a Call Back Mobile Phone sta-
tion.

CM41 Assign the time to be effective Call Back • Y=0

Mobile Phone. (1) 215
(2) 01 : 0.5-4 seconds
02-08: 4-8 seconds to 28-32 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 4-8
seconds.

NOTE 1: Set the timer value of this command shorter than the time before answering by Automated
Attendant (assigned by CM41 Y=0>59).

NOTE 2: Call Back to Mobile Phone is executed when calling to the system and disconnecting the
call within the setting time of this command.

Assign the time to wait Call Back Mobile • Y=0

Phone execution. (1) 219
(2) 00 : 0 second
01-10: 1-10 seconds (1 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 1 second.

NOTE: For normal operation, remain at the default setting because changing this data is not
required. Depending on the conditions of Mobile Phone and a network side, there is a case
that the system does not callback to Mobile Phone due to take time until call termination
becomes available after disconnection operation by Mobile Phone. In this case, adjust the
time by this command.

END

1-112
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

• Data Assignment for Remote Access to System (DISA)

To provide Call Back to Mobile Phone feature using Remote Access to System (DISA), do the fol-
lowing programming.
(1) Data Assignment for Terminating System
(a) When the terminating system is Ring Down, do the following programming in addition to
the Ring Down settings. Page 1-897

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify whether to provide Call Back to • Y=361

Mobile Phone on a Ring Down call. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided

Specify whether the calling party number is • Y=155

used as the ID Code for Remote Access to Sys- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
tem (DISA) on a Ring Down call. (2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available
NOTE: Set the second data to 0 (Available)
when abbreviating the ID Code
input.

END

(b) When the terminating system is Dial-In, do the following programming in addition to the
Dial-In service settings. Page 1-898

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Specify whether to provide Call Back to • Y=74

Mobile Phone on a DID call. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : As per CM35 Y=361

Specify whether the calling party number is • Y=14

used as the ID Code for Remote Access to Sys- (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
tem (DISA) on a DID call. assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) 0 : Available
NOTE: Set the second data to 0 (Available) 1 : Not available
when abbreviating the ID Code
input.

END

1-113
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

(2) Data Assignment for Trunk Access Code at Call Back

(a) When the incoming trunk is ISDN, do the following programming.

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign a trunk access code to be added to the • Y=189

calling number when storing call histories. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) X-XX: Trunk Access Code to be added
X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

NOTE: The trunk access code of this command is used for the following services.
- Voice Mail transfer
- Live recording
- Call origination by ISDN trunk key
- Call termination to a Caller ID station
- Call termination to a Standard SIP Terminal

END

(b) When the incoming trunk is a SIP trunk, do the following programming.

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the pattern number to be added to the • Y=279

calling number stored in the call history. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0-7 : Pattern No. 0-7
NONE : No data

CM50 Assign the access code for outgoing call to be • Y=11

added to the calling number during storing call (1) 0-7: Pattern No. 0-7 assigned by CM35
histories. Y=279
(2) X-XXXXXX: Access Code for outgoing
call (1-6 digits)
X : 0-9, A (*), B (#)
NONE : No data

END

1-114
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

(3) Data Assignment for ID Code

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Set the processor for Remote Access to System (1) 217
(DISA) Code to “By PBX”. (2) 0 : By PBX
1 : By OAI NOTE
NOTE: When OAI is not set, the meaning of
second data 1 becomes “By PBX”.

CM42 Specify the maximum number of digits for (1) 13

DISA Code with CPU. (2) 01-16 : 1-16 digits
NONE : 16 digits

CM2A Assign the ID Code Development number for • Y=A0

DISA. (1) 2: DISA Code
3: Automatic service setting by DISA
NOTE: When a calling party dials the ID (2) 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09
code, set the data for the first data
02. Without dialing the ID code, set
the data for the first data 03.

Assign the ID Code for DISA. • Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09
(1) X-XX...XX: ID Code for DISA (Maximum
NOTE: The number of digits is assigned by 16 digits)
CM42>13. (2) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the valid range of ID Code for DISA. • Y=10

(1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
NOTE: Assign this command within the val- (2) 0 : Authorization Code/Forced Account
id range including the Remote Code/Remote Access to System
Access to System (DISA). (DISA)
2 : Remote Access to System (DISA)
3 : Invalidate ID Code

Assign the desired Trunk Restriction Class for • Y=11

each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 1 : Unrestricted (RCA)
2 : Non-Restricted-1 (RCB)
3 : Non-Restricted-2 (RCC)
4 : Semi-Restricted-1 (RCD)
5 : Semi-Restricted-2 (RCE)
6 : Restricted-1 (RCF)
7 : Restricted-2 (RCG)
8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

1-115
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM2A Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A • Y=12

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B • Y=13

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C • Y=14

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Specify whether the calling party number is • Y=15

used as the ID Code for Remote Access to Sys- (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
tem (DISA). (2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available
NOTE: Set the second data to 0 (Available)
when abbreviating the ID Code
input.

END

• Data Assignment for Mobility Access System

To provide Call Back to Mobile Phone feature using Mobility Access, do the following programming
in addition to Mobility Access. Page 1-553

NOTE: If Mobility Access Mode is canceled, the Remote Access to System (DISA) is applied.
However, in this case, it is necessary to set the system data in advance to use the ID Code.
As for the ID Code settings, refer to “(3) Data Assignment for ID Code”.
Page 1-115

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Specify whether to provide Call Back to • Y=74

Mobile Phone on a DID call. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
NOTE: This command is assigned for the (2) 0 : To provide
Number Conversion Block No. 1 : As per CM35 Y=361
assigned by CM76 Y=41: 0.

END

1-116
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

• System Data for Reading the Number of Call Back

You can read the number of Call Back to Mobile Phone succeeded or failed by each system/trunk
route.
(a) To read the number of Call Back to Mobile Phone succeeded or failed by each system/trunk
route:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMB5 Read the number of Call Back to Mobile • Y=000 Counter of Each System
Phone succeeded or failed by each system/ (1) 3021: Number of Call Back to Mobile
trunk route. Phone succeeded
3022: Number of Call Back to Mobile
Phone failed
(2) 0 -9999999: Counter data (only display)
NOTE 1, NOTE 2
• Y=100 Counter of Each Trunk Route
(1) 08XX: Number of Call Back to Mobile
Phone succeeded
09XX: Number of Call Back to Mobile
Phone failed
(2) 0 -9999999: Counter data (only display)
NOTE 1, NOTE 2

NOTE 1: When the system is reset, the counter data of this command is all cleared.

NOTE 2: If the counter data exceeds 9999999, the count continues. The indication in this case, “*”
is added to the start of lower 7 digits of counter data.

END

(b) To clear all data of the number of Call Back to Mobile Phone succeeded and failed:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMB5 Clear all data of the number of Call Back to • Y=999 Clear All PEG Data
Mobile Phone succeeded and failed. (1) 9999: Clear All PEG Data
(2) CCC: Clear

END

1-117
 CALL BACK TO MOBILE PHONE

• Call Back to Mobile Phone by Overlap Sending

[9300V4 software required] [For EMEA]

For 9300V4 software or later, Call Back to Mobile Phone by Overlap Sending is available. To use
this feature, do the programming of OVERLAP SENDING in addition to the programming of CALL
BACK TO MOBILE PHONE. See “OVERLAP SENDING”. Page 3-93

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Mobile Phone

1-118
 CALL FORWARDING

CALL FORWARDING
To set or reset the Call Forwarding service from a PCPro/CAT, use the following command.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CME6 Use Y=00-03 for Call Forwarding and Y=04- • Y=00 Call Forwarding-All Calls
05 for Split Call Forwarding. To reset the • Y=01 Call Forwarding-Busy Line
service, assign “CCC” to the second data of • Y=02 Call Forwarding-No Answer
each Y No. • Y=03 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No An-
swer
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) Destination No.
<Destination=Extension>
X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
<Destination=Outside Party>
X-XXXX + , + YY...Y
X-XXXX: Outgoing Trunk/LCR Group
Access Code (1-4 digits)
, : Separate Mark
YY...Y : Called No. (Maximum 26
digits)
<Destination=Attendant>
E000: Attendant Console

1-119
 CALL FORWARDING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CME6 • Y=04 Split Call Forwarding-ALL Calls

• Y=05 Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No
Answer
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 0)/ATT
1: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 1)
2: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 2)
3: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 3)
4: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 4)
5: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 5)
6: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 6)
7: Destination for Split Call Forwarding
(Block 7)
8: Destination for Call Forwarding
9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing
(Block 0)

END

To read out the remaining number of Call Forwarding-Outside settings that can be registered and the Max-
imum number of settings, do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMEC Confirm the remaining number of Call For- • Y=2

warding-Outside settings that can be regis- (1) 008
tered. (2) XXXX/YYYY
XXXX: Remaining numbers
YYYY: Total numbers

END

1-120
 CALL FORWARDING
ATTENDANT CALL FORWARDING SET-UP AND CANCEL

ATTENDANT CALL FORWARDING SET-UP AND CANCEL

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS. Page 1-122

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE. Page 1-127
Refer to CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER. Page 1-130

1-121
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for this fea- • Y=02

ture to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding All Calls in Service • Y=000 Call Forwarding-All Calls
Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=026 Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
NOTE: When providing Call Forwarding- signed by CM12 Y=02
All Calls-Outside, set “1” (Allow) (2) 1 : Allow
for CM15 Y=000, Y=026.

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
All Calls Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A010: Call Forwarding-All Calls Set
A011: Call Forwarding-All Calls Cancel

CM35 To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the • Y=005

trunk route combinations for Tandem Connec- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
tion. (2) 1 : Release signal arrives

CM36 • Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=005
(2) 0: Allow

1-122
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the setting method for Call Forward- (1) 222
ing-All Calls-Outside. (2) 0 : Setting when the station goes on-
hook/when receiving Service Set Tone
(ORT time out)
1 : Setting when receiving Service Set
Tone (ORT time out)

Assign whether an extension can set a destina- (1) 386

tion of Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside by (2) 0 : Restricted
entering only a trunk access code. 1 : Allowed

Select the trunk route seized for Call Forward- (1) 600
ing-All Calls-Outside. (2) 0 : By calling party’s tenant/terminating
trunk’s tenant
1 : By Call Forwarding setting station’s
tenant

CM90 Assign Call Forwarding-All Calls keys to the • Y=00

Multiline Terminals, as required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0010: Call Forwarding-All Calls Set/
Cancel

CM65 Provide Call Forwarding-All Calls feature to • Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call
each tenant as per incoming call type. • Y=24 C.O. Incoming Call
• Y=25 Tie Line Incoming Call
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 1 : Call Forwarding-All Calls

CM48 Select the Dial Tone on setting Call Forward- • Y=2

ing-All Calls. (1) 13: Dial Tone on setting Call Forwarding-
All Calls
(2) 0 : Special Dial Tone (Stutter Dial
Tone)
1 : Dial Tone

END

1-123
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

To provide the Preset Call Forwarding-All Calls Override by Station dialing/function key on Multiline ter-
minal, do the following programming in addition to the programming of Call Forwarding-All Calls.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Select the function to Override by preset Sta- (1) 1014

tion dialing/Function key on Multiline termi- (2) 0 : Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward-
nal. ing-All Calls

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each sta- • Y=02

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow the Preset Call Forwarding-All Calls • Y=226

Override. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign an access code for Call Forwarding-All • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Calls Override. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A260: Call Forwarding-All Calls Override

CM90 Assign the Call Forwarding-All Calls Override • Y=00

function key on the Multiline terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1080: Call Forwarding-All Calls Override

Assign the Call Forwarding-All Calls Override • Y=00

function keys on the DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6103:Wake Up/ Call Forwarding-All
Calls Override
F6108:Call Forwarding-All Calls Override

END

1-124
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

To provide the Toll Restriction for Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside, do the following programming in
addition to the programming of Call Forwarding-All Calls (the following programming is applied to Call
Forwarding-No Answer/-Busy Line/-Logout (IP Multiline Terminal)).

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each sta- • Y=01

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X Z: Trunk Restriction Class
X: 1 -8: Day Trunk Restriction Class
Z : 1 -8: Night Trunk Restriction Class
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully Restricted (RCH)

CM8B Assign the Toll Restriction pattern number for • Y=000

Call Forwarding-Outside. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Forwarding Destination
No.
NOTE: Assign up to 8 digits number as the (2) 100-115: Toll Restriction Pattern No. 00-15
Forwarding destination number in- (for Call Forwarding-Outside)
cluding access code.

Specify the Toll Restriction pattern for Call • Y=100-115 Toll Restriction Pattern No.
Forwarding-Outside for each restriction class 00-15 (for Call Forwarding-
assigned by CM12 Y=01. Outside)
(1) Trunk Restriction Class
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully Restricted (RCH)
(2) 0 : Restrict
3 : Allow

END

1-125
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade if required

1-126
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for this fea- • Y=02

ture to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-Busy Line in Service • Y=011 Call Forwarding-Busy Line
Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=028 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-
Outside
NOTE: When providing Call Forwarding- • Y=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No
Busy Line-Outside, set “1” (Allow) Answer
for CM15 Y=011, Y=028, Y=012, • Y=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-
Y=029. Outside/No Answer-Outside
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Busy Line Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set
A013: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Cancel

CM35 To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the • Y=005

trunk route combinations for Tandem Connec- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
tion. (2) 1 : Release signal arrives

CM36 • Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=005
(2) 0: Allow

CM08 Specify the setting method for Call Forward- (1) 222
ing-Busy Line-Outside. (2) 0 : Setting when the station goes on-
hook/when receiving Service Set Tone
(ORT time out)
1 : Setting when receiving Service Set
Tone (ORT time out)

1-127
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the operation of Call Forwarding-Busy (1) 240

Line for a station with Do Not Disturb set (for (2) 0 : Call Forwarding-Busy Line
DID/DIT/Tie Line/Station call). 1 : To transfer to the another station
(assigned by CM51 Y=10)
NOTE: Regardless of this data, Do Not
Disturb is available for Direct-In
Termination when a Pilot station of
Station Hunting group is set Do Not
Disturb.

Assign whether an extension can set a destina- (1) 386

tion of Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside by (2) 0 : Restricted
entering only a trunk access code. 1 : Allowed

Select the trunk route seized for Call Forward- (1) 600
ing-Busy Line-Outside. (2) 0 : By calling party’s tenant/terminating
trunk’s tenant
1 : By Call Forwarding setting station’s
tenant

CM90 Assign Call Forwarding-Busy Line key to the • Y=00

Multiline Terminal, as required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0014: Call Forwarding-Busy Line Set/
Cancel

For setting the same key as Call Forward-

ing-No Answer
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set/Cancel

CM65 Provide Call Forwarding-Busy Line feature • Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call
with each tenant as per incoming call type. • Y=24 C.O. Incoming Call
• Y=25 Tie Line Incoming Call
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 1 : Call Forwarding-Busy Line

CM08 Assign the way of call termination to the My (1) 593

Line while the station user makes a call with a (2) 0 : To activate the Call Forwarding that
Sub Line on a Multiline terminal. set an incoming call
1 : As per CM08>268

1-128
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the way of call termination to the My (1) 268

Line while the station user makes a call with a (2) 0 : Busy Line
Sub Line on a Multiline terminal. 1 : Station Call

END

To provide the Toll Restriction for Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside, refer to “To provide the Toll
Restriction for Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside”. Page 1-125

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade, if required

1-129
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

PROGRAMMING

To provide Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a system basis set by PCPro/CAT, do the fol-
lowing programming.
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the • Y=02

required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-No Answer in Service • Y=010 Call Forwarding-No Answer
Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=027 Call Forwarding-No Answer-Outside
• Y=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No An-
NOTE: When providing Call Forwarding- swer
No Answer-Outside, set “1” (Allow) • Y=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside/
for CM15 Y=010, Y=027, Y=012, No Answer-Outside
Y=029. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
No Answer Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set
A013: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Cancel

CM13 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=46

swer. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0 : As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6
Y=07, 08 NOTE
1 : As per CM41 Y=0>01, 15

NOTE: Call Forwarding-No Answer Timing is as follows when the second data is set as 0.
- When the timer for each station is set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CME6 Y=07,
08 is effective.
- When the timer for each station is not set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CM41
Y=0>100, 101 is effective.

1-130
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=0

swer for a trunk incoming call. (1) 01 : Timing for a trunk incoming call
100: Timing for a trunk incoming call
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=0

swer for an internal call or an assisted call. (1) 15 : Timing for an internal call or an assist-
ed call
101: Timing for an internal call or an assist-
ed call
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

CM35 To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the • Y=005

trunk route combinations for Tandem Connec- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
tion. (2) 1 : Release signal arrives

CM36 • Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=005
(2) 0: Allow

CM08 Specify the setting method for Call Forward- (1) 222
ing-No Answer-Outside. (2) 0 : Setting when the station goes on-
hook/when receiving Service Set Tone
(ORT time out)
1 : Setting when receiving Service Set
Tone (ORT time out)

Assign whether an extension can set a destina- (1) 386

tion of Call Forwarding-No Answer-Outside (2) 0 : Restricted
by entering only a trunk access code. 1 : Allowed

Select the trunk route seized for Call Forward- (1) 600
ing-No Answer-Outside. (2) 0 : By calling party’s tenant/terminating
trunk’s tenant
1 : By Call Forwarding setting station’s
tenant

1-131
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign Call Forwarding-No Answer keys to • Y=00

the Multiline Terminals, as required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0016: Call Forwarding-No Answer Set/
Cancel

For setting the same key as Call Forwarding-

Busy Line
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set/Cancel

CM65 Provide Call Forwarding-No Answer feature • Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call
with each tenant as per incoming call type. • Y=24 C.O. Incoming Call
• Y=25 Tie Line Incoming Call
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 1 : Call Forwarding-No Answer

CM08 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- (1) 126

swer for a tie line incoming call. (2) 0 : As per timing for internal call or an as-
sisted call
1 : As per timing for trunk incoming call

NOTE: The timing for a tie line incoming call is set as following data.
When CM08>126: 0 is set:
: Default
2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46 TIMING FOR TIE LINE INCOMING CALL
0 As per CM41 Y=0>101
1 As per CM41 Y=0>15

When CM08>126: 1 is set:

: Default
2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46 TIMING FOR TIE LINE INCOMING CALL
0 As per CM41 Y=0>100
1 As per CM41 Y=0>01

END

1-132
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

To provide Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a station basis set by PCPro/CAT, do the fol-
lowing programming in addition to the programming for Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a
system basis. Page 1-130

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=46

swer to as per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6 (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
Y=07, 08. (2) 0: As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6
Y=07, 08 NOTE

NOTE: Call Forwarding-No Answer Timing is as follows when the second data is set as 0.
- When the timer for each station is set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CME6 Y=07,
08 is effective.
- When the timer for each station is not set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CM41
Y=0>100, 101 is effective.

CME6 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=07

swer for a trunk incoming call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 001-120 : 1-120 seconds
NONE : As per CM41 Y=0>100

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=08

swer for an internal call or an assisted call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 001-120 : 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
NONE : As per CM41 Y=0>101

1-133
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- (1) 126

swer for a tie line incoming call. (2) 0 : As per timing for internal call or an as-
sisted call
1 : As per timing for trunk incoming call

NOTE: The timing for a tie line incoming call is set as following data.
When CM08>126:0 is set:

TIMING ON A STATION TIMING FOR TIE LINE

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46
BASIS (CME6 Y=08) INCOMING CALL
Set As per CME6 Y=08
0
Not set As per CM41 Y=0>101

When CM08>126:1 is set:

TIMING ON A STATION TIMING FOR TIE LINE

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46
BASIS (CME6 Y=07) INCOMING CALL
Set As per CME6 Y=07
0
Not set As per CM41 Y=0>100

END

To provide the Toll Restriction for Call Forwarding-No Answer-Outside, refer to “To provide the Toll
Restriction for Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside”. Page 1-125

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade if required

1-134
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-DESTINATION

CALL FORWARDING-DESTINATION

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-Destination in Service • Y=015

Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Destination Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A018: Call Forwarding-Destination Set
A019: Call Forwarding-Destination Cancel

CM90 Assign Call Forwarding-Destination Set/ • Y=0

Cancel Keys to the Multiline Terminals, if re- (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
quired. (2) F0018: Set
F0019: Cancel

END

1-135
 CALL FORWARDING
CALL FORWARDING-OVERRIDE

CALL FORWARDING-OVERRIDE

PROGRAMMING

To allow the Call Forwarding Destination station user to call the station which has set Call Forwarding-
All Calls, no programming is required.
To allow the Call Forwarding Destination station user with Multiline Terminal Sub Line to call the station
which has set Call Forwarding-All Calls to the My Line of the station, do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide Call Forwarding-Override when Call (1) 509

Forwarding-All Calls is set to the My Line of (2) 0: Call Forwarding-Override
the Multiline Terminal.

Restrict the call termination to the My Line (1) 268

while the station user makes a call with the Sub (2) 0: Restricted
Line on the Multiline Terminal.

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade, if required

1-136
 CALL FORWARDING
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/

MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming for Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line, do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM42 Specify the number of calls that can be for- (1) 14

warded. (2) 01-05 : 1-5 times
NONE : 5 times

END

1-137
 CALL FORWARDING
MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming for Call Forwarding-No Answer, do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the timing for No Answer after second • Y=0

Call Forwarding. (1) 46
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

END

1-138
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: To activate Split Call Forwarding-All Calls feature, both Call Forwarding and Split Call
Forwarding settings are required.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for this fea- • Y=02

ture to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-All Calls in Service • Y=000 Call Forwarding-All Calls
Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=026 Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
NOTE: To provide this feature, set “1” assigned by CM12 Y=02
(Allow) for CM15 Y=000, Y=026. (2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
All Calls Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A010: Call Forwarding-All Calls Set
A011: Call Forwarding-All Calls Cancel

Assign the access code for Split Call Forward- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
ing-All Calls Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A180: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls Set
A181: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls
Cancel

CM35 To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the • Y=005

trunk route combinations for Tandem Connec- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
tion. (2) 1 : Release signal arrives

CM36 • Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=005
(2) 0: Allow

1-139
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the setting method for Call Forward- (1) 222
ing-All Calls-Outside. (2) 0 : Setting when the station goes on-
hook/when receiving Service Set Tone
(ORT time out)
1 : Setting when receiving Service Set
Tone (ORT time out)

Assign whether an extension can set a destina- (1) 386

tion of Split Call Forwarding-All Calls-Out- (2) 0 : Restricted
side by entering only a trunk access code. 1 : Allowed

Select the trunk route seized for Split Call For- (1) 600
warding-All Calls-Outside. (2) 0 : By calling party’s tenant/terminating
trunk’s tenant
1 : By Call Forwarding setting station’s
tenant

Select the Call Forwarding type when an in- (1) 608

coming call terminates via CCIS. (2) 0 : As per CM65 Y=37/38/39
1 : As per CM65 Y=23/24/25

CM90 Assign Call Forwarding-All Calls keys to the • Y=00

Multiline Terminals, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0010: Call Forwarding-All Calls Set/
Cancel

Assign Split Call Forwarding-All Calls keys to • Y=00

the Multiline Terminals, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0A80: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls
Set/Cancel

1-140
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM65 Select the feature available in each tenant • Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call
when an internal call and a Tie Line/C.O. • Y=24 C.O. Incoming Call
incoming call are terminated. • Y=25 Tie Line Incoming Call
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : Split Call Forwarding-All Calls
1 : Call Forwarding-All Calls

Select the feature available in each tenant • Y=37 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call via
when an internal call via CCIS and a Tie Line/ CCIS
C.O. incoming call via CCIS are terminated. • Y=38 C.O. Incoming Call via CCIS
• Y=39 Tie Line Incoming Call via CCIS
NOTE: CM65 Y=37/38/39 are effective only (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
when the second data of CM08>608 (2) 0 : Split Call Forwarding-All Calls
is set to 0. 1 : Call Forwarding-All Calls

CM78 Assign the destination of Split Call Forward- (1) XX Y

ing. (See NOTE in next page.) XX: 00-63: Tenant No.
Y : 0-7: Block No.
(2) X-XX + , + YY···Y
X-XX : Trunk Access Code (1-2 digits)
YY···Y: Called No.
(Maximum 26 digits)
X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. (1-8 digits)

CM48 Select the Dial Tone on setting Split Call • Y=2

Forwarding-All Calls. (1) 13: Dial Tone on setting Split Call Forward-
ing-All Calls
(2) 0 : Special Dial Tone (Stutter Dial Tone)
1 : Dial Tone

END

1-141
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

NOTE: The operating procedure for Split Call Forwarding-All Calls is as follows:
CM78 is used to assign the forwarded destination when the destination No. 0-7 is specified.

Dial Access Code for Split Call Dial Destination No. X (0-9).
Forwarding-All Calls. 0: BLOCK No. 0
1: 1
or
2: 2
+
3: 3 Destination assigned by
Depress Split Call Forwarding-All 4: 4 CM78.
Calls key. 5: 5
6: 6
7: BLOCK No. 7
8: Destination for Call Forwarding-All Calls
9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing
(BLOCK No. 0)

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade, if required

1-142
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: To activate Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line feature, both Call Forwarding and Split Call
Forwarding settings are required.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for this • Y=02

feature to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-Busy Line in Service • Y=011 Call Forwarding-Busy Line
Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=028 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-
Outside
NOTE: To provide this feature, set “1” (Al- • Y=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No
low) for CM15 Y=011, Y=028, Answer
Y=012, Y=029. • Y=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-
Outside/No Answer-Outside
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Busy Line Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set
A013: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Cancel

Assign the access code for Split Call • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Forwarding-Busy Line Set and Cancel, (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
respectively. (2) A182: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer Set
A183: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer Cancel

CM35 To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the • Y=005

trunk route combinations for Tandem Connec- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
tion. (2) 1 : Release signal arrives

1-143
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM36 • Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=005
(2) 0: Allow

CM08 Specify the setting method for Call Forward- (1) 222
ing-Busy Line-Outside. (2) 0 : Setting when the station goes on-
hook/when receiving Service Set Tone
(ORT time out)
1 : Setting when receiving Service Set
Tone (ORT time out)

Specify the operation of Call Forwarding-Busy (1) 240

Line for a station with Do Not Disturb set (for (2) 0 : Call Forwarding-Busy Line
DID/DIT/Tie Line/Station call). 1 : To transfer to the another station
(assigned by CM51 Y=10)
NOTE: Regardless of this data, Do Not
Disturb is available for Direct-In
Termination when a Pilot station of
Station Hunting group is set Do Not
Disturb.

Assign whether an extension can set a destina- (1) 386

tion of Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line- (2) 0 : Restricted
Outside by entering only a trunk access code. 1 : Allowed

Select the trunk route seized for Split Call (1) 600
Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside. (2) 0 : By calling party’s tenant/terminating
trunk’s tenant
1 : By Call Forwarding setting station’s
tenant

Select the Call Forwarding type when an (1) 608

incoming call terminates via CCIS. (2) 0 : As per CM65 Y=37/38/39
1 : As per CM65 Y=23/24/25

1-144
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign Call Forwarding-Busy Line key to the • Y=00

Multiline Terminals, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0014: Call Forwarding-Busy Line Set/
Cancel

For setting the same key as Call Forward-

ing-No Answer
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set/Cancel

Assign Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line keys • Y=00

to the Multiline Terminals, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0A82: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer Set/Cancel

CM65 Select the feature available in each tenant • Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call
when an internal call and a Tie Line/C.O. • Y=24 C.O. Incoming Call
incoming call are terminated. • Y=25 Tie Line Incoming Call
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line
1 : Call Forwarding-Busy Line

Select the feature available in each tenant • Y=37 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call via
when an internal call via CCIS and a Tie Line/ CCIS
C.O. incoming call via CCIS are terminated. • Y=38 C.O. Incoming Call via CCIS
• Y=39 Tie Line Incoming Call via CCIS
NOTE: CM65 Y=37/38/39 are effective only (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
when the second data of CM08>608 (2) 0 : Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line
is set to 0. 1 : Call Forwarding-Busy Line

CM78 Assign the destination of Split Call Forward- (1) XX Y

ing-Busy Line. (See NOTE in next page.) XX: 00-63: Tenant No.
Y : 0-7: Block No.
(2) X-XX + , + YY···Y
X-XX : Trunk Access Code (1-2 digits)
YY···Y: Called No.
(Maximum 26 digits)
X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. (1-8 digits)

END

1-145
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

NOTE: The operating procedure for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer is as follows:
CM78 is used to assign the forwarded destination when the destination No. 0-7 is specified.

Dial Access Code for Split Call Dial Destination No. X (0-9).
Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer. 0: BLOCK No. 0
1: 1
or + 2: 2
3: 3 Destination assigned by
Depress Split Call Forwarding- 4: 4 CM78.
Busy Line/No Answer key. 5: 5
6: 6
7: BLOCK No. 7
8: Destination for Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer
9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing
(BLOCK No. 0)

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade, if required

1-146
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

PROGRAMMING

For Split Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a system basis set by PCPro/CAT, do the following
programming.

NOTE: To activate Split Call Forwarding-No Answer feature, both Call Forwarding and Split Call
Forwarding settings are required.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for this fea- • Y=02

ture to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-No Answer in Service • Y=010 Call Forwarding-No Answer
Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=027 Call Forwarding-No Answer-Out-
side
NOTE: To provide this feature, set “1” • Y=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No An-
(Allow) for CM15 Y=010, Y=027, swer
Y=012, Y=029. • Y=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Out-
side/No Answer-Outside
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
No Answer Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set
A013: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Cancel

Assign the access code for Split Call Forward- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
ing-No Answer Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A182: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer Set
A183: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer Cancel

1-147
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No • Y=46

Answer. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0 : As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6
Y=07, 08 NOTE
1 : As per CM41 Y=0>01, 15

NOTE: Call Forwarding-No Answer Timing is as follows when the second data is set as 0.
- When the timer for each station is set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CME6 Y=07,
08 is effective.
- When the timer for each station is not set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CM41
Y=0>100, 101 is effective.

CM41 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No • Y=0

Answer for a trunk incoming call. (1) 01 : Timing for a trunk incoming call
100: Timing for a trunk incoming call
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No • Y=0

Answer for an internal call or an assisted call. (1) 15 : Timing for an internal call or an assist-
ed call
101: Timing for an internal call or an assist-
ed call
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

CM35 To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the • Y=005

trunk route combinations for Tandem Connec- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
tion. (2) 1 : Release signal arrives

CM36 • Y=0
(1) Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing
Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=005
(2) 0: Allow

1-148
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the setting method for Call Forward- (1) 222
ing-No Answer-Outside. (2) 0 : Setting when the station goes on-
hook/when receiving Service Set Tone
(ORT time out)
1 : Setting when receiving Service Set
Tone (ORT time out)

Assign whether an extension can set a destina- (1) 386

tion of Split Call Forwarding-No Answer-Out- (2) 0 : Restricted
side by entering only a trunk access code. 1 : Allowed

Select the trunk route seized for Split Call (1) 600
Forwarding-No Answer-Outside. (2) 0 : By calling party’s tenant/terminating
trunk’s tenant
1 : By Call Forwarding setting station’s
tenant

Select the Call Forwarding type when an (1) 608

incoming call terminates via CCIS. (2) 0 : As per CM65 Y=37/38/39
1 : As per CM65 Y=23/24/25

CM90 Assign Call Forwarding-No Answer keys to • Y=00

the Multiline Terminals, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0016: Call Forwarding-No Answer Set/
Cancel

For setting the same key as Call Forwarding-

Busy Line.
(1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy
Line Set/Cancel

Assign Split Call Forwarding-No Answer keys • Y=00

to the Multiline Terminals, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0A82: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer Set/Cancel

CM65 Select the feature available in each tenant • Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call
when an internal call and a Tie Line/C.O. in- • Y=24 C.O. Incoming Call
coming call are terminated. • Y=25 Tie Line Incoming Call
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : Split Call Forwarding-No Answer
1 : Call Forwarding-No Answer

1-149
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM65 Select the feature available in each tenant • Y=37 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call via
when an internal call via CCIS and a Tie Line/ CCIS
C.O. incoming call via CCIS are terminated. • Y=38 C.O. Incoming Call via CCIS
• Y=39 Tie Line Incoming Call via CCIS
NOTE: CM65 Y=37/38/39 are effective only (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
when the second data of CM08>608 (2) 0 : Split Call Forwarding-No Answer
is set to 0. 1 : Call Forwarding-No Answer

CM08 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- (1) 126

swer for a tie line incoming call. (2) 0 : As per timing for internal call or an as-
sisted call
1 : As per timing for trunk incoming call

NOTE: The timing for a tie line incoming call is set as following data.
When CM08>126: 0 is set:
: Default
2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46 TIMING FOR TIE LINE INCOMING CALL
0 As per CM41 Y=0>101
1 As per CM41 Y=0>15

When CM08>126: 1 is set:

: Default
2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46 TIMING FOR TIE LINE INCOMING CALL
0 As per CM41 Y=0>100
1 As per CM41 Y=0>01

1-150
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM78 Assign the destination of Split Call Forward- (1) XX Y

ing. (See NOTE below.) XX: 00-63: Tenant No.
Y : 0-7: Block No.
(2) X-XX + , + YY···Y
X-XX : Trunk Access Code (1-2 digits)
YY···Y: Called No.
(Maximum 26 digits)
X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. (1-8 digits)

END

NOTE: The operating procedure for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer is as follows:
CM78 is used to assign the forwarded destination when the destination No. 0-7 is specified.

Dial Access Code for Split Call Dial Destination No. X (0-9).
Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer. 0: BLOCK No. 0
1: 1
or + 2: 2
3: 3 Destination assigned by
Depress Split Call Forwarding- 4: 4 CM78.
Busy Line/No Answer key. 5: 5
6: 6
7: BLOCK No. 7
8: Destination for Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
No Answer
9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing
(BLOCK No. 0)

1-151
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

For Split Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a station basis set by PCPro/CAT, do the following
programming in addition to the programming for Split Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a
system basis. Page 1-147

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=46

swer to as per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6 (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
Y=07, 08. (2) 0: As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6
Y=07, 08 NOTE

NOTE: Call Forwarding-No Answer Timing is as follows when the second data is set as 0.
- When the timer for each station is set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CME6 Y=07,
08 is effective.
- When the timer for each station is not set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CM41
Y=0>100, 101 is effective.

CME6 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=07

swer for a trunk incoming call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 001-120 : 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
NONE : As per CM41 Y=0>100

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- • Y=08

swer for an internal call or an assisted call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 001-120 : 1-120 seconds
NONE : As per CM41 Y=0>101

1-152
 CALL FORWARDING
SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An- (1) 126

swer for a tie line incoming call. (2) 0 : As per timing for internal call or an as-
sisted call
1 : As per timing for trunk incoming call

NOTE: The timing for a tie line incoming call is set as following data.
When CM08>126: 0 is set:

TIMING ON A STATION TIMING FOR TIE LINE

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46
BASIS (CME6 Y=08) INCOMING CALL
Set As per CME6 Y=08
0
Not set As per CM41 Y=0>101

When CM08>126: 1 is set:

TIMING ON A STATION TIMING FOR TIE LINE

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46
BASIS (CME6 Y=07) INCOMING CALL
Set As per CME6 Y=07
0
Not set As per CM41 Y=0>100

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade, if required

1-153
 CALL FORWARDING
GROUP DIVERSION

GROUP DIVERSION

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Group Diversion. (1) 026: Group Diversion
(2) 0: To provide

CM16 Assign the members to be included in each • Y=2 Group Diversion group
Group Diversion group. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be includ-
ed in a Group Diversion
group
(2) 00-30: Group Diversion group No.

CM19 Assign the destination for each Group • Y=6

Diversion group to the required stations. (1) 00-30: Group Diversion group No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Diversion group No.

CM13 Specify the timing of Group Diversion. • Y=46

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0 : As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6
Y=07, 08 NOTE
1 : As per CM41 Y=0>01, 15

NOTE: Group Diversion Timing is as follows when the second data is set as 0.
- When the timer for each station is set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CME6 Y=07,
08 is effective.
- When the timer for each station is not set up by CME6 Y=07, 08: The timer of CM41
Y=0>100, 101 is effective.

CM41 Specify the timing of Group Diversion for • Y=0

DIT/Tie Line incoming call. (1) 01 : Timing for DIT/Tie Line incoming
call
100: Timing for DIT/Tie Line incoming
call
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

1-154
 CALL FORWARDING
GROUP DIVERSION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the timing of Group Diversion for an • Y=0

internal call or an assisted call. (1) 15 : Timing for an internal call or an assist-
ed call
101: Timing for an internal call or an assist-
ed call
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

Specify the timing for Group Diversion after • Y=0

second Call Forwarding. (1) 46
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

CME6 Specify the timing of Group Diversion for • Y=07

DIT/Tie Line incoming call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 001-120 : 1-120 seconds
NONE : As per CM41 Y=0>100

Specify the timing of Group Diversion for an • Y=08

internal call or an assisted call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 001-120 : 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
NONE : As per CM41 Y=0>101

1-155
 CALL FORWARDING
GROUP DIVERSION

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the timing of Group Diversion for (1) 126

DIT/Tie Line incoming call. (2) 0 : As per timing for internal call or an as-
sisted call
1 : As per timing for DIT/Tie Line incom-
ing call

NOTE: The timing for DIT/Tie Line incoming call is set as following data.
When CM08>126:0 is set:

TIMING ON A STATION TIMING FOR DIT/TIE LINE

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46
BASIS (CME6 Y=08) INCOMING CALL
Set As per CME6 Y=08
0
Not set As per CM41 Y=0>101

When CM08>126:1 is set:

TIMING ON A STATION TIMING FOR DIT/TIE LINE

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46
BASIS (CME6 Y=07) INCOMING CALL
Set As per CME6 Y=07
0
Not set As per CM41 Y=0>100

END

NOTE: The number of stations that can be included in a Group Diversion is unlimited.

1-156
 CALL HISTORY
INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK)

CALL HISTORY
INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify Message Waiting Lamp indication on (1) 294

the Multiline Terminal to which Message (2) 0 : Flashing 60 IPM
Waiting/Message Reminder is set. 1 : Steady Lighting

Specify if CID Call Back is provided when an (1) 588

incoming call is Forwarded, Busy, Unan- (2) 0 : To provide
swered or in Do Not Disturb. 1 : Not provided

NOTE: CID Call Back by this command is

available under the following
conditions.
• The Multiline Terminal station is
set to Call Forwarding-All Calls/
Call Forwarding-Busy Line/
Call Forwarding-No answer/
Call Forwarding-IP Station
logout when a trunk call is termi-
nated.
• The Multiline Terminal station is
set to Do Not Disturb.
• The Multiline Terminal station
received the incoming call is
busy.

Specify if Automatic idle return is provided (1) 172

after ROT is received when Incoming Call (2) 0 : Not available
History is not operating. 1 : Available

1-157
 CALL HISTORY
INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to each sta- • Y=07

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Specify if MW lamp on Multiline Terminal • Y=284

when Incoming Call History (CID Call Back)/ (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-
Message Reminder is to be lit. signed by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0 : Not lit
1 : To light

Specify if MW lamp on Multiline Terminal • Y=285

when UM8000 Mail/Voice Mail Live Record (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-
is to be lit. signed by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0 : Not lit
1 : To light

Specify if MW lamp on Multiline Terminal • Y=286

when Message Waiting/Message Waiting Con- (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-
sole/Message Center Interface (MCI)/Open signed by CM12 Y=07
Application Interface (OAI)/Voice Mail Live (2) 0 : Not lit
Record-CCIS is to be lit. 1 : To light

CM35 Provide the function of storing the call history • Y=150

(IC) when answering a trunk call/handling of (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
an unanswered trunk call. (2) 0: To store

Assign the trunk access code for CID Call • Y=044

Back. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
This trunk access code will be saved and sent (2) 00-99: Trunk Access Code
with the calling number. or
• Y=189
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) X-XX: Trunk Access Code
X=0-9, A (*), B (#)

CM29 Assign a Numbering Plan Group number to (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
each tenant. (2) 710-713 : Numbering Plan Group 0-3
NONE : Numbering Plan Group 0

1-158
 CALL HISTORY
INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK)

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for Message Waiting/ • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Message Reminder Search/Retrieve. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A146: Message Waiting/Message Remind-
er Search
A147: Message Waiting/Message Remind-
er Retrieve

CM13 Assign whether to store the call history (IC) on • Y=41

the Multiline Terminal when the station call is (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answered. (2) 0 : To store
1 : Not stored

Specify whether to store the call history (IC) • Y=49

when handling of unanswered call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : To store
1 : Not stored

Specify whether to store the call history (IC) • Y=60

when answering a trunk call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : To store
NOTE: The 2nd data of this command is au- 1 : Not stored
tomatically set to 0 (To store) when
Digital Multiline terminal/IP station
No. (FX-FXXXXXXXX) is assigned
by CM10 Y=00/01.

Specify whether to store the call history (IC) • Y=61

when handling of an unanswered trunk call. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : To store
NOTE: The 2nd data of this command is au- 1 : Not stored
tomatically set to 0 (To store) when
Digital Multiline terminal/IP station
No. (FX-FXXXXXXXX) is assigned
by CM10 Y=00/01.

1-159
 CALL HISTORY
INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK)

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Specify whether to store the call record when • Y=97

answering a trunk call which transferred from (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
other station. (2) 0 : Not stored
[9300V4 software required] 1 : To store

NOTE: When setting the second data of this

command to 1 (To store), this com-
mand is effective when the second
data of CM13 Y=60 and CM35 Y=
150 are set to 0 (To store).

CM90 Assign the Call History Screen Start key and • Y=00
MW Lamp key to the Multiline Terminals. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0A46: Call History Screen Start
F1005 : MW Lamp

CM08 Specify if Call History-No Answer is deleted (1) 234

after initiating Call Back, even if the call is (2) 0 : To delete
answered. 1 : Not delete
(To delete only when answering)
Specify whether to delete all stored Call (1) 235
History-No Answer of the calling station when (2) 0 : To delete
the call is answered. 1 : Not delete

Specify whether to provide the Icon display on (1) 1019

DT330/DT430/DT530/DT730/DT750/ (2) 0 : Not displayed
DT830/DT930. 1 : To display

Specify whether to store the call record when (1) 1053

answering DID Call Waiting. (2) 0 : Not stored
[9300V4 software required] 1 : To store

NOTE: When setting the second data of this command to 1 (To store), this command is effective
when the second data of CM13 Y=60 and CM35 Y=150 is set to 0 (To store).

END

1-160
 CALL HISTORY
INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK)

To provide Incoming Call History (CID Call Back) when terminating a station call via CCIS/SIP trunk, do
the following programming:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the data for storing the calling number (1) 583
automatically when terminating a station call (2) 0: To store
via CCIS/SIP trunk.

CM35 Assign the Pattern number for adding an • Y=279

access code for outgoing call to the calling (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
number stored by Message Reminder when (2) 0-7 : Pattern No. 0-7
terminating a tandem call via CCIS/SIP trunk. NONE : No data

Assign the data for storing the call history (IC) • Y=150
when answering a trunk call/handling of an un- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
answered trunk call. (2) 0: To store

CM50 Assign the Pattern number for adding an • Y=11

access code for outgoing call to the calling (1) 0-7: Pattern No. 0-7 assigned by CM35
number stored by Message Reminder when Y=279
terminating a tandem call via CCIS/SIP trunk. (2) X-XXXXXX: Access Code for outgoing
call (1-6 digits)
X : 0-9, A (*), B (#)
NONE : No data

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade

1-161
 CALL HISTORY
OUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL)

OUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to the re- • Y=07

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Assign the type of Multiline Terminal to ser- • Y=096

vice Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-
Y=07. signed by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0 : Without LCD
1 : With LCD

CM90 Assign the Stack Dial key to each Multiline • Y=00

Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1000: Stack Dial

CM08 Provide the system with Automatic Idle Re- (1) 172
turn. (2) 1 : To provide

Specify whether the Automatic Idle Return is (1) 567

available or not, if the PBR time out occurs (2) 0 : Not available
after the Redial/Speaker key is pressed with 1 : Available
the Multiline Terminal in on-hook condition.

END

1-162
 CALL HISTORY
OUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL)

To provide DESKCON with this feature:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign the Stack Dial/Redial key to each • Y=00

DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6121: Stack Dial/Last Number Redial

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade

DESKCON and DLC blade

1-163
 CALL PARK
CALL PARK-SYSTEM

CALL PARK
CALL PARK-SYSTEM

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify whether a trunk line placed on Consul- (1) 133

tation Hold by Call Park-System can be (2) 0 : Not available
retrieved by pressing a trunk line appearance 1 : Available
key on a Multiline Terminal.

CM41 Specify the recall timing for the Call Park- • Y=0
System. (1) 05
(2) 01-99: 4-396 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 60-64
seconds.

A B

To provide Call Park-System To provide Call Park-System

with dialing a Park number with dialing a station number

1-164
 CALL PARK
CALL PARK-SYSTEM

To provide Call Park-System with dialing a Park number

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to each • Y=07

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Assign the type of Multiline Terminal to Ser- • Y=096

vice Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-
Y=07. signed by CM12 Y=07
(2) 1 : With LCD
NOTE: When using a programmable key to
put a call on hold, set the 2nd data to
1 (With LCD) so that the holding
call No. 00-19 can be displayed.

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Park-System • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
set and retrieve. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A008: Call Park-System Set
A009: Call Park-System Retrieve

CM90 Assign a Call Park-System key to the Multiline • Y=00

Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F5000: Call Park-System

Assign a Call Park-System key to DESKCON, • Y=00

if required. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6144: Call Park-System

END

1-165
 CALL PARK
CALL PARK-SYSTEM

To provide Call Park-System with dialing a station number

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Park-System • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Set which retrieved by dialing station number/ (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
Retrieve by dialing station number. (2) A198: Call Park-System Set which
retrieved by dialing station number
A199: Call Park-System Retrieve by
dialing station number

CM90 Assign a function key for Call Park-System • Y=00

which retrieved by dialing station number to (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
the Multiline Terminal, if required. (2) F0A98: Call Park-System Set which
retrieved by dialing station number

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade as required

1-166
 CALL PARK
CALL PARK-TENANT

CALL PARK-TENANT

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign access codes for Call Park-Tenant set/ • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
retrieve. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A062: Call Park-Tenant Set/Retrieve

CM08 Specify whether a trunk line placed on Consul- (1) 133

tation Hold by Call Park-Tenant can be re- (2) 0 : Not available
trieved by pressing a trunk line appearance key 1 : Available
on a Multiline Terminal.

CM41 Specify the recall timing for Call Park-Tenant. • Y=0

(1) 05
(2) 01-99: 4-396 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 60-64
seconds.

CM90 Assign Call Park-Tenant Retrieve keys/Hold • Y=00

key to the Multiline Terminal, as required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F3XX Z: Call Park-Tenant
NOTE: Hold key (F1010) is set to the key XX : 00-63: Group No. (Station Tenant
number 97 as default setting. No.)
Z : 1-8: Serial No.
F1010: Hold

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade, if required

1-167
 CALL PICKUP
CALL PICKUP-DIRECT

CALL PICKUP
CALL PICKUP-DIRECT

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Pickup-Direct in the Service • Y=014

Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign an access code for Call Pickup-Direct. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A021: Call Pickup-Direct

CM90 Assign a Call Pickup-Direct key to Multiline • Y=00

Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0021: Call Pickup-Direct

END

1-168
 CALL PICKUP
CALL PICKUP-GROUP

CALL PICKUP-GROUP

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM16 Assign each Call Pickup group, by assigning • Y=0

station numbers within a group one by one (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. in Call Pick-
with the following operation: up group
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. in
1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B same group
2nd Operation : (1) Station B (2) Station C
~

Last Operation: (1) Station X (2) Station A

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Pickup-Group. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A020: Call Pickup-Group

CM90 Assign a Call Pickup-Group key to each • Y=00

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0020: Call Pickup-Group

END

NOTE 1: There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup groups.

NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations within a group is 60. Individual stations can be assigned to
only one Call Pickup group.

1-169
 CALL PICKUP
CALL PICKUP-GROUP

To permit a station within the Call Pickup group to answer the calls to other lines, in the order from a spec-
ified pilot station (ringing search start position):

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM16 Assign each Call Pickup group, by assigning • Y=0

station numbers within a group one by one (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. in Call Pick-
with the following operation: up group
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. in
1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B same group
2nd Operation : (1) Station B (2) Station C
~

~
Last Operation: (1) Station X (2) Station A

Specify a pilot station in Call Pickup group. • Y=8

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be includ-
ed in the Call Pickup
group
(2) 0 : Pilot Station
1 : Member Station

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Pickup-Group • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(Pilot). (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A234: Call Pickup-Group (Pilot)

CM90 Assign a Call Pickup-Group key to each • Y=00

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0B34: Call Pickup-Group (Pilot)

END

NOTE 1: There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup groups.

NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations within a group is 60. Individual stations can be assigned to
only one Call Pickup group.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade, if required

1-170
 CALL PICKUP
CALL PICKUP-DESIGNATED GROUP

CALL PICKUP-DESIGNATED GROUP

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM16 Assign each Call Pickup group, by assigning • Y=0

station numbers within a group one by one (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. in Call Pick-
with the following operation: up Group
1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Another station No. in
2nd Operation : (1) Station B (2) Station C same Call Pickup Group
~

~
Last Operation: (1) Station X (2) Station A

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Pickup-Direct in Service • Y=014

Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign an access code for Call Pickup- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Designated Group. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A037: Call Pickup-Designated Group

END

NOTE 1: There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup groups.

NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations within a group is 60. Individual station can be assigned to
only one Call Pickup Group.

1-171
 CALL REDIRECT

CALL REDIRECT
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Call Re- • Y=00

direct key for transferring a call to a destina- (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
tion station or VMS. (2) F5011: Call Redirect for transferring to a
station assigned by CM51 Y=22
F5012: Call Redirect for transferring to a
VMS assigned by CM51 Y=18

CM51 Specify the destination VMS station of Call • Y=18

Redirect, to each tenant. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: VMS Station No.

Specify the destination station of Call • Y=22

Redirect, to each tenant. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

END

1-172
 CALL TRANSFER
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS

CALL TRANSFER
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS

NOTE: As for the programming of Call Transfer-All Calls using a Standard SIP Terminal, refer to
“(20) Operation settings when Standard SIP station with a held call goes on-hook” of “IP Sin-
gle Line Telephone (SIP) Data Assignment” in the System Manual.

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify Call Transfer from a station before a (1) 062

called station answers. (2) 0 : Not available
1 : Available
NOTE: Whether to allow Call Transfer-All
Calls is as per CM08>253, when a
station holds another station or
trunk such as Call Transfer-
Destination/Call Transfer in
Mobility Access.

Specify whether the transferring station is (1) 185

recalled if the transferred call remains unan- (2) 0 : Not available
swered for a preprogrammed duration when 1 : Available
the transferring station goes on-hook before
the called station answers for Call Transfer-All
Calls service.

Provide the system with Ring Transfer for Call (1) 253
Transfer-All Calls to a trunk when a station (2) 0 : Available
holds another station or trunk. 1 : Not available

Specify the operation of Recall key when a sta- (1) 1000

tion receives SPDT after hooking. (2) 0 : No operation
1 : Return to the original call

Provide the system with Trunk-to-Trunk (1) 028

Connection transferred by a station or an atten- (2) 0: Available
dant between TRK-A (C.O./Tie line) and
TRK-B (C.O./Tie line).

1-173
 CALL TRANSFER
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the system operation when the station, (1) 1056
after holding call, has made a switch hook (2) 0 : As per CM12 Y=87
flash while talking with another call. 1 : As per CM08>102/CM08>103/
[9300V5 software required] CM08>1055

Specify the system operation when the station (1) 102

(STA-A), after holding the other station (STA- (2) 0 : As per CM08>101
C), has made a switch hook flash while talking 1 : STA-B is held, and STA-A returns to
with another station (STA-B). the connection with STA-C (Broker’s
Call)

Specify the system operation when (1) 101

CM08>102 is set to 0 for Single Line Tele- (2) 0 : The call with STA-B is disconnected,
phone. and STA-A returns to STA-C
1 : Three Party Conference
NOTE 1: This command is valid when
CM08>102 is set to 0 (As per
CM08>101).

NOTE 2: For a Multiline Terminal, Broker’s

Call is applied regardless of this
data setting.

Specify the system operation when the station (1) 103

(STA-A), after holding a C.O. call, has made a (2) 0 : As per CM08>104
switch hook flash while talking with another 1 : STA-B is held, and STA-A returns to
station (STA-B). the connection with C.O. line (Bro-
ker’s Call)
NOTE: For a Multiline Terminal, Broker’s
Call is applied regardless of this
data setting.

Specify the system operation when CM08> (1) 104

103 is set to 0. (2) 0 : The call with STA-B is disconnected,
and STA-A returns to the C.O. line
NOTE: This command is valid when 1 : Three Party Conference
CM08>103 is set to 0 (As per
CM08>104).

1-174
 CALL TRANSFER
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the system operation when the station, (1) 1055
after holding the other trunk (TRK-A), has (2) 0 : The call with TRK-A is disconnected,
made a switch hook flash while talking with and returns to TRK-B
another trunk (TRK-B). 1 : As per CM35 Y=148
[9300V5 software required]

CM35 System operation when the station, after hold- • Y=148

ing the other trunk (TRK-A), has made a (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
switch hook flash while talking with another (2) 0 : Broker’s Call (TRK-B is held, and sta-
trunk (TRK-B). tion returns to the connection with
TRK-A)
1 : Three-way Calling

CM12 Specify the system operation when the station, • Y=87

after holding call, has made a switch hook (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
flash while talking with another call. (2) 0 : The call is disconnected, and returns
[9300V5 software required] to the held call
1 : Broker’s call
NOTE: This command is valid when 2 : Three-party conference
CM08>1056 is set to “0”. 3 : As per CM08>102/CM08>103/
CM08>1055

CM90 Assign a Recall key on the Multiline Terminal. • Y=00

(1) My Line No. + , + Key No. (90)
(2) F1015: Recall

CM41 Specify the duration of sending SPDT after a • Y=0

hooking operation for Call Transfer. (1) 105
(2) 10-60: 10-60 seconds (1 second increment)
If no data is set, the default setting is 15 seconds.

Specify the recall timing after station release • Y=0

for call transfer. (1) 07
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 seconds increment)
If no data is set, the default setting is 24-28 sec-
onds.

1-175
 CALL TRANSFER
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS

To specify the system operation after the C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-B) is completed, when a station that
has a C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-A) on Consultation Hold is talking with another C.O./Tie line call (via
TRK-B):

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 When a station that has a C.O./Tie line call (via (1) 534
TRK-A) on Consultation Hold is talking with (2) 0 : Return to the original call (via TRK-A)
another C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-B), speci- 1 : ROT
fy the system operation after the C.O./Tie line
call (via TRK-B) is completed.

NOTE: This command is not used for a

Standard SIP Terminal.

END

1-176
 CALL TRANSFER
CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT

CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the Access code for operator calls. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) 800: Operator call

CM62 Specify the tenants to be handled by each ATT • Y=0-3 ATT Group 0-3 assigned by CM60
Group. Y=00
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
NOTE: A reset by CM60 Y=90>0: 0 is re- (2) 0: To be handled
quired after this data setting.

CM08 Specify Call Transfer from a station before the (1) 063
called attendant answers. (2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available

END

1-177
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID CLASS

CALLER ID
CALLER ID CLASS
[For North America/Asia/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

(1) Trunk Assignment for CALLER ID CLASS

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Specify the Terminating System in Day Mode/ • Y=02 Day Mode
Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B for incoming • Y=03 Night Mode
calls. • Y=40 Mode A
• Y=41 Mode B
NOTE: The second data 13 (TAS) cannot be (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
assigned for CM30 Y=40/41 (effec- (2) 02 : Trunk-Direct Appearances
tive only for CM30 Y=02/03). 03 : Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS
04 : Direct-In Termination
08 : Dial-in
09 : Automated Attendant
10 : Attendant Console + TAS
11 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct
Appearances
12 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct
Appearances + TAS
13 : TAS NOTE
14 : Attendant Console
16 : Remote Access to System (DISA)
18 : ISDN Indial
31 : DID, Tie Line and any call which is
not handled by the PBX

CM35 Assign the kind of the trunk route for DDD • Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route
(C.O./DID) trunk. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DDD (C.O./DID) trunk

Provide the trunk route with Caller ID. • Y=037 Caller ID

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Available

1-178
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID CLASS

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the busy/idle status not to be sent to the • Y=048 Busy/Idle Sending
network. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Not sent

Assign the sending method of calling number • Y=129 Calling No. Sending Method
from the network, to each trunk route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: CALLER ID (CLASS SM)

END

(2) Other Relational Data Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the trunk access code for outgoing call • Y=044
sent to the SMDR. Trunk Access Code for Save & Repeat
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
NOTE: For using Save & Repeat feature, (2) 0-9/00-99: Trunk Access Code
this Trunk Access Code will be
saved and sent with the calling num-
ber.

CM08 Specify whether the calling number is sent to (1) 462: Sending to OAI terminal
the OAI terminal or not. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

Specify whether the calling number is sent to (1) 463: Sending to SMDR terminal
the SMDR terminal or not. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

Specify the type of Single Data Message (1) 489: Single Data Message Frame Format
Frame Format. (2) 0 : Without Time Parameter
1 : With Time Parameter

1-179
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID CLASS

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the Meaning of Parameter type 3 in (1) 736: Meaning of Parameter type 3 in Multi-
Multiple Data Frame Message Format for ple Data Frame Message Format for
Caller ID. Caller ID.
[For Asia] (2) 0 : Called Number
1 : Calling Number
NOTE: When the Called Number is sent
from the PSTN, set the 2nd data to 0.

CM90 Provide the Multiline Terminal with a select • Y=00

key of Calling Number Display or (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
Calling Name Display. (2) F1099: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-
play or Calling Name Display

Provide the DESKCON with a select key of • Y=00

Calling Number Display or Calling Name Dis- (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
play. No.
(2) F6122: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-
play or Calling Name Display

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

COT blade

NOTE: Caller ID Class is the feature that receives the calling subscriber’s name and number sent from
a public network using a MODEM and displays the name or number on an LCD of a Multiline
Terminal or an Attendant Console.

1-180
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID DTMF

CALLER ID DTMF
[For Asia/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

(1) Trunk Assignment for CALLER ID DTMF

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Specify the Terminating System in Day Mode/ • Y=02 Day Mode
Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B for incoming • Y=03 Night Mode
calls. • Y=40 Mode A
• Y=41 Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 02 : Trunk-Direct Appearances
03 : Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS
04 : Direct-In Termination
08 : Dial-in
09 : Automated Attendant
10 : Attendant Console + TAS
11 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct
Appearances
12 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct
Appearances + TAS
13 : TAS
14 : Attendant Console
16 : Remote Access to System (DISA)
18 : ISDN Indial
31 : DID, Tie Line and any call which is
not handled by the PBX

CM35 Assign the kind of the trunk route for DDD • Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route
(C.O./DID) trunk. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DDD (C.O./DID) trunk

Provide the trunk route with Caller ID. • Y=037 Caller ID

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Available

Specify the busy/idle status not to be sent to the • Y=048 Busy/Idle Sending
network. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Not sent

1-181
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID DTMF

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the sending method of calling number • Y=129 Calling No. Sending Method
from the network, to each trunk route. BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 4: CALLER ID (DTMF)

END

(2) Other Relational Data Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the trunk access code for outgoing call • Y=044
sent to the SMDR. Trunk Access Code for Save & Repeat
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
NOTE: For using Save & Repeat feature, (2) 0-9/00-99: Trunk Access Code
this Trunk Access Code will be
saved and sent with the calling num-
ber.

CM08 Specify whether the calling number is sent to (1) 462: Sending to OAI terminal
the OAI terminal or not. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

Specify whether the calling number is sent to (1) 463: Sending to SMDR terminal
the SMDR terminal or not. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

Provide the digit display that DTMF Caller ID (1) 1926: Digit display that DTMF Caller ID
received (For test). received
(2) 0 : To provide
1 : Not provided

CM90 Provide the Multiline Terminal with a select • Y=00

key of Calling Number Display or (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
Calling Name Display. (2) F1099: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-
play or Calling Name Display

1-182
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID DTMF

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Provide the DESKCON with a select key of • Y=00

Calling Number Display or Calling Name Dis- (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
play. No.
(2) F6122: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-
play or Calling Name Display

CM41 Specify the DTMF Caller ID received timer. • Y=0

(1) 163
(2) 01-15: 0-60 seconds
(4 seconds increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 4-8 sec-
onds.

CM42 Specify the number of deletion digits of re- (1) 213

ceived Caller ID for DTMF Caller ID Trunk. (2) 00 : No digit deletion
01-15 : 1-15 digits deletion
NOTE: Assign this data to “01” in Saudi NONE : No digit deletion
Arabia.

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

COT blade

NOTE: Caller ID DTMF is the feature that receives the calling subscriber’s number sent from a public
network using a DTMF and displays the number on LCD of a Multiline Terminal or an Atten-
dant Console.

1-183
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID DISPLAY

CALLER ID DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING

In addition to Automatic Number Identification (ANI) or Caller ID Class, assign the following data.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Caller • Y=00

ID Display key for displaying the ANI or Call- (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
er ID. (2) F5010: Caller ID Display

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade

1-184
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID-STATION

CALLER ID-STATION
[For North America/Asia/EMEA]

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the LC blade. • Y=0

BLADE RESET (1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 20: LC blade

CM10 Assign the station number of an analog tele- • Y=00

phone for Caller ID-Station to the required (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Physical Port number. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

CM04 Specify Caller ID-station as the purpose of the • Y=01

Caller ID sender. (1) 02
(2) 7 : Caller ID-Station

CM12 Specify the calling party information which is • Y=20

sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Station. (2) 0: Calling Party Number
1: Calling Party Number and Calling Party
Name

CM08 Specify whether the calling station number is (1) 507

sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID- (2) 0 : Not sent
Station when an internal call is terminated. 1 : To send

CM50 To call back from the analog telephone for • Y=00

Caller ID-Station, assign the access code to be (1) 8
added to the calling station number when an (2) X-XXXX: Access Code to be added
internal call is terminated. (Maximum 4 digits)
X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

1-185
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID-STATION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the Caller ID information sending (1) 592

format. (2) 0 : CCITT V.23 Modem (Data Format:
RESET ETSI)
1 : Bell 202 Modem

CM04 Specify the Single Line Telephone ringing • Y=00

signal from a trunk. (1) 06
(2) 01 : ON
02 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF
03 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF
04 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
05 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
06 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
-0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF
07 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-5.25 seconds OFF
08 : 0.375 seconds ON-0.25 seconds
OFF-0.375 seconds ON-2 seconds
OFF
09 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds
OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.125
seconds OFF-0.25 seconds ON
-2 seconds OFF
10 : 1 second ON-4 seconds OFF
11 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-4.25 seconds OFF
12 : 1 second ON-3 seconds OFF
13 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2.25 seconds OFF
31 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF
NOTE

CM41 Specify the timing of Caller ID station until • Y=0

sending Caller ID signal after the first ringer (1) 123
begins to send. (2) 00-25: 0-2500 ms. (100 ms. increments)
RESET If no data is set, the default setting is 1500 ms.
(CM08>592: 0)/2500 ms. (CM08>592: 1).
NOTE

CM08 Restrict One hit ringing for Call Forwarding- (1) 266
All Calls. (To restrict all stations in the system) (2) 0: Restricted

1-186
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID-STATION

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to each sta- • Y=07

tion. (To restrict per Station Class) (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Restrict One hit ringing for Call Forwarding- • Y=081

All Calls to Service Restriction Class C as- (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-
signed by CM12 Y=07. (To restrict per Station signed by CM12 Y=07
Class) (2) 0: Restricted

CM35 Specify the Calling Name display for Caller • Y=318

ID-station received on Facility in ISDN (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
message. (2) 0 : Available
[North America Only] 1 : Not available

END

NOTE: Adjust the Caller ID signal so that the Caller ID signal to be sent between the first ringer and
the second ringer.

1st ringer Caller ID signal 2nd ringer

Caller ID signal (CM41 Y=0>123)

Single Line Telephone ringing signal (CM04 Y=00>06)

1-187
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID-STATION

By the following programming, the Calling Party Number and the Calling Party Name sent from the net-
work over CCIS can be displayed on the LCD of the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Specify the calling party information which is • Y=20

sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Station. (2) 0: Calling Party Number
1: Calling Party Number and Calling Party
Name

CM08 Specify whether the calling station number is (1) 507

sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID- (2) 0 : Not sent
Station when an internal call is terminated. 1 : To send

Specify whether the calling party name is sent (1) 524

to the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station (2) 0 : To send
when an internal call is terminated. (Calling Party Name is sent)
[For North America] 1 : Not sent
(Calling Party Number is sent)
NOTE 1: This data is effective only when the
2nd data of CM12 Y=20 is set to 1.

NOTE 2: For the programming for Calling

Number Display-CCIS and Calling
Name Display-CCIS, refer to the
Networking Manual.

Specify whether the sending of calling station (1) 603

number or calling party number to the analog (2) 0 : To provide
telephone for Caller ID-Station is provided 1 : Not provided
when an incoming call is terminated via CCIS/
SIP Trunk.

NOTE: The sending of a calling station

number to the analog telephone for
Caller ID-Station is effective when
CM08>507 is set to 1.

END

1-188
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID-STATION

To provide the Call Back by Analog telephone:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the Access Code to be added to the (1) 1210

calling party number when incoming call from (2) 0 : To provide
C.O. (This assignment is required to call back 1 : Not to provide
from the analog telephone for Caller ID-
Station).

CM35 Assign the Trunk access code for Trunk-Direct • Y=189

Appearances Multiline Operation. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) X-XX : Trunk Access Code
NONE : No data

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Analog telephone with LCD which supports Caller ID

LC blade

1-189
 CALLER ID
CALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK)

CALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK)

[For EMEA]

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALLER ID-STATION. Page 1-185.

1-190
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

CID CALL ROUTING

PROGRAMMING

For DID on ISDN, T1-ANI incoming calls:

(See SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 1. Page 1-196 )

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide the incoming trunk route with digit • Y=018

conversion. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

Specify the Development Table for digit con- • Y=170

version. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Development Table 1
3 : Development Table 0

CM76 Assign the Number Conversion Block number • Y=00

for Development Table 0. (1) X-XXXX: DID No. /Called No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
NOTE

NOTE: When the Number Conversion Block number is assigned for CID Call Routing, do not use
the same Number Conversion Block number for the DID feature.

Assign the Number Conversion Block number • Y=90

for Development Table 1. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: DID No. /Called No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
NOTE

NOTE: When the Number Conversion Block number is assigned for CID Call Routing, do not use
the same Number Conversion Block number for the DID feature.

1-191
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Provide the calling number development and • Y=26

specify its Development Pattern for each (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
Number Conversion Block number assigned assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
by CM76 Y=00/90. (2) 0: To provide
(Using Development Pattern 0)
NOTE: For non-DID on ISDN, Caller ID 1: To provide
calls, this data is not effective and (Using Development Pattern 1)
the data setting of CM35 Y=174 is 2: To provide
effective. (Using Development Pattern 2)

CM2A Assign the Development Block number for • Y=50 Development Pattern 0 assigned by
each calling party number. CM76 Y=26
• Y=51 Development Pattern 1 assigned by
CM76 Y=26
• Y=52 Development Pattern 2 assigned by
CM76 Y=26
(1) X-XX....XX: Calling Party No. (Maximum
16 digits)
X: 0-9
(2) 000-999: Development Block No. NOTE

NOTE: Set the different number from the

Number Conversion Block
number assigned by CM76
Y=00/90.

CM65 Select the two kinds of mode change or the • Y=29

four kinds of mode change per each tenant. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : Two kinds of mode (Day Mode, Night
Mode)
1 : Four kinds of mode (Day Mode, Night
Mode, Mode A, Mode B)

CM76 Assign the station tenant for each calling party • Y=09
number. (1) 000-999: Development Block No. assigned
by CM2A Y=50/51/52
(2) 00-63: Station Tenant No.

1-192
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Assign the data for interpreting the digits • Y=01 Day Mode
received. • Y=02 Night Mode
• Y=03 Mode A
NOTE: Day/Night Mode, Mode A/B can be • Y=04 Mode B
specified according to following (1) 000-999: Development Block No. assigned
conditions. by CM2A Y=50/51/52
1st priority: (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be
Specified by tenant number for each terminated
calling party number (CM76 Y=09) DXX: Change Terminating System to:
2nd priority: D02: Trunk-Direct Appearances
Specified by trunk tenant number D03: Trunk-Direct Appearances +
(CM30 Y=01) TAS
3rd priority: D04: Direct-In Termination
Specified by tenant number for each D09: Automated Attendant
DID number (CM76 Y=09) D10: Attendant Console + TAS
D11: Attendant Console + Trunk-
Direct Appearances
D12: Attendant Console + Trunk-
Direct Appearances + TAS
D13: TAS
D14: Attendant Console
D16: Remote Access to System (DI-
SA)

When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “D13” • Y=05 Day Mode

(TAS), assign the terminating tenant for Day/ • Y=06 Night Mode
Night Mode, Mode A/B per each calling party • Y=07 Mode A
number. • Y=08 Mode B
(1) 000-999: Development Block No. assigned
by CM2A Y=50/51/52
(2) 00-63: Trunk Tenant No.

NOTE: When you set the other CM76 data (Y=10, 11, 13-16, 18-25) for the Development Block
number assigned by CM2A Y=50/51/52, these settings are also effective for each calling
party number.

END

1-193
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

For non-DID on ISDN, Caller ID incoming calls:

(See SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 2. Page 1-198 )

NOTE: When a Called Party Subaddress is received from ISDN subscriber, CID Call Routing is not
effective.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide the calling number development and • Y=174

specify its Development Pattern for each trunk (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
route number. (2) 0: To provide
(Using Development Pattern 0)
NOTE: For DID on ISDN, T1-ANI calls, 1: To provide
this data is not effective and the data (Using Development Pattern 1)
setting of CM76 Y=26 is effective. 2: To provide
(Using Development Pattern 2)

CM2A Assign the Development Block number for • Y=50 Development Pattern 0 assigned by
each calling party number. CM35 Y=174
• Y=51 Development Pattern 1 assigned by
CM35 Y=174
• Y=52 Development Pattern 2 assigned by
CM35 Y=174
(1) X-XX....XX: Calling Party No.
(Maximum 16 digits)
X: 0-9
(2) 000-999: Development Block No.

CM65 Select the two kinds of mode change or the • Y=29

four kinds of mode change per each tenant. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : Two kinds of mode (Day Mode, Night
Mode)
1 : Four kinds of mode (Day Mode, Night
Mode, Mode A, Mode B)

CM76 Assign the station tenant for each calling party • Y=09
number. (1) 000-999: Development Block No. assigned
by CM2A Y=50/51/52
(2) 00-63: Station Tenant No.

1-194
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Assign the data for interpreting the digits • Y=01 Day Mode
received. • Y=02 Night Mode
• Y=03 Mode A
NOTE: Day/Night Mode, Mode A/B can be • Y=04 Mode B
specified according to following (1) 000-999: Development Block No. assigned
conditions. by CM2A Y=50/51/52
1st priority: (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be
Specified by tenant number for each terminated
calling party number (CM76 Y=09) DXX: Change Terminating System to:
2nd priority: D02: Trunk-Direct Appearances
Specified by trunk tenant number D03: Trunk-Direct Appearances +
(CM30 Y=01) TAS
D04: Direct-In Termination
D09: Automated Attendant
D10: Attendant Console + TAS
D11: Attendant Console + Trunk-
Direct Appearances
D12: Attendant Console + Trunk-
Direct Appearances + TAS
D13: TAS
D14: Attendant Console
D16: Remote Access to System (DI-
SA)

When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “D13” • Y=05 Day Mode

(TAS), assign the terminating tenant for Day/ • Y=06 Night Mode
Night Mode, Mode A/B per each calling party • Y=07 Mode A
number received on DID call. • Y=08 Mode B
(1) 000-999: Development Block No. assigned
by CM2A Y=50/51/52
(2) 00-63: Trunk Tenant No.

NOTE: When you set the other CM76 data (Y=10, 11, 13-16, 18-25) for the Development Block
number assigned by CM2A Y=50/51/52, these settings are also effective for each calling
party number.

END

1-195
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 1

For DID on ISDN, T1-ANI incoming calls.

< Example >

• DID No. : 0123 456-7890

• Trunk Route No. : 00
• Calling Party No. : 1234 567-8901
: 2345 678-9012
• Terminating System: TAS (Day Mode) when the number 1234 is received
: Direct-In Termination (Day Mode) when the number 2345 is received
• Station Tenant No. : 01
• Trunk Tenant No. : 01

SV9300

Station to be terminated
Calling Party No.: when the calling party
1234 567-8901/ number 1234 is received
ISDN/ 2345 678-9012
PSTN Trunk Route: 00

Station to be terminated
when the calling party
number 2345 is received

When the number assigned by

CM2A corresponds with the upper
digits of calling party number, the
call terminates with the specified
terminating system.

1-196
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

< Data Programming >

COMMAND 1st DATA 2nd DATA REMARKS

CM30 Y=00 000 00 Assign the trunk route number 00 to the trunk num-
ber 000.
CM30 Y=02 000 18 Set the ISDN Indial for the incoming calls.
CM35 Y=012 00 3 Assign the number of digits to be received on DID to
4 digits.
CM35 Y=018 00 0 Provide the trunk route number 00 with digit conver-
sion.
CM76 Y=00 7890 000 Assign the Number Conversion Block number 000
to the DID number 7890.
CM76 Y=26 000 0 Provide the calling number development with the
Development Pattern 0 to the Number Conversion
Block number 000.
CM2A Y=50 1234 010 Assign the Development Block number 010 for the
calling party number 1234.
CM2A Y=50 2345 011 Assign the Development Block number 011 for the
calling party number 2345.
CM76 Y=01 010 D13 Assign TAS in Day Mode to the Development Block
number 010.
CM76 Y=01 011 D04 Assign Direct-In Termination in Day Mode to the
Development Block number 011.
CM76 Y=09 010 01 Assign the station tenant number 01 to the Develop-
ment Block number 010.
CM76 Y=05 010 01 Assign the trunk tenant number 01 to the Develop-
ment Block number 010.

1-197
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 2

For non-DID on ISDN, Caller ID incoming calls.

< Example >

• Calling Party No. : 1234 567-8901

: 2345 678-9012
• Trunk Route No. : 00
• Terminating System: TAS (Day Mode) when the number 1234 is received
: Direct-In Termination (Day Mode) when the number 2345 is received
• Station Tenant No. : 01
• Trunk Tenant No. : 01

SV9300

Station to be terminated
Calling Party No.: when the calling party
1234 567-8901/ number 1234 is received
ISDN/ 2345 678-9012
GSTN Trunk Route: 00

Station to be terminated
when the calling party
number 2345 is received

When the number assigned by

CM2A corresponds with the upper
digits of calling party number, the
call terminates with the specified
terminating system.

1-198
 CALLER ID
CID CALL ROUTING

< Data Programming >

COMMAND 1st DATA 2nd DATA REMARKS

CM35 Y=174 00 0 Provide the calling number development with the
Development Pattern 0 for trunk route number 00.
CM2A Y=50 1234 020 Assign the Development Block number 020 for the
calling party number 1234.
CM2A Y=50 2345 021 Assign the Development Block number 021 for the
calling party number 2345.
CM76 Y=01 020 D13 Assign TAS in Day Mode to the Development Block
number 020.
CM76 Y=01 021 D04 Assign Direct-In Termination in Day Mode to the
Development Block number 021.
CM76 Y=09 020 01 Assign the station tenant number 01 to Development
Block number 020.
CM76 Y=05 020 01 Assign the trunk tenant number 01 to Development
Block number 020.

1-199
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

NO CID CALL ROUTING

• For Direct Inward Dialing calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide the indication of reason why the call- • Y=133

ing number is not informed from network to (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
trunk route. (2) 0: To indicate

CM76 Specify whether the call terminating method is • Y=33 (For Day Mode)
specified for DID incoming call with no CLI. • Y=35 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
(1) 000-999: Block No.
NOTE: When the second data is set to 0, set (2) 0 : Specified for each reason of the in-
the call termination method by coming call with no CLI
CM76 Y=34, 65 and 66. When the 1 : Specified for all incoming calls with
second data is set to 1, set the call no CLI
termination method by CM76 Y=34. 3 : Not specified

Specify the call terminating method for all • Y=34 (For Day Mode)
DID incoming call with no CLI or when reason • Y=36 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
of the incoming call with no CLI is “privacy”. (1) 000-999: Block No.
(2) 0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/
NOTE: Call terminating method is as fol- Attendant console (assigned by CM51
lows. Y=33)
- When CM76 Y=33/35 is set to 1 : To reject the call termination
“0”: Specified for each reason of 2 : To terminate the Multiline Terminal
the incoming call with no CLI with Lamp indication/ringer tone/
- When CM76 Y=33/35 is set to ringer pattern (assigned by CM76
“1”: Specified for all incoming Y=37, 38, 39)
calls with no CLI 3 : To terminate as usual

1-200
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Specify the call terminating method when rea- • Y=65 (For Day Mode)
son of the incoming call with no CLI is “Out of • Y=67 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
Area”. (1) 000-999: Block No.
(2) 0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/
NOTE 1: This command is effective when 2nd Attendant Console (assigned by
data of CM76 Y=33/35 is set to 0 CM51 Y=36)
(Specified for each reason of the in- 1 : To reject the call termination
coming call with no CLI). 2 : To terminate Multiline Terminal with
lamp indication/ringer tone/ringer pat-
NOTE 2: Other reasons (the reason for ab- tern (assigned by CM76 Y=37/38/39)
sence of CLI is not received and CLI 3 : To terminate as usual
is not received) is in common with
the setting of this command.

Specify the call terminating method when rea- • Y=66 (For Day Mode)
son of the incoming call with no CLI is “Coin • Y=68 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
Box”. (1) 000-999: Block No.
(2) 0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/
NOTE: This command is effective when 2nd Attendant Console (assigned by
data of CM76 Y=33/35 is set to 0 CM51 Y=36)
(Specified for each reason of the in- 1 : To reject the call termination
coming call with no CLI). 2 : To terminate Multiline Terminal with
lamp indication /ringer tone/ringer
pattern (assigned by CM76 Y=37/38/
39)
3 : To terminate as usual

1-201
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM51 Assign the destination of call forwarding when • Y=33

the calling number is not informed from net- (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
work or when reason of the incoming call with (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
no CLI is “privacy”. E000 : Attendant
EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
NOTE 1: This command needs to be set when No.
CM76 Y=34/36 is set to 0. NONE : No data

NOTE 2: Call terminating method for desti-

nation is as follows.
- When CM76 Y=33/35 is set to
“0”: Specified for each reason of
the incoming call with no CLI
- When CM76 Y=33/35 is set to
“1”: Specified for all incoming
calls with no CLI

NOTE 3: Assign the function of Voice Re-

sponse System by CM49 Y=00 when
this command is set to Voice Re-
sponse System No.

Assign the destination of call forwarding when • Y=36

reason of the incoming call with no CLI is (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
“Out of Area”. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000 : Attendant
NOTE: This command is effective when 2nd EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
data of CM76 Y=65/67 is set to 0. No.
NONE : No data

Assign the destination of call forwarding when • Y=37

reason of the incoming call with no CLI is (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
“Coin Box”. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000 : Attendant
NOTE: This command is effective when 2nd EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
data of CM76 Y=66/68 is set to 0. No.
NONE : No data

1-202
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM49 Specify the function of Voice Response Sys- • Y=00

tem. (1) 000-015: Voice Response System No.
assigned by CM51 Y=33
NOTE: This command is effective only when (2) 2200 : Announcement Service for no
CM51 Y=33 is set to Voice Response Caller-ID
System No. NONE : No data

CM76 Specify a distinctive Lamp indication on Mul- • Y=37

tiline Terminal for DID incoming call with no (1) 000-999: Block No.
CLI. (2) 0 : Green (120 IPM)
1 : Red (120 IPM)

NOTE: This command is effective on the following conditions.

• CM35 Y=032 is set to 1.
• CM76 Y=34, 36, 65-68 are set to 0 or 2, and Multiline Terminal receives the incoming
call.

Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or • Y=38

Multiline Terminal for DID incoming call with (1) 000-999: Block No.
no CLI. (2) 0 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
(Multiline Terminal)
NOTE 1: Assign this command when the ter- 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF (SLT)
minal destination is SLT or Multi- 1 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF -
line Terminal. 0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF
(Multiline Terminal)
NOTE 2: This command is effective when 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF -
CM76 Y=34, 36, 65-68 is set to 0 or 0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF (SLT)
2. 2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF (Multi-
line Terminal or SLT)
3 : As per CM76 Y=22
[For North America]

1-203
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Specify a Multiline Terminal Ringer Tone Pat- • Y=39

tern for DID incoming call with no CLI. (1) 000-999: Block No.
(2) 0 : Ringer Tone Pattern 0
NOTE 1: This command is effective when 1 : Ringer Tone Pattern 1
CM76 Y=34, 36, 65-68 is set to 0 or 2 : Ringer Tone Pattern 2
2, and Multiline Terminal receives 3 : Ringer Tone Pattern 3
the incoming call. 4 : Ringer Tone Pattern 4
5 : Ringer Tone Pattern 5
NOTE 2: For details of the Ringer Tone Pat- 6 : Ringer Tone Pattern 6
tern, see CM64 Y=20-27 or CM65 7 : As per CM76 Y=23
Y=40.

Specify a kind of call termination indicator • Y=40

key/lamp on Attendant console for DID in- (1) 000-999: Block No.
coming call with no CLI. (2) 0 : C.O. Incoming Call 0
1 : C.O. Incoming Call 1
NOTE: The command is effective when 2 : C.O. Incoming Call 2
CM76 Y=34, 36, 65-68 is set to 0, 3 : C.O. Incoming Call 3
and the destination of call forward- 4 : C.O. Incoming Call 4
ing is Attendant console. 5 : C.O. Incoming Call 5
6 : C.O. Incoming Call 6
7 : As per CM35 Y=015

END

1-204
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

• For Ring Down calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide the indication of reason why the call- • Y=133

ing number is not informed from network to (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
trunk route. (2) 0: To indicate

Specify whether the call terminating method is • Y=254 (For Day Mode)
specified for incoming call with no CLI. • Y=256 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
NOTE: To specify call terminating methods, (2) 0 : Specified for each reason of the in-
use CM35 Y=255/257/343-346. coming call with no CLI
1 : Specified for all incoming call with no
CLI
3 : Not specified

Specify the call terminating method for all • Y=255 (For Day Mode)
DID incoming call with no CLI or when reason • Y=257 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
of the incoming call with no CLI is “privacy”. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/
NOTE: Call terminating method for desti- Attendant console (assigned by CM51
nation is as follows. Y=33)
- When CM35 Y=254/256 is set to 1 : To reject the call termination
“0”: Specified for each reason of 2 : To terminate the Multiline Terminal
the incoming call with no CLI with unusual LED indication (as-
- When CM35 Y=254/256 is set to signed by CM35 Y=258)
“1”: Specified for all incoming 3 : To terminate as usual
calls with no CLI

Specify the call terminating method when rea- • Y=343 (For Day Mode)
son of the incoming call with no CLI is “Out of • Y=345 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
Area”. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/
NOTE 1: This command is effective when 2nd Attendant Console (assigned by
data of CM35 Y=254/256 is set to 0 CM51 Y=36)
(Specified for each reason of the in- 1 : To reject the call termination
coming call with no CLI). 2 : To terminate the Multiline Terminal
with unusual LED indication (as-
NOTE 2: Other reasons (the reason for ab- signed by CM35 Y=258)
sence of CLI is not received and CLI 3 : To terminate as usual
is not received) are in common with
the setting of this command.

1-205
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the call terminating method when rea- • Y=344 (For Day Mode)
son of the incoming call with no CLI is “Coin • Y=346 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)
Box”. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/
NOTE: This command is effective when 2nd Attendant Console (assigned by
data of CM35 Y=254/256 is set to 0 CM51 Y=36)
(Specified for each reason of the in- 1 : To reject the call termination
coming call with no CLI). 2 : To terminate the Multiline Terminal
with unusual LED indication (as-
signed by CM35 Y=258)
3 : To terminate as usual

CM51 Assign the destination of call forwarding when • Y=33

the calling number is not informed from net- (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
work or when reason of the incoming call with (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
no CLI is “privacy”. E000 : Attendant
EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
NOTE 1: This command needs to be set when No.
CM35 Y=255/257 is set to 0. NONE : No data

NOTE 2: Call terminating method for desti-

nation is as follows.
- When CM35 Y=254/256 is set to
“0”: Specified for each reason of
the incoming call with no CLI
- When CM35 Y=254/256 is set to
“1”: Specified for all incoming
calls with no CLI

NOTE 3: Assign the function of Voice Re-

sponse System by CM49 Y=00 when
this command is set to Voice Re-
sponse System No.

1-206
 CALLER ID
NO CID CALL ROUTING

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM51 Assign the destination of call forwarding when • Y=36

reason of the incoming call with no CLI is (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
“Out of Area”. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000 : Attendant
NOTE: This command is effective when 2nd EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
data of CM35 Y=343/345 is set to 0. No.
NONE : No data

Assign the destination of call forwarding when • Y=37

reason of the incoming call with no CLI is (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
“Coin Box”. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000 : Attendant
NOTE: This command is effective when 2nd EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
data of CM35 Y=344/346 is set to 0. No.
NONE : No data

CM49 Specify the function of Voice Response Sys- • Y=00

tem. (1) 000-015 : Voice Response System No.
assigned by CM51 Y=33
NOTE: This command is effective only when (2) 2200 : Announcement Service for no
CM51 Y=33 is set to Voice Response Caller-ID
System No. NONE : No data

CM35 Specify a distinctive Lamp indication on • Y=258

Multiline Terminal for incoming call with no (1) 0 : Green (120 IPM)
CLI. (2) 1 : Red (120 IPM)

NOTE: This command is effective on the following conditions.

• CM35 Y=032 is set to 1.
• CM35 Y=255, 257, 343-346 are set to 0 or 2, and Multiline Terminal receives the in-
coming call.

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade

CPU blade (VRS using a built-in Flash ROM)

1-207
 CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING

CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING
PROGRAMMING

Camp-On (Transfer Method)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with the Camp-On by (1) 146: Automatic Camp-On
Station feature. (2) 0: Available

(1) 147: Manual Camp-On (Result of Switch

Hook-Flash while hearing Busy Tone)
(2) 0: The station hears Special Dial Tone and
use of Camp-On access code is allowed

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for • Y=02

Camp-On to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Camp-On (Transfer Method) in Service • Y=016 Transfer Method

Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM08 Specify the Camp-On Tone sent to a busy (1) 068

station by Camp-On Transfer Method. (2) 0 : Only once
1 : Every 4 seconds

CM41 Specify the timing for the Camp-On Recall • Y=0

Timer. (1) 26
(2) 01-15: 16-128 seconds
(8 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 24-32
seconds.

CM20 Assign an access code for Camp-On by Station • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(Transfer method). (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A007: Camp-On by Station (Transfer
method)

END

1-208
 CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING

Camp-On (Call Waiting Method)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with the Camp-On by (1) 146: Automatic Camp-On
Station feature. (2) 0: Available

(1) 147: Manual Camp-On (Result of Switch

Hook Flash while hearing Busy Tone)
(2) 0: The station hears Special Dial Tone and
use of Camp-On access code is allowed

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Camp- • Y=02

On to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Waiting in Service Restriction • Y=043 Call Waiting Set from calling side
Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=044 Call Waiting Answer from called
side
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Camp-On by • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Station (Call Waiting Method). (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A125: Camp-On by Station (Call Waiting
Method)

CM90 Assign a Call Waiting key to the Multiline • Y=00

Terminals, as required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0A25: Call Waiting

CM48 Specify the hold tone sent to other party on • Y=2

answering Call Waiting. (1) 17
(2) 0 : No Tone
NOTE: IPT (P2P CCIS) is fixed to Hold 1 : Hold Tone
Tone.

CM35 Provide DID Call Waiting to the trunk routes • Y=059 Call Waiting for DID call
assigned by CM30. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

END

NOTE 1: For the data assignment of the Answer key to answer a Camp-On call from a Multiline Termi-
nal, refer to ANSWER KEY. Page 1-20
NOTE 2: For data assignment of DID Call Waiting, refer to DID CALL WAITING. Page 1-299

1-209
 CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING

When using a Single Digit Feature Access Code for Camp-On, add the following system data.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 To activate the Single Digit Feature Access (1) 050: * button as Switch Hook Flash
Code, set the data for 050, 051, 069 and 148 to (2) 1 : Ineffective
“1”.
(1) 051: # button as Switch Hook Flash
(2) 1 : Ineffective

(1) 069: Single Digit Dialing on BT Connec-

tion
(2) 1 : Step Call

(1) 148: Same Last Digit Redialing on BT

Connection
(2) 1 : Ineffective

Provide the System with the Single Digit (1) 208

Feature Access Code on BT Connection. (2) 0: Available

END

1-210
 CENTREX COMPATIBILITY

CENTREX COMPATIBILITY
[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

(1) Basic Data Assignment

In addition to the programming of DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD) Page 1-318, do
the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide the Centrex Trunk function to the • Y=086

required trunk routes. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Centrex Trunk

Provide the capability for sending a hookflash • Y=016

signal to the Centrex. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Sending

CM20 Assign the access code for sending a hookflash • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
signal to the Centrex Line from a PB Single- (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
Line Telephone. (2) A158

CM93 Assign the Centrex Trunk as a Prime Line to (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
the desired Multiline Terminal extension. (2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

CM08 Specify the function that transfers a trunk line (1) 1001
placed in Consultation Hold by Recall Key (2) 0 : Available (Hold Transfer)
(Hold Transfer). 1 : Not available (Recall)

END

1-211
 CENTREX COMPATIBILITY

(2) Data Assignment for Sending the Hooking Signal to T1 Network

To send the hooking signal to T1 network, do the following programming in addition to the
programming of “(1) Basic Data Assignment”. Page 1-211
[9300V5 software required]

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide the capability for sending a Hook • Y=016

Flash Signal to the Centrex. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Sending

CM90 Provide the Multiline Terminal Key Assign- • Y=00

ments. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1009: Hooking Signal sent to outside
(SHF)

CM41 Provide the capability for sending a Hook • Y=3

Flash Signal Transmit time. (1) 57: 1.5M (T1: Loop Start) DTI Hook Flash
BLADE RESET Send Time
(2) 01-99: 100-9900 ms. (100 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 600 ms.

END

1-212
 CLASS OF SERVICE

CLASS OF SERVICE
PROGRAMMING

To assign the Telephone Class:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the type of telephone to each station. • Y=00 Type of Telephone
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE: This data setting is not required for (2) 1 : DP (Rotary Dial Telephone)
a Multiline Terminal. 2 : DTMF (Push Button Telephone)
3 : DP/DTMF

Assign the Telephone Class to each station. • Y=03 Telephone Class

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00 : House Phone 0/FAX Call Station
Group No. 0
01 : House Phone 1/FAX Call Station
Group No. 1
02 : House Phone 2/FAX Call Station
Group No. 2
03 : House Phone 3/FAX Call Station
Group No. 3
04 : Hot Line
05 : Automatic Intercom
06 : Manual Intercom
07 : Dial Intercom
08 : Attendant Position Loop Line
09 : Delayed Hotline
15 : Ordinary Station

END

1-213
 CLASS OF SERVICE

To assign the Trunk Restriction Class:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the Trunk Restriction Class to each • Y=01 Trunk Restriction Class
station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X Z
X: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Day
Mode
Z : 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Night
Mode
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

CM35 Set the Outgoing/Incoming Trunk Route • Y=051-058 Outgoing Trunk Restriction
Restriction Data by Trunk Restriction Data (RCA-RCH)
Classes. • Y=061-068 Incoming Trunk Restriction
Data (RCA-RCH)
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow

END

1-214
 CLASS OF SERVICE

To assign the Service Restriction Class:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the required Service Restriction Class • Y=02

to each station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Service Restriction categories for each class (2) XX ZZ
are specified by CM15. XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A
ZZ : 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

• Y=07
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Specify the services in each Service Class A, (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A, B, C
B, and C. (2) 0 : NOTE
1 : NOTE
NOTE: For details, refer to Command
Manual.

END

1-215
 CODE RESTRICTION

CODE RESTRICTION
PROGRAMMING

(1) To originate a call with Individual Trunk Access/Route Advance Block (CM20 Y=0-3: 1XX/2XX)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each • Y=01

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X Z: Trunk Restriction Class
X: 1 -8: In Day Mode
Z : 1 -8: In Night Mode
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

CM35 Provide the Toll Restriction feature to the • Y=011

required trunk routes. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No. (00)
(2) 0: To provide

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern • Y=076

number for Toll Restriction and Maximum (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
Digit Analysis to each trunk route. (2) 00-04: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 0-4

CM85 Specify the maximum number of sending dig- • Y=0-4 Area Code Development Pattern
its to be dialed during an outgoing call. The No. 0-4 assigned by CM35 Y=076
maximum number of sending digits, including (1) X-X...X: Area Code dialed, Maximum 8
the area codes, should be assigned to each area digits
code. (2) 01-24 : 1 digit-24 digits
25-79 : 25-79 digits

1-216
 CODE RESTRICTION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign the area code to be restricted and the • Y=4000-4004 Area Code Development
Trunk Restriction Pattern number assigned by No. 0-4
CM81 to the Area Code Development Pattern (1) Area Code (Maximum 8 digits)
number assigned by CM35 Y=076. (2) B000-B015: Trunk Restriction Pattern
For example, to provide the Trunk Restriction 00-15
Class “RCB, RCC, RCD, and RCE” with the
Toll Restriction for Area Code “00”:

• Area Code=00
• Trunk Restriction Pattern=05
(See Toll Restriction Pattern Table on
CM81. Page 1-219)

END

1-217
 CODE RESTRICTION

(2) To use Least Cost Routing (CM20 Y=0-3: A126-A129)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with the Tol1 Restriction (1) 035: Station Speed Dialing
feature for an outgoing call by System Speed (2) 0 : Not provided
Dialing/Station Speed Dialing, if desired. 1 : To provide

(1) 044: System Speed Dialing

(2) 0 : Not provided
1 : To provide

Provide the system with Toll Diversion or Toll (1) 119

Denial. (2) 0 : Toll Diversion (Routed to the “ICPT”
key on the DESKCON)
1 : Toll Denial (Routed to Reorder Tone)

CM12 Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each • Y=01

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X Z: Trunk Restriction Class
X: 1 -8: In Day Mode
Z : 1 -8: In Night Mode
1: Unrestricted (RCA)
2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
6: Restricted 1 (RCF)
7: Restricted 2 (RCG)
8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

CM35 Assign the data for Dial Pulse sending to the • Y=008 Dial Pulse Sending
Route number assigned. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 3 : To send

Provide the Toll Restriction feature to the • Y=011

required trunk routes. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No. (00)
(2) 0: To provide

Specify outgoing route access capability for • Y=051-058 (RCA-RCH)

each restriction class. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow

1-218
 CODE RESTRICTION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the Area Code Development Pattern • Y=076

number for Toll Restriction and Maximum (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
Digit Analysis to each trunk route. (2) 00-04: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 0-4

CM81 Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern No. with • Y=01-13 Toll Restriction Pattern No. 01-13
eight kinds of Trunk Restriction Classes as- (1) 1-8: Trunk Restriction Class
signed by CM12 Y=01. Toll Restriction Pat- (2) 0: Restricted
terns 00-15 are preassigned as shown below. If 3: Allowed
a new
Restriction Pattern is required, change the data
for Restriction Patterns 01-13 (00, 14 and 15
are fixed).

TRUNK 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
RESTRICTION
CLASS TOLL RESTRICTION PATTERN NUMBER ON EACH TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

1 RCA 3 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 0

2 RCB 3 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 0

3 RCC 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

4 RCD 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

5 RCE 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

6 RCF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

7 RCG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

8 RCH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

0: Restricted
3: Allowed

CM85 Specify the maximum number of sending dig- • Y=0-4 Area Code Development Pattern
its to be dialed during an outgoing call. The No. 0-4 assigned by CM35 Y=076
maximum number of sending digits, including (1) X-X...X: Area Code dialed, Maximum 8
the area codes, should be assigned to each area digits
code. (2) 01-24 : 1 digit-24 digits
25-79 : 25-79 digits

1-219
 CODE RESTRICTION

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign a Trunk Restriction Pattern number • Y=5000-5255 TR Pattern No.

assigned by CM81 to the Area Code Develop- (1) 000
ment Pattern number assigned by CM35 (2) 00-15 : Trunk Restriction Pattern No. 00-
Y=076. 15

If the Toll Restriction Pattern for the same area

code is changed according to the Tenant, Date,
and Time, assign the required patterns (Tenant,
Date, and Time) to the area code.

TRUNK RESTRICTION
PATTERN 00-15

1000
TIME -1015
PATTERN TENANT
2000 PATTERN
-2007 0000
AREA
-0255
CODE 4000
-4004 ROUTE
PATTERN

3000
-3003
DATE 5000
PATTERN -5255
TR
PATTERN

1-220
 CODE RESTRICTION

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A To add a Tenant Pattern:

STEP1: Assign the area code to be restrict- • Y=4000-4004 Area Code Development
ed and a Tenant Pattern number to Pattern No. 0-4
the Area Code Development (1) Area Code (Maximum 8 digits)
Pattern number assigned by CM35 (2) 1000-1015: Tenant Pattern No. 00-15
Y=076.

STEP2: Assign a Tenant number and the • Y=1000-1015 Tenant Pattern No. 00-15
Route Pattern number to the (1) 00-63: Tenant No. 00-63
Tenant Pattern number assigned by (2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255
Step1.

STEP3: Assign a TR Pattern number to the • Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-255
Route Pattern number assigned by (1) 1
Step 2. (2) XXX 00
XXX: 000-255: TR Pattern No.

STEP4: Assign a Trunk Restriction Pattern • Y=5000-5255 TR Pattern No.

number assigned by CM81 to the (1) 000
TR Pattern number assigned by (2) 00-15 : Trunk Restriction Pattern No. 00-
Step 3. 15

To add a Time and Date Pattern:

STEP1: Assign the area code to be restrict- • Y=4000-4004

ed and a Date Pattern number to (1) Area Code (Maximum 8 digits)
the Area Code Development (2) 3000-3003: Date Pattern No. 0-3
Pattern number assigned by CM35
Y=076.

STEP2: Assign a date and Time Pattern No. • Y=3000-3003 Date Pattern No. 0-3
0-7 to the Date Pattern number (1) 0-6 (Date)
assigned by Step 1. 0: Sunday
1: Monday
Set the data for all dates, one by 2: Tuesday
one, for which Toll Restriction is to 3: Wednesday
be applied. 4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
(2) 2000-2007: Time Pattern No. 0-7

1-221
 CODE RESTRICTION

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A STEP3: Assign the starting time for the Toll • Y=2000-2007 Time Pattern No. 0-7
Restriction and Route Pattern (1) HHMM (Time to Change)
number to the Time Pattern HH : 00-23: Hours
number assigned by Step 2. MM: 00/30: Minutes
Set the Starting Time as shown (2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255
below. If Tenant Pattern is required, set 1000-1015
(Tenant Pattern No. 00-15).
NOTE: Two times must be set. The first to
start Toll Restriction and the second
to stop it (or change it back).

STEP4: Assign the TR Pattern number to • Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-255
the Route Pattern number assigned (1) 1
by Step 3. (2) XXX 00
XXX: 000-255: TR Pattern No.

STEP5: Assign the Toll Restriction • Y=5000-5255 TR Pattern No. 000-255

Pattern number assigned by CM81 (1) 000
to the TR Pattern number assigned (2) 00-15 : Toll Restriction Pattern No. 00-15
by Step 4.

END

1-222
 CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY)

CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY)

PROGRAMMING

To provide a conference by calling another party as the third party of the conference:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with three-party (1) 101

conference. (2) 1 : Three Party Conference among
stations

(1) 102
(2) 0: As per CM08>101

(1) 103
(2) 0: As per CM08>104

(1) 104
(2) 1 : Three Party Conference among
stations and trunk call

Provide the system with a four-party (1) 246

conference. (2) 1 : Four Party Conference

NOTE: This feature can only be activated

from a Multiline Terminal.

END

1-223
 CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY)

To provide a conference by adding a held call as the third party of the conference:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class B for Confer- • Y=02

ence leader. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15 Allow Privacy Release in Service Restriction • Y=063 Privacy Release

Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM65 Allow adding the held call on Multiline Termi- • Y=41

nal as a third party of the conference. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0: Allow

END

1-224
 CONFERENCE (16 PARTY)

CONFERENCE (16 PARTY)

NOTE: This feature is not available because PVA blade is not available any more.

PROGRAMMING

To provide Meet-Me Conference (16-Party) with PVA blade, do the following programming.
(1) PVA Port Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the PVA • Y=0

blade. (1) XX YY
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 71: Conference blade (PVA blade)

CM10 Assign the station number for the Conference • Y=00

trunk (PVA blade) to the associated Physical (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Port Number. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
(2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Station No.

END

1-225
 CONFERENCE (16 PARTY)

(2) Station Hunting Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number for (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
Conference Pilot Station to the required Virtual (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
Port number.

CME5 Set or cancel make-busy to stations. • Y=0

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
(2) 0: Make-busy set

CM18 To set up each Station Hunting group, assign • Y=0

station numbers, one by one, as shown below. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be includ-
ed in Station Hunting
1st Operation (1) Station A Group
(2) Station B (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. to
2nd Operation (1) Station B be included in the Same
(2) Station C Hunting Group

Assign the pilot station to required station • Y=1

number within the Hunting group. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
For the member stations, set the data to “0”. (2) 0 : Member Station
1 : Pilot Station
NOTE 1: Station number within a same PVA
blade must be assigned as the sta-
tion to be included in one Hunting
Group because the conference is
available only for station within a
same PVA blade.

NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations

that can be included in one Station
Hunting group is 16 including the
Pilot Station.

END

1-226
 CONFERENCE (16 PARTY)

(3) Network Data Assignment for PVA Blade

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMEE Assign the IP Address for the Conference • Y=1

blade (PVA). (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: The second data must be entered (2) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:
including the periods (.). 0.0.0.1-255.255.255.254:
IP Address (Maximum 15digits)
NONE : 192.168.0.71

Assign the Subnet Mask for the Conference • Y=2

blade (PVA). (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: The second data must be entered (2) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:
including the periods (.). 255.0.0.0-255.255.255.252:
Subnet Mask (Maximum 15 digits)
NONE : 255.255.255.0

Assign the Default Gateway Address for the • Y=3

Conference blade (PVA). (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: The second data must be entered (2) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:
including the periods (.). 0.0.0.1-255.255.255.254:
Default Gateway Address (Maximum 15
digits)
NONE : 0.0.0.0

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

PVA blade

1-227
 CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

PROGRAMMING

To provide Group Call or Meet-Me Conference (32-Party) built-in on CPU, do the following program-
ming.

(1) Group Call/Sequential Call-up/Meet-Me Conference Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM04 Specify the Conference trunk partition. • Y=01

(1) 11
(2) 0 : Four 8-Party Conference groups
(8 + 8 + 8 + 8)
2 : Two 16-Party Conference groups
(16 + 16)
3 : One 32-Party Conference group (32)

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to a station. • Y=02

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Conference (built-in on CPU) in Ser- • Y=223

vice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow
NOTE: This data is effective for the station
of Conference participants from
own office. The station of Confer-
ence participants from the different
offices via CCIS/IPT (P2P CCIS) is
allowed to participate in Confer-
ence regardless of this data.

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number for (1) 0000-9999: Virtual Port No.
Conference Pilot station to the required Virtual (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
Port number.

1-228
 CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Specify the type of Pilot Station number. • Y=69

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No.
(2) 0 : Group Call
1 : Meet-Me Conference
2 : Sequential Call-up
3 : Ordinary Station (Not Pilot Station)

Assign the Conference group number for Con- • Y=70

ference Pilot Station number. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Conference group No.
NONE : No data

CM77 Specify the desired conference name for the • Y=0 By Character Code
pilot station number by CM77 Y=0/1/5/D/E. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No.
(2) Character Code 20-7F
(Maximum 32 digits)
See APPENDIX A: Character Code
Table. Page A-2

• Y=1 By Character using PCPro

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No.
(2) A-Z, 0-9: Character
(Maximum 16 characters)

• Y=5 By Character Code

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No.
(2) Character Code 00-FE: Maximum 32 digits
(for Russian)
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table
for Russian. Page A-3

• Y=D By Character using PCPro (Simpli-

fied Chinese)
• Y=E By Character using PCPro (Tradition-
al Chinese)
(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) Character: Maximum 16 characters
NONE : No data

CM41 Specify the Conference (built-in on CPU) • Y=0

forced release timer. (1) 141
(2) 01-24: 1-24 hours (1 hour increment)
If no data is set, the default setting is 7 hours.

1-229
 CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM45 Make busy the (Three/Four Party-) Conference • Y=6

Trunk (CFT) on the CPU card in service. (1) 00-15: CPU built-in CFT Circuit No.
(2) 0: Make busy
NOTE: Set this command when CPU built-
in CFT is secured for Conference.

END

(2) Assignment of Group Call by Pilot Number Dialing

(a) When The Called Terminal is a Station/Trunk

This programming should be set after setting the program “(1) Group Call/Sequential Call-up/
Meet-Me Conference Assignment”.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM57 Assign the station numbers which are to be in- • Y=31

cluded in the Conference group, their Confer- (1) XX YY
ence group numbers and Conference numbers XX: 00-15: Conference Group No.
within the group. ZZ : 00-30: Conference number within the
group
NOTE 1: If you assign the outgoing trunk, you (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
set Call Forwarding-All Calls-Out- NONE : No data
side to the Virtual Line station num-
ber assigned by CM11.

NOTE 2: Maximum of 32 stations per Group

Call can be assigned.

CM41 Specify the timing of Group Call Conference- • Y=0

No Answer. (1) 140
(2) 01-99: 4-396 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 36 seconds.

END

1-230
 CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

(b) Only when The Called Terminal is a Trunk

This programming should be set after setting the program “(a) When The Called Terminal is a
Station/Trunk”.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the PVA • Y=0

blade. (1) XX YY
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 20: LC blade (PVA)

CM10 Assign the station number for outgoing trunk • Y=00

call to the associated Physical Port Number. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 1: The circuit number of a station for YY: 01-18: Slot No.
outgoing call is recommended to set ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
17-32. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. for the out-
going trunk call
NOTE 2: Blade reset is not required when
adding a station for a outgoing call.

CM13 Specify the kind of station. • Y=64

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. for the out-
going trunk call
(2) 0 : Station for outgoing trunk call
1 : Ordinary Station (Not Station for the
outgoing trunk call)

CM57 Assign the pilot station number which is to be • Y=32

included in the Group Call. (1) 00-15: Conference Group No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No.
NONE : No data

CM18 To provide the Station Hunting group of the • Y=0

Group Call Pilot Stations, assign station num- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Group Call Pilot Station
bers, one by one, as shown below. No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Group Call Station No.
1st Operation (1) Station A NONE : No data
(2) Station B
2nd Operation (1) Station B
(2) Station C

1-231
 CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM18 Assign the Pilot Station to required station • Y=1

number within the Station Hunting group. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Group Call Pilot Station
No.
(2) 0 : Member station
1 : Pilot station

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number for Call (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
Forwarding-All Calls-Outside. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

CME6 Assign the destination number for Call For- • Y=00

warding-All Calls-Outside to the Virtual Line (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
station number assigned by CM11. assigned by CM11
(2) Destination No.: X-XXXX + , + YY...Y
X-XXXX: Outgoing Trunk/LCR Group
Access Code (1-4 digits)
, : Separate Mark
YY...Y : Called No. (Maximum 26 dig-
its)

END

(3) Assignment of SST/Restriction of Additional Participants to Conference

This programming should be set after setting the program “(1) Group Call/Meet-Me Conference
Assignment”.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify whether Service Set Tone is sent to (1) 728

participants when a new participant attends the (2) 0 : Not sent
Conference. 1 : To send

CM90 Assign Restriction of additional participants to • Y=00

Conference keys to the Multiline Terminals, if (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
required. (2) F0B54: Restriction of additional partici-
pants to Conference Set/Cancel

END

1-232
 CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

(4) Assignment of Meet-Me conference with password protection

This programming should be set after setting the program “(1) Group Call/Sequential Call-up/Meet-
Me Conference Assignment”.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM04 Allow the Conference (32 Party) with pass- • Y=04

word protection. (1) 00-15: Conference group No.
(2) 0: With password protection
NOTE: The conference group assigned this
data to “0” cannot be used for
Group Call Conference/Meet-Me
conference without password pro-
tection.

CM13 Assign the Pilot Station of Conference (32 Par- • Y=73

ty) with password protection. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Pilot Station
NOTE 1: This data is effective only to the pilot 1 : Ordinary station
station for the Conference group as-
signed by CM04 Y=04: 0 (with pass-
word protection).

NOTE 2: The type of pilot station number for

Conference assigned by CM12
Y=69 becomes ineffective when the
pilot station number is set by this
data.

CM12 Assign the Conference group number for Con- • Y=70

ference Pilot Station number. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No.
(2) 01-15 : Conference group No.
NOTE: Do not overlap the conference group NONE : No data
numbers among Group Call, Meet-
Me Conference, Sequential Call-up.

END

1-233
 CONFERENCE (32 PARTY)

(5) Conference Connection by Call Transfer

This programming should be set after setting the program Meet-Me Conference Assignment in “(1)
Group Call/Sequential Call-up/Meet-Me Conference Assignment”.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each sta- • Y=02

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow the Conference (32 Party) by Call • Y=228

Transfer. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
NOTE 1: Set this data for the station number (2) 1 : Allow
of Call Transfer operator.

NOTE 2: This data is effective for the station

of Call Transfer operator from own
office. The station of Conference
participants from the different offic-
es via CCIS/IPT (P2P CCIS) is al-
lowed to participate in Conference
regardless of this data.

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Built-in Conference Trunk (CFT) on CPU blade

1-234
 CONFERENCE (WEB SCHEDULE)

CONFERENCE (WEB SCHEDULE)

[9300V3 software required]

NOTE: This feature is not available because RGA blade is not available any more.

PROGRAMMING

To provide Meet-Me Conference (32-Party) with RGA blade, do the following programming.
(1) RGA Port Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the RGA • Y=0

blade. (1) XX YY
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 73: Conference blade (RGA blade)

CM10 Assign the station number for the Conference • Y=00

trunk (RGA blade) to the associated Physical (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Port Number. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: Set the Circuit No. continuously ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
from the Circuit No. 01 in unit of 8 (2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Station No.
stations.

END

1-235
 CONFERENCE (WEB SCHEDULE)

(2) Station Hunting Assignment

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number for (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
Conference Pilot Station to the required Virtual (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
Port number.

CME5 Set or cancel make-busy to stations. • Y=0

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
(2) 0: Make-busy set

CM18 To set up each Station Hunting group, assign • Y=0

station numbers, one by one, as shown below. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be includ-
ed in Station Hunting
1st Operation (1) Station A Group
(2) Station B (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. to
2nd Operation (1) Station B be included in the Same
(2) Station C Hunting Group

Assign the pilot station to required station • Y=1

number within the Hunting group. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
For the member stations, set the data to “0”. (2) 0 : Member Station
1 : Pilot Station
NOTE 1: Station number within a same RGA
blade must be assigned as the sta-
tion to be included in one Hunting
Group because the conference is
available only for station within a
same RGA blade.

NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations

that can be included in one Station
Hunting group is 32 including the
Pilot Station.

END

1-236
 CONFERENCE (WEB SCHEDULE)

(3) Network Data Assignment for RGA Blade

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMEE Assign the IP Address for the Conference • Y=1

blade (RGA). (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: The second data must be entered (2) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:
including the periods (.). 0.0.0.1-255.255.255.254:
IP Address (Maximum 15digits)
NONE : 192.168.1.72

Assign the Subnet Mask for the Conference • Y=2

blade (RGA). (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: The second data must be entered (2) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:
including the periods (.). 255.0.0.0-255.255.255.252:
Subnet Mask (Maximum 15 digits)
NONE : 255.255.255.0

Assign the Default Gateway Address for the • Y=3

Conference blade (RGA). (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: The second data must be entered (2) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:
including the periods (.). 0.0.0.1-255.255.255.254:
Default Gateway Address (Maximum 15
digits)
NONE : 0.0.0.0

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

RGA blade

1-237
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

PROGRAMMING

To provide Consecutive Station Speed Dialing from Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Station Speed Dialing in the Service Re- • Y=007

striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign access codes for Station Speed • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Dialing Origination, Entry and Cancel, (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
respectively. (2) A064: Origination
A065: Entry
A066: Cancel

CM08 Specify whether to provide Toll Restriction for (1) 035

an outgoing call by Station Speed Dialing. (2) 0 : Not provided
1 : Provided

Specify whether to set “#” dialing as paused (1) 168

data (1.5 seconds) or dialed digit when Multi- (2) 0 : Paused data (1.5 seconds)
line Terminal dials “#” in the setting of the Sta- 1 : Dialed digit
tion Speed Dialing feature.

Specify “*” dialing is set as programmable (1) 171

pause by CM41 Y=0>38 or dialed digit when (2) 0 : Programmable pause by CM41
Multiline Terminal dials “*” in the setting of Y=0>38
the Station Speed Dialing feature. 1 : Dialed digit

1-238
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 Specify the usage of Speed Dialing memory • Y=0

for each 1000-Slot Memory Block. (1) 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
(2) 0 : System Speed Dialing (for indi-
vidual tenants)
1 : System Speed Dialing (for all
tenants) (Up to 10 blocks)
NONE : Station Speed Dialing/One-
touch Memory

Allocate a memory area for Station Speed Di- • Y=1

aling to each station when using Consecutive (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Speed Dialing. (2) WW XX YYY Z
WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block
No.
XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Block No.
YYY : 001-100: Number of 10-Slot
Memory Blocks
Z : Facility for programming for the
dialed No. from the station:
0 : Allowed
1 : Not allowed
NONE : Station Speed Dialing/One-
touch Memory

1-239
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 • The relation among memory areas

The memory area for storing one called number of Speed Dialing is called a “Memory Parcel”. An
assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot Mem-
ory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.
10-Slot 1000-Slot
Memory Parcel Memory Block Memory Block

0 00 00
System Speed Dialing
1 01

~
(8 digits)
19

20
Station Speed Dialing
9 99

~
System Speed Dialing
99 (2-4 digits)
One-Touch Keys
Malicious Call List

• How to assign a 10-Slot Memory Start Block No.

Example: If the desired number of Speed Dialing numbers is 10 for Station No. 300, 20 for Station
No. 301, 30 for Station No. 302 and 10 for Station No. 303, respectively, assign the mem-
ory areas as below.

1000-Slot Memory 10-Slot Memory Start Number of 10-Slot

Station No. Block No. Block No. Memory Block
300 00 00 1
301 00 01 2
302 00 03 3
303 00 06 1

1-240
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 • About abbreviated codes

The abbreviated codes for this feature are automatically determined by assigning this command, on
a station basis.
If the number of Memory Parcels per station does not exceed 10, then Abbreviated Code=0-9.
If the number of Memory Parcels per station exceeds 10, then Abbreviated Code=00-99.
The following figure shows the relation between Abbreviated Codes and Memory Parcels.

In the case of 10 Memory Parcels In the case of 20 Memory Parcels

Memory Memory
Parcel Parcel
Number Number
(Abbreviated (Abbreviated
Code) Code)

0 0 0 00

1 1 10-Slot 1 01
Memory
Block
2 2

~
10-Slot 3 3 9 09
Memory
Block
4 4 0 10

5 5 10-Slot 1 11
Memory
Block
~

~
~

9 9 9 ~19

1-241
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM74 Assign the number to be dialed to each Memo- • Y=0

ry Slot number. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
NOTE: The numbers to be called are usual- YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
ly set from individual stations by Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
their station users. (2) Called Party No.:
Trunk Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) +
, + Called Party No. (Maximum 26 dig-
its)
To set a pause into the Called Party No., en-
ter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D”
(Programmable Pause specified by CM41
Y=0>38) after desired digits.
NONE : No data

Assign the Called Party Name to be displayed • Y=1

on Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name by entering
with character codes (Maximum
32 digits, 16 characters)
NONE : No data
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2

• Y=2
(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name by entering
with characters from PCPro/
CAT (Maximum 16 characters)
NONE : No data

1-242
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

E DESCRIPTION DATA

CM74 Assign a Called Party Name to be displayed on • Y=4

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name in Russian
(Maximum 16 characters) by en-
tering with Russian character
codes.
See APPENDIX A: Character
Code Table for Russian.
Page A-3
NONE : No data

• Y=6
(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name in Simplified
Chinese (Maximum 8 two-byte
characters)
NONE : No data

• Y=7
(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name in Tradition-
al Chinese (Maximum 8 two-
byte characters)
NONE : No data

CM90 Assign Station Speed Dialing keys on each • Y=00

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F11XX
XX: 00-99: Station Speed Dialing 00-99

NOTE: For detail of Multiline Terminal

key layout set by CM12 Y=24, re-
fer to the Command Manual.

END

1-243
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

To provide Consecutive Station Speed Dialing from Multiline Terminal with One Touch keys:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Station Speed Dialing in the Service Re- • Y=007

striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM08 Specify whether to provide Toll Restriction for (1) 035

an outgoing call by Station Speed Dialing. (2) 0 : Not provided
1 : Provided

Specify whether to set “#” dialing as paused (1) 168

data (1.5 seconds) or dialed digit when the (2) 0 : Paused data (1.5 seconds)
Multiline Terminal dials “#” in the setting of 1 : Dialed digit
the Station Speed Dialing feature.

Specify whether to set “*” dialing as program- (1) 171

mable pause by CM41 Y=0>38 or dialed digit (2) 0 : Programmable pause by CM41
when Multiline Terminal dials “*” in the set- Y=0>38
ting of the Station Speed Dialing feature. 1 : Dialed digit

Send additional DTMF signals when called (1) 427

station answers, if assigning station number or (2) 0 : To send
outside number and additional DTMF signals 1 : Not sent
to One-Touch key on Multiline Terminal.

When Multiline Terminal station dials “*#” (1) 448

during setting of One-Touch keys. (2) 0 : “*#” is set as dialed digit
1 : “*#” is set as a delimiter mark between
dialed number and DTMF signal

1-244
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM94 Allocate the memory area for Station Speed (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
Dialing to each station when using Consecu- (2) WW XX YYY Z
tive Speed Dialing for One Touch Keys. WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory
Block No.
XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Block No.
YYY : 001-010: Number of 10-Slot
Memory Blocks
Z : 0/1: Facility for programming
the dialed number from the sta-
tion Effective/Ineffective
NONE : No data

NOTE: When Consecutive Speed Dialing is provided using the One Touch Keys, the same memory
area must be assigned by CM73 and CM94.

• The relation among memory areas

The memory area for storing one called number of Speed Dialing is called a “Memory Parcel”. An
assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot Mem-
ory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.
10-Slot 1000-Slot
Memory Parcel Memory Block Memory Block

0 00 00
System Speed Dialing
1 01
~

(8 digits)
19

20
Station Speed Dialing
9 99
~

System Speed Dialing

99 (2-4 digits)
One-Touch Keys
Malicious Call List
• How to assign a 10-Slot Memory Start Block No.
Example: If the desired number of Speed Dialing numbers is 10 for Station No. 300, 20 for Station
No. 301, 30 for Station No. 302 and 10 for Station No. 303, respectively, assign the mem-
ory areas as below.

1000-Slot Memory 10-Slot Memory Start Number of 10-Slot

Station No. Block No. Block No. Memory Block
300 00 00 1
301 00 01 2
302 00 03 3
303 00 06 1

END

1-245
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

To provide Consecutive System Speed Dialing:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow System Speed Dialing in the Service • Y=006 System Speed Dialing
Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for System Speed • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Dialing. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A067: System Speed Dialing

CM73 Specify System Speed Dialing for the usage of • Y=0

Speed Dialing memory for each 1000-Slot (1) 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
Memory Block. (2) 0 : System Speed Dialing (for indi-
vidual tenants)
1 : System Speed Dialing (for all
tenants) (Up to 10 blocks)
NONE : Station Speed Dialing/One-
touch Memory
Allocate a memory area for System Speed Di- • Y=2
aling (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) WW XX YYYY Z
NOTE: Allocate a tenant-based memory WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory
area to each 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
Block No. assigned as System Speed XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Dialing (for individual tenants) by Block No.
CM73 Y=0. YYYY : 0001-1000: Number of 10-
Slot Memory Blocks
Z : 0: To allocate memory area
only for individual tenants
1: To allocate both memory
areas for individual tenants
and for all tenants
FFFFFFFFF: To allocate only common
memory area for all tenants.
NONE : No data
A

1-246
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM74 Assign a storing Called Party Number for each • Y=0

Memory Slot number. (1) XX YY Z
XX : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) Called Party No.:
Trunk Access Code (Maximum 1-4 digits)
+ , + Called Party No. (Maximum 26 dig-
its) To set a pause into the Storing Called
Party No., enter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 sec-
onds) or “D” (Programmable Pause speci-
fied by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.
NONE : No data

Assign a Called Party Name to be displayed on • Y=1

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) XX YY Z
XX : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name (Maximum
16 characters) by entering with
character codes. See APPEN-
DIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2
NONE : No data

• Y=2
(1) XX YY Z
XX : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name (MAX. 16
characters) by entering from
PCPro/CAT.
NONE : No data

1-247
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM74 Assign a Called Party Name to be displayed on • Y=4

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) XX YY Z
XX : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : C0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name in Russian
(Maximum 16 characters) by
entering with Russian character
codes. See APPENDIX A:
Character Code Table for
Russian. Page A-3
NONE : No data

• Y=6 [For Asia]

(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name in Simplified
Chinese (Maximum 8 two-byte
characters)
NONE : No data

• Y=7 [For Asia]

(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX : Called Party Name in Tradition-
al Chinese (Maximum 8 two-
byte characters)
NONE : No data

CM08 Specify the System Speed Dialing security. (1) 043

(Stored number displays on Multiline Terminal (2) 0 : Not displayed
for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing.) 1 : Display

Specify Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by (1) 044

System Speed Dialing. (2) 0 : Not provided
1 : Provided

END

1-248
 CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING

To provide Consecutive Speed Dialing when making ISDN call:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify whether to provide the Consecutive (1) 405

Speed Dialing when making ISDN call. (2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available

END

1-249
 CONSULTATION HOLD

CONSULTATION HOLD
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Select the ringing pattern on station calls with (1) 137
a trunk line placed in Consultation Hold. (2) 0 : Change from Internal Ringing
(CM08>138/CM04 Y=00>05) to
External Ringing (CM35 Y=033)
when transferring a call
1 : External Ringing (CM35 Y=033)

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to each • Y=07

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Allow the Switch Hook Flash capability in • Y=088, 089 Switch Hook Flash on Internal
Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Call
Y=07. • Y=090, 091 Switch Hook Flash on External
Call
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-
signed by CM12 Y=07
(2) 1 : Available (Special Dial Tone Connec-
tion)

END

To make a three party conference on Consultation Hold, do the programming of CONFERENCE (THREE/
FOUR PARTY). Page 1-223

1-250
 CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT)

CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class B for CAT to • Y=02

the required Multiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15 Allow change of mode for CAT in Service • Y=056

Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CME7 Specify the command codes accessible to each • Y=00: Password Level 0-6
Password Level. • Y=01: Password Level 1-6
• Y=02: Password Level 2-6
• Y=03: Password Level 3-6
• Y=04: Password Level 4-6
• Y=05: Password Level 5-6
• Y=06: Password Level 6
• Y=10: Password Level 0
• Y=11: Password Level 1
• Y=12: Password Level 2
• Y=13: Password Level 3
• Y=14: Password Level 4
• Y=15: Password Level 5
• Y=16: Password Level 6
(1) 00-FB: Command Code exclusive of 03,
E7, E9
(2) 0 : Allowed
1 : Restricted

CME9 Allow the setting/changing of the password. (1) 8

(2) 0 : Allowed

1-251
 CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CME9 Assign a password to each Password Level. (1) 0-7: Password Level 0-7
(2) X-X...X : Maximum 8 digits Password
CCC : Password clear
NONE : No data

A password for Password Level 7 should be

assigned in advance because of providing the
password service by Function No. 9 of CME9.
The following passwords are not available.
“CCCCCCCC”
“FFFFFFFF”

The setting/changing of the password is avail-

able only when the second data of CME9>8 is
set to “0 (Allowed)”.
If CME9>8 is set to “1 (Restricted)”, “DATA
ERROR” is displayed when you set/change the
password.

Provide the system with Password Service. (1) 9: Password Service

After setting this data, access to system (2) 0: Provided
programming will be available with password
entry only.

CM08 Specify the key assignment on CAT mode. (1) 911

(2) 0 : Old layout
NOTE 1: Refer to “Command Manual” about 1 : Standard layout
the key assignment on CAT mode.

NOTE 2: When using DT300/DT400/DT700/

DT800 Series DESI-less, DT900 Se-
ries (Self-Labeling) or DT750, CAT
key assignment can be performed
only on Standard layout.

END

1-252
 CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT)

NOTE 1: To use the CAT after clearing all system data, perform the following operations on the system.
1. Plug a DLC blade into Slot 01 accommodated in Unit01 (for Multiline Terminal).
2. Connect the CAT (Multiline Terminal) to Physical Port No. 010101 at the MDF or Virtual
Port No. 0000.
3. Set SENSE switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01 to “A”.
4. Press RESET switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01.
5. Check the LED status.
• RUN LED lights and SYSD LED flashes while loading the standard system data.
• RUN LED and SYSD LED go off and S2 LED lights when the standard system data is load-
ed normally.
• RUN LED and SYSD LED go off and ALM LED lights if the loading of the standard system
data fails.
6. Set SENSE switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01 to “1”.
7. Press RESET switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01.
CPU will reset automatically after SENSE switch is set to “1”.
NOTE 2: If Password Service is activated, enter the predetermined password (assigned by CME9>0-7)
by CM03 before programming from a CAT.
ST + 03 + DE + Password Level number (0-7) + DE + Password + EXE
– “OK” will be displayed, if accepted.
– “DATA ERROR” will be displayed if the password is incorrect.

1-253
 DATA LINE SECURITY

DATA LINE SECURITY

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Assign the function of Analog Data station • Y=07

(Single Line Station with FAX or MODEM) to (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
the required stations. (2) 0: Data station

NOTE: When 0 is specified to the second data, the ringing interval of the station shall be a ringing
signal for FAX as assigned by CM04 Y=00>09 (if no data is set, it follows the default set-
ting, i.e. As per CM04 Y=00>05).

END

1-254
 DELAYED HOTLINE

DELAYED HOTLINE
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign a Delayed Hotline to the required sta- • Y=03

tions. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 09: Delayed Hotline

CM41 Specify the Delayed Hotline activation timer • Y=0

(i.e. Duration from off-hook to automatic call (1) 119
origination). (2) 01-30: 1-30 seconds
(1 second increment)
If no data is set, the default setting is 10 seconds.

CM52 Define the Delayed Hotline pairs. • Y=00-99 Delayed Hotline Pair No.
(1) 0: Calling Side
NOTE 1: When assigning a station number to (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
a calling side, the second data of
CM12 Y=03 must be set to “04”. (1) 1: Called Side
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000-E007 : DESKCON No.
CXX: : Trunk outgoing call
XX: Abbreviated Code
exclusively for Delayed
Hotline-Outside call as-
signed by CM71>65

NOTE 2: Do not assign station number

with first digit “0”.

1-255
 DELAYED HOTLINE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM71 Allocate the memory area for the Delayed Ho- (1) 65: For Delayed Hotline-Outside
tline-Outside call. For example, to assign the (2) XXX YYY
10 Delayed Hotline-Outside calls into No. 100 XXX: 000-299: Starting Memory Slot No.
through No. 109 Memory Slots, 2nd data is in blocks
“100010”. Abbreviated Codes are automati- YYY: 001-300: Number of Memory Slots
cally assigned as shown below: to be assigned in blocks

Abbreviated Code
Memory Slot 100 00

Memory Slot 109 09

CM72 Set the Called Party number to each Memory • Y=0

Slot number for Delayed Hotline. (1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXXX + , + YY...Y: Called Party No.
XXXX : Access Code (Maximum 4 dig-
its)
, : Separator Mark
YY...Y : Called Party No. (Maximum 26
digits)
NONE : No data

• Y=1
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXX...X: Called Party Name Character
Code (Maximum 32 digits: 16
characters)
NONE : No data
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2

• Y=2
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXX...X: Called Party Name Character by
PCPro/CAT (Maximum 16 char-
acters)
NONE : No data

1-256
 DELAYED HOTLINE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM72 Set the Called Party number to each Memory • Y=4

Slot number for Delayed Hotline. (1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Russian
(Maximum 16 characters) by en-
tering with Russian character
codes. See APPENDIX A: Char-
acter Code Table for Russian.
Page A-3
NONE : No data

• Y=5 [For Asia]

(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Simplified
Chinese (Maximum 8 two-byte
characters)
NONE : No data

• Y=6 [For Asia]

(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Tradition-
al Chinese (Maximum 8 two-
byte characters)
NONE : No data

END

1-257
 DELAYED RINGING

DELAYED RINGING
PROGRAMMING

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign the Delayed Ringing feature to each • Y=02

line key on a Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No. NOTE
(2) 0: Delayed Ringing
NOTE: The Delayed Ringing feature can be
assigned to the first 16 line/trunk
keys (Key 01-16)/24 line/trunk keys
(Key 01-24).

CM41 Specify the timing for Delayed Ringing. • Y=1

(1) 09
(2) 01-20: 2048-40960 ms.
(2048 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 10240 ms.

END

1-258
 DIAGNOSTICS

DIAGNOSTICS
PROGRAMMING

Refer to the System Maintenance Manual.

1-259
 DIAL BY NAME

DIAL BY NAME
PROGRAMMING

(1) Assignment for Soft Key

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Provide Soft Key feature to each Multiline Ter- • Y=22

minal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 1 : Available
Assign Soft Key Pattern number to each Mul- • Y=23
tiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0 : Pattern No. 0
1 : Pattern No. 1
2 : Pattern No. 2
3 : Pattern No. 3

1-260
 DIAL BY NAME

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM9A Assign the Dial By Name function to each Soft • Y=00-03 Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned
Key on idle status of the Multiline Terminal. by CM12 Y=23
(1) 00 bb
The LCD shows a maximum of 4 Soft Keys at 00: Status No. (Idle state) NOTE 5
a time. If assigning more than 4 Soft Keys on bb: 00-15: Soft Key No.
one status, it is necessary to assign Scroll key 00-03: Indicated on 1st display
at every 4 keys (on 1st through 4th display). 04-07: Indicated on 2nd display
08-11: Indicated on 3rd display
NOTE 1: Scroll key must be assigned as a key 12-15: Indicated on 4th display
for each active display. (2) F5002 : Scroll key to change Soft Key
Indication
NOTE 2: Help key is only available in Pattern F5014 : Dial By Name for System Speed
No. 3. Dialing
F5015 : Dial By Name for Station Speed
NOTE 3: For the Pattern No. 3, the reset Soft Dialing
Key data for Dial By Name are F5038 : Search in Dial By Name data for
assigned as follows: System Speed Dialing and Sta-
tion Speed Dialing
CM9A Y=03 NONE : No data
1st Data 2nd Data
0001 F5014
0002 F5015

NOTE 4: When no data is registered, “Search

in Dial By Name data for System
Speed Dialing and Station Speed Di-
aling” is assigned to Soft Key No. 01
of Soft Key Pattern No. 3.

NOTE 5: Pattern No. 3 is fixed.

NOTE 6: Dial By Name is available only

when the Multiline Terminal is in
idle state.

1-261
 DIAL BY NAME

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM9A Assign the Characters indicated on each status • Y=10-13 Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned
of the Multiline Terminal, corresponding to the by CM12 Y=23
Soft Key function assigned by CM9A (1) Same as CM9A Y=00-03
Y=00-03. For the Pattern No. 3, the reset Soft (2) XX...XX: Soft Key name indicated on
Key data for Dial By Name are assigned as fol- LCD (2-12 characters)
lows: NONE : No data
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
CM9A Y=13 Page A-2
1st Data 2nd Data
0001 SYS.
0002 STA.

NOTE: When no data is registered, “Dial By

Name” is assigned to Soft Key No.
01 of Soft Key Pattern No. 3.

CM08 Specify whether the system sends SPDT when (1) 519
entering the name/number for Dial by name. (2) 0 : Not sent
1 : To send

END

1-262
 DIAL BY NAME

(2) Assignment for the Memory Allocation and the Station Name
• When using Dial By Name for System Speed Dialing:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 Specify System Speed Dialing for each 1000 • Y=0

Slot memory Block of Speed Dialing memory. (1) 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
(2) 0 : System Speed Dialing (for indi-
vidual tenants)
1 : System Speed Dialing (for all
tenants) (Up to 10 blocks)
NONE : Station Speed Dialing/One-
touch Memory

Allocate a memory area for System Speed Di- • Y=2

aling (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) WW XX YYYY Z
NOTE: Allocate a tenant-based memory WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory
area to each 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
Block No. assigned as System Speed XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Dialing (for individual tenants) by Block No.
CM73 Y=0. YYYY : 0001-1000: Number of 10-
Slot Memory Blocks
Z : 0: To allocate memory area
only for individual tenants
1: To allocate both memory
areas for individual tenants
and for all tenants
FFFFFFFFF: To allocate only common
memory area for all tenants.
NONE : No data

1-263
 DIAL BY NAME

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM74 Assign a Called Party number to be stored for • Y=0

each Memory Slot number. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) Called Party No.:
Trunk Access Code (Maximum 1-4 digits)
+ , + Called Party No. (Maximum26 dig-
its)
To set a pause into the Called Party No., en-
ter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D”
(Programmable Pause specified by CM41
Y=0>38) after desired digits.
NONE : No data

Assign a Called Party Name for the Memory • Y=1

Slot number allocated by CM74 Y=0. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name (Maximum
16 characters) by entering with
character codes.
See APPENDIX A: Character
Code Table.
Page A-2
NONE : No data

• Y=2
(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name (MAX. 16
characters) by entering from PC-
Pro/CAT.
NONE : No data

1-264
 DIAL BY NAME

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM74 Assign a Called Party Name for the Memory • Y=4

Slot number allocated by CM74 Y=0. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Russian
(Maximum 16 characters) by en-
tering with Russian character
codes.
See APPENDIX A: Character
Code Table for Russian.
Page A-3
NONE : No data

• Y=6
(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Simplified
Chinese (Maximum 8 two-byte
characters)
NONE : No data

• Y=7
(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Tradition-
al Chinese (Maximum 8 two-
byte characters)
NONE : No data

END

1-265
 DIAL BY NAME

• When using Dial By Name for Station Speed Dialing, Multiline Terminal One Touch Keys:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 Specify Station Speed Dialing/One touch for • Y=0

each 1000 Slot memory Block of Speed Dial- (1) 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
ing memory. (2) 0 : System Speed Dialing (for indi-
vidual tenants)
1 : System Speed Dialing (for all
tenants) (Up to 10 blocks)
NONE : Station Speed Dialing/One-
touch Memory
Allocate a memory area for Station Speed Di- • Y=1
aling/One Touch Memory to each station when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
using Speed Dialing. (2) WW XX YYY Z
WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory
Block No.
XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Block No.
YYY : 001-100: Number of 10-Slot
Memory Blocks
Z : Availability of programming for
the dialed No. from the station:
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
NONE : No data

1-266
 DIAL BY NAME

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 • The relation among memory areas

The memory area for storing a called number for Speed Dialing is called a “Memory Parcel”. An as-
sembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block”, and one hundred 10-Slot Memory
Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.
10-Slot 1000-Slot
Memory Parcel Memory Block Memory Block

0 00 00
System Speed Dialing
1 01

~
(8 digits)
19

20
Station Speed Dialing
9 99

~
System Speed Dialing
99 (2-4 digits)
One-Touch Keys
Malicious Call List

• How to assign a 10-Slot Memory Start Block No.

Example: If the desired number of Speed Dialing numbers is 10 for Station No. 300, 20 for Station
No. 301, 30 for Station No. 302 and 10 for Station No. 303, respectively, assign the mem-
ory areas as below.

1000-Slot Memory 10-Slot Memory Start Number of 10-Slot

Station No. Block No. Block No. Memory Block
300 00 00 1
301 00 01 2
302 00 03 3
303 00 06 1

1-267
 DIAL BY NAME

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM94 Allocate the memory area for Station Speed (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
Dialing to each station when using Dial By (2) WW XX YYY Z
Name for Multiline Terminal One Touch Keys. WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory
The same memory area must be assigned on Block No.
CM73 and CM94. XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Block No.
YYY : 001-010: Number of 10-Slot
Memory Blocks
Z : 0/1: Facility for programming
the dialed number from the sta-
tion Effective/Ineffective
NONE : No data

NOTE: When Dial By Name is provided using the One Touch Keys, the same memory area must
be specified by CM73 and CM94.

CM74 Assign the number to be dialed to each Memo- • Y=0

ry Slot number. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
NOTE: The numbers to be called are usual- YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
ly set by the individual station user. Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) Called Party No.:
Trunk Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) +
, + Called Party No. (Maximum 26
digits)
To set a pause into the Called Party No., en-
ter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D”
(Programmable Pause specified by CM41
Y=0>38) after desired digits.
NONE : No data

1-268
 DIAL BY NAME

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM74 Assign the station name to be displayed on • Y=1

Multiline Terminal. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name by entering
with character codes (Maximum
32 digits, 16 characters)
NONE : No data
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2

• Y=2
(1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name by entering
with PCPro/CAT (Maximum 16
characters)
NONE : No data

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and Soft Key, and DLC blade

1-269
 DIAL CONVERSION

DIAL CONVERSION
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the type of telephone set to DTMF • Y=00

stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 2: DTMF Telephone set
NOTE: This data assignment is not required
for Multiline Terminal stations.

CM35 For a DP trunk, assign the type of signaling for • Y=001

Outgoing and Bothway trunk routes to DP. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
BLADE RESET (2) <Incoming> <Outgoing>
2: DP DP

Specify the DP Sender characteristics to match • Y=023 DP Inter-Digital Pause

the Central Office. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
BLADE RESET (2) 0 : 300 ms.
1 : 400 ms.
2 : 500 ms.
3 : 600 ms.
4 : 700 ms.
5 : 900 ms.
6 : 1100 ms.
7 : 800 ms.

NOTE: This command is available for LDT/ • Y=025 DP Make Ratio NOTE
ODT. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 39 %
1 : 33 %

For a DTMF trunk, assign the type of signaling • Y=001

for Outgoing and Bothway trunk routes to (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
DTMF. (2) <Incoming> <Outgoing>
BLADE RESET 7 : DP/DTMF DTMF

1-270
 DIAL CONVERSION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the DTMF Sender characteristics to • Y=024 DTMF Inter-Digital Pause
match the Central Office. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 32 ms.
1 : 64 ms.
2 : 80 ms.
3 : 96 ms.
4 : 160 ms.
5 : 192 ms.
6 : 240 ms.
7 : 128 ms.

• Y=026 DTMF Signal Width

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 64 ms.
1 : 128 ms.

• Y=046 DP/DTMF Release Timing

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 2 seconds
1 : 4 seconds
2 : 6 seconds
3 : 8 seconds
4 : 12 seconds
5 : 14 seconds
6 : 16 seconds
7 : 10 seconds

CM08 Assign whether “*” or “#” button from a (1) 050: * button is used as Switch Hook Flash
DTMF Telephone is used as a Switch Hook (2) 0 : Effective
Flash while hearing Busy Tone. 1 : Ineffective

(1) 051: # button is used as Switch Hook Flash

(2) 0 : Effective
1 : Ineffective

END

1-271
 DIAL MASK FOR TRUNK CALL

DIAL MASK FOR TRUNK CALL

To provide the Dial Mask on LCD during talk with trunk:

PROGGRAMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to the re- • Y=07

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Allow the Dial Mask for Trunk Call in service • Y=289
Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C assigned
by CM12 Y=07
NOTE: Set the second data of both CM15 (2) 0: Allow
Y=289 and CM35 Y=314 to “0” to
be effective for Dial Mask on LCD.

CM35 Allow the Dial Mask for Trunk Call for the • Y=314
trunk route number. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Allow
NOTE: Set the second data of both CM15
Y=289 and CM35 Y=314 to “0” to
be effective for Dial Mask on LCD.

END

1-272
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE
SYSTEM OUTLINE

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

SYSTEM OUTLINE
The PBX is equipped with Direct Digital Interface which can be interfaced with a Tie Line or Public Net-
work of
• 24-channel PCM Digital Line (1.544 MHz)
• 30-channel PCM Digital Line (2.048 MHz)
[Brazil]
[Australia/EMEA/Asia/Latin America]

To add a Direct Digital Interface to the system, it is necessary to install a DTI (Digital Trunk Interface)
blade (GCD-PRTA). Figure below shows the system outline of the Direct Digital Interface of the PBX.

System Outline of Direct Digital Interface

TDSW
24/30 CH 24/30 CHANNEL
PCM DIGITAL LINE
DTI DTI
DIGITAL
PBX

CLOCK SIGNAL

PLO: PHASE LOCKED

OSCILLATOR
DTI : 24/30 CHANNEL
CPU DIGITAL TRUNK CPU
(PLO) INTERFACE (PLO)

1-273
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

PROGRAMMING

(1) 24DTI Assignment

(a) Tie Line Interface (E&M Tie Trunk)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DTI • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: When PRT blade is used as a DTI (2) 43: DTI(T1) blade
blade for the first time, the PRI firm-
ware program needs to be changed
to the DTI firmware program by ex-
ecuting the blade firmware program
update.
For details, refer to the PC Pro-
gramming Manual.

Assign a Trunk blade number to the DTI blade. • Y=1

BLADE RESET (1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 000-127: Trunk blade No.

CM10 Assign trunk numbers to Physical Port number • Y=00

on the DTI blade. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-24: Circuit No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

1-274
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM04 Assign the destination to receive the synchro- • Y=10-59

nous signal for DTI. (1) 01: First priority
BLADE RESET 02: Second priority
(2) 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: Assign this data when the system is
a slave office and receives the check
synchronization signal from the
master office.
This data assignment is not required
when the office is the master office.

CMAA Assign the necessary functions to the DTI • Y=00 Data Mode
blade. (1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
BLADE RESET CM05 Y=1
(2) 1 : Based on AT&T Specifications
NOTE: Because SV9300 supports the AT&T • Y=01 Frame Configuration
Specifications, the system data set- (1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
ting in accordance with the AT&T CM05 Y=1
specifications is required for (2) 0 : 12-Multi Frame (D4)
SV9300 as well as the opposite of- 1 : 24-Multi Frame (ESF)
fice.
• Y=09 Idle Code on ISDN B channels
(1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
CM05 Y=1
(2) 0 : Send 7F to PSTN
1 : Send FF to PSTN

Select the cable length for DTI. • Y=19 Cable Length

BLADE RESET (1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
CM05 Y=1
(2) 0 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)
1 : 41-81 m (134.5-265.7 ft)
2 : 82-122 m (269.0-400.2 ft)
3 : 123-162 m (403.4-531.4 ft)
4 : 163-200 m (534.6-656 ft)
7 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)

1-275
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign a trunk route number for tie line inter- • Y=00
face to each DTI. (1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10
BLADE RESET Y=00
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
NOTE: The DTI route must be separated
from any analog trunk route.

CM35 Assign trunk route data to each DTI trunk • Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route
route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 04: Tie line trunk

• Y=001 Dialing signal type

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 7 : DP/DTMF (Incoming)
DTMF (Outgoing)

• Y=004 Answer signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives

• Y=005 Release signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives

• Y=009 Incoming connection signaling

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 03: Wink Start
04: Delay Dial
05: Immediate Start
06: 2nd DT/Timing Start-Tie line

• Y=020 Sender start condition

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00 : Wink Start
01 : Delay Dial
02 : Ground Start
15 : Timing Start

1-276
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the various timing, if required. • Y=3

BLADE RESET (1) 20: Answer Signal Detect Timing on DTI
trunk
NOTE: When providing Delay Dial, set the (2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
second data of CM41 Y=3>25 to 01 99 : 1020 ms.
(16ms). If no data is set, the default setting is 60 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 21: Release Signal Detect Timing on DTI
trunk
(2) 01-98: 200-19600 ms.
(200 ms. increments)
99 : 25500 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 600 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 22: Ring Signal Detect Timing for DTI
Trunk
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 80 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 23: DTI Wink signal sending time for con-
nection check
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 200 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 24: DTI Trunk Wink/Delay Signal Timeout
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 200 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 25: DTI Receive Wink/Delay signal dura-
tion minimum time NOTE
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 200 ms.

1-277
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 • Y=3
(1) 26: DTI Receive Wink/Delay signal dura-
tion maximum time
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 500 ms.

CM20 Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
NOTE: The Least Cost Routing or Route (2) 100-163: Trunk Route 00-63
Advance feature is available for call
origination via the DTI.
Refer to the following feature pro-
gramming.
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6
DIGIT Page 1-448
ROUTE ADVANCE
Page 1-724

END

1-278
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

• When the setting of more than 16 Highway Channels are required for a DTI blade, reassignment of
the Highway Channel (108 ch) allocation is required to each physical slot (slot01-06/07-12/13-18).
The programming for Highway Channel reassignment is as follows. For the details of Highway
Channel reassignment, refer to “CMF7 Y=9” in Command Manual.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMF7 Reassign Highway Channel. • Y=9

(1) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01/07/13: Lowest slot No. in each
Line/Trunk chassis (2U)
(2) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 06/12/18: Highest slot No. in each
Line/Trunk chassis (2U)

CME0 Execute the blade reset for all slots of the Unit • Y=3
accommodated the DTI blade. (1) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 1: Set the same Unit No. and Slot No. YY: 01-18: Slot No.
assigned by the first data. (2) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 2: “00000000-FFFFFFFF” is dis- YY: 01-18: Slot No.
played as the second data when this
command is executed.
You can confirm the port status of
the blade which is accommodated to
the specified slot by this data dis-
play.
00000000: All ports are not in use
Other than 00000000:
Ports in use are included.

NOTE 3: For the blade reset while the system

is operating, be sure to check the
port status. The blade reset must be
executed when all ports are not in
use.

END

1-279
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

(b) C.O. Line Interface (Loop Start Trunk)

[9300V5 software required]

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DTI • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: When PRT blade is used as a DTI (2) 43: DTI(T1) blade
blade for the first time, the PRI firm-
ware program needs to be changed
to the DTI firmware program by ex-
ecuting the blade firmware program
update.
For details, refer to the PC Pro-
gramming Manual.

Assign a Trunk blade number to the DTI blade. • Y=1

BLADE RESET (1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 000-127: Trunk blade No.

CM04 Assign the destination to receive the synchro- • Y=10-59

nous signal for DTI. (1) 01: First priority
BLADE RESET 02: Second priority
(2) 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: Assign this data when the system is
a slave office and receives the check
synchronization signal from the
master office.
This data assignment is not required
when the office is the master office.

1-280
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CMAA Assign the necessary functions to the DTI • Y=00 Data Mode (1.5M (T1) DTI)
blade. (1) 000-127: Trunk blade No.
BLADE RESET (2) 0: As per CM35 Y=369

• Y=01 Frame Configuration (1.5M (T1)

NOTE: Because SV9300 supports the AT&T
DTI)
Specifications, the system data set-
(1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
ting in accordance with the AT&T
CM05 Y=1
specifications is required for
(2) 0 : 12-Multi Frame (D4)
SV9300 as well as the opposite of-
1 : 24-Multi Frame (ESF)
fice.
• Y=09 Idle Code on 1.5M (T1) DTI chan-
nels
(1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
CM05 Y=1
(2) 0 : Send 7F to PSTN
1 : Send FF to PSTN

Select the cable length for DTI. • Y=19 Cable Length

BLADE RESET (1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
CM05 Y=1
(2) 0 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)
1 : 41-81 m (134.5-265.7 ft)
2 : 82-122 m (269.0-400.2 ft)
3 : 123-162 m (403.4-531.4 ft)
4 : 163-200 m (534.6-656 ft)
7 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)

CM10 Assign trunk numbers to Physical Port number • Y=00

on the DTI blade. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-24: Circuit No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

1-281
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign a trunk route number for tie line inter- • Y=00
face to each DTI. (1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10
BLADE RESET Y=00
(2) 00-63 : Trunk Route No.
NONE : No data

CM35 Assign trunk route data to each DTI trunk • Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route
route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DDD (C.O., DID) trunk

• Y=001 Dialing signal type

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2 : DP10 PPS (Incoming)
DP10 PPS (Outgoing)
3 : DP10/20PPS (Incoming)
DP20 PPS (Outgoing)
4 : DTMF (Incoming)
DTMF (Outgoing)
7 : DP/DTMF (Incoming)
DTMF (Outgoing)

• Y=004 Answer signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2 : Answer signal arrives
7 : Answer signal does not arrives

• Y=005 Release signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Release signal does not arrives
1 : Release signal arrives

• Y=009 Incoming connection signaling

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 15 : Ring Down

• Y=020 Sender start condition

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 15 : Timing Start

1-282
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 • Y=369 Data Mode for Trunk Route (1.5M

(T1) DTI)
BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 01: Loop Start Trunk (FXS)

CM41 Specify the various timing, if required. • Y=3

BLADE RESET (1) 52: 1.5M (T1: Loop Start) DTI Answer Sig-
nal Detect Timing
(2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 1020 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 544 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 53: 1.5M (T1: Loop Start) DTI Release Sig-
nal Detect Timing
(2) 01-99: 100-9900 ms. (100 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 500 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 54: 1.5M (T1: Loop Start) DTI Ring Signal
Detect Timing
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 176 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 55: 1.5M (T1: Loop Start) DTI Ringing
Signal Stop Detection Time
(2) 01-99: 100-9900 ms. (100 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 6800 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 56: 1.5M (T1: Loop Start) DTI Guard Time
(2) 01-99: 100-9900 ms. (100 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 500 ms.

1-283
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
NOTE: The Least Cost Routing or Route (2) 100-163: Trunk Route 00-63
Advance feature is available for call
origination via the DTI.
Refer to the following feature pro-
gramming.
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6
DIGIT Page 1-448
ROUTE ADVANCE
Page 1-724

END

1-284
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

• When the setting of more than 16 Highway Channels are required for a DTI blade, reassignment of
the Highway Channel (108 ch) allocation is required to each physical slot (slot01-06/07-12/13-18).
The programming for Highway Channel reassignment is as follows. For the details of Highway
Channel reassignment, refer to “CMF7 Y=9” in Command Manual.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMF7 Reassign Highway Channel. • Y=9

(1) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01/07/13: Lowest slot No. in each
Line/Trunk chassis (2U)
(2) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 06/12/18: Highest slot No. in each
Line/Trunk chassis (2U)

CME0 Execute the blade reset for all slots of the Unit • Y=3
accommodated the DTI blade. (1) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 1: Set the same Unit No. and Slot No. YY: 01-18: Slot No.
assigned by the first data. (2) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 2: “00000000-FFFFFFFF” is dis- YY: 01-18: Slot No.
played as the second data when this
command is executed.
You can confirm the port status of
the blade which is accommodated to
the specified slot by this data dis-
play.
00000000: All ports are not in use
Other than 00000000:
Ports in use are included.

NOTE 3: For the blade reset while the system

is operating, be sure to check the
port status. The blade reset must be
executed when all ports are not in
use.

END

1-285
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

30DTI Assignment
[Brazil]
[Australia/EMEA/Asia/Latin America]

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DTI • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE 1: When PRT blade is used as a DTI (2) 47: DTI (E1 2 Mbps) blade
blade for the first time, the PRI firm-
ware program needs to be changed
to the DTI firmware program by ex-
ecuting the blade firmware program
update.
For details, refer to the PC
Programming Manual.

NOTE 2: When the setting of more than 16

Highway Channels are required for
a DTI blade, reassign the Highway
Channel (108 ch) allocation by
CMF7 Y=9. Page 1-294

Assign a Trunk blade number to the DTI blade. • Y=1

BLADE RESET (1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 000-127: Trunk blade No.

CM08 Set the Level diagram setting (System) to Stan- (1) 739
dard Pattern. (2) 1 : Standard Pattern

CM10 Assign trunk numbers to Physical Port number • Y=00

on the DTI blade. Circuit No. 16 cannot be as- (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
signed. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
BLADE RESET YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-15, 17-31: Circuit No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.
NONE : No data

1-286
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM04 Assign the destination to receive the synchro- • Y=10-59

nous signal for DTI. (1) 01: First priority
BLADE RESET 02: Second priority
(2) 01-18: Slot No.

NOTE 1: Assign this data when the system is a slave office and receives the clock synchronization
signal from the master office (this data assignment is not required when the office is the
master office). When receiving the clock signal only from DTI blade of the first priority
within a same Unit, set the Slot No. of the appropriate DTI blade only for the first data 01
(first priority). In addition, if the system is unable to receive the clock signal from DTI
blade of the first priority due to the line failure, to automatically switch the reception route
to the DTI blade of the second priority, set the Slot No. of the appropriate DTI blade for
the first data 01 (first priority) and 02 (second priority).

Setting Example:
When assigning the first DTI blade (for Slot01) of Unit01 to the first priority and the
second DTI blade (for Slot02) of Unit02 to the second priority:
- CM04 Y=10>01: 01 (first priority)
- CM04 Y=10>01: 02 (second priority)

NOTE 2: For multiple Unit configurations, specify the blade to receive the synchronization signal
for each Unit accommodating DTI.

CMAA Assign the necessary functions to the DTI • Y=00 Data Mode
blade. (1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
BLADE RESET CM05 Y=1
(2) 1 : Based on AT&T Specifications
NOTE: Because SV9300 supports the AT&T
Specifications, the system data set-
ting in accordance with the AT&T
specifications is required for
SV9300 as well as the opposite of-
fice.

1-287
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CMAA Assign the necessary functions to the DTI • Y=01 Frame Configuration
blade. (1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
BLADE RESET CM05 Y=1
(2) 0 : Double Frame (no CRC-4)
NOTE: Cyclic redundancy checking (CRC) 1 : CRC-4 multiframe structure NOTE
for DTI (CM35 Y=089) is not effec-
• Y=09 Encoding Selection
tive when the DTI (E1 2 Mbps) is
(1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
used.
CM05 Y=1
(2) 0 : AMI
1 : HDB3

• Y=19 Cable Length

(1) 000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by
CM05 Y=1
(2) 0 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)
1 : 41-81 m (134.5-265.7 ft)
2 : 82-122 m (269.0-400.2 ft)
3 : 123-162 m (403.4-531.4 ft)
4 : 163-200 m (534.6-656 ft)
7 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)

• Y=21 Receiving pulse level

(1) 000-127: Trunk Blade No. assigned by
CM05 Y=1
(2) 00 : 0.91/1.70 V
01 : 0.74/0.84 V
02 : 0.59/0.84 V
03 : 0.42/0.45 V
04 : 0.32/0.45 V
05 : 0.21/0.20 V
06 : 0.16/0.10 V
07 : 0.10/not defined
15 : 0.91/1.70 V

• Y=25 Type of Trunk

(1) 000-127: Trunk Blade No. assigned by
CM05 Y=1
(2) 08 : Brazil Code for correct call blocking
trunk
15 : ITU-T Q421 Standard trunk

1-288
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign a trunk route number for tie line inter- • Y=00
face to each DTI. (1) 000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10
BLADE RESET Y=00
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
NOTE: The DTI route must be separated
from any analog trunk route.

CM35 Assign trunk route data to each DTI trunk • Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route
route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 04: Tie line trunk

• Y=001 Dialing signal type

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 4: DTMF (Incoming)
DTMF (Outgoing)

• Y=004 Answer signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2: Answer signal arrives

• Y=005 Release signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release signal arrives

• Y=009 Incoming connection signaling

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 05: Immediate Start
06: 2nd DT/Timing Start-Tie line

• Y=020 Sender start condition

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 15 : Timing Start

1-289
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 Specify the various timing, if required. • Y=3

BLADE RESET (1) 30: Loop Current Detect Timing
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 4080 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 48 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 31: Clear Signal Detect Timing
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 400 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 32: Transmit clear signal time for Forced
Release
(2) 01-98: 32-3136 ms. (32 ms. increments)
99 : 4080 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 800 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 33: Transmit Answer duration time
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 304 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 34: Transmit Double Answer duration time
(2) 01-98: 128-12544 ms.
(128 ms. increments)
99 : 16320 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 2048 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 35: Receive Answer minimum time
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 200 ms.

1-290
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

E DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 • Y=3
(1) 36: Receive Answer maximum time
(2) 01-98: 128-12544 ms.
(128 ms. increments)
99 : 16320 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 400 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 37: Receive Double Answer minimum time
(2) 01-98: 128-12544 ms.
(128 ms. increments)
99 : 16320 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 1536 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 38: Receive Double Answer maximum
time
(2) 01-98: 28-12544 ms. (128 ms. increments)
99 : 16320 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 3008 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 39: Transmit Seizure Acknowledge dura-
tion time
(2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 1020 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 100 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 40: Receive Seizure Acknowledge mini-
mum time
(2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 1020 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 100 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 41: Receive Seizure Acknowledge maxi-
mum time
(2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 1020 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 300 ms.

1-291
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

F DESCRIPTION DATA

CM41 • Y=3
(1) 42: Transmit Digit Acknowledge duration
time
(2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 1020 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 100 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 43: Receive Digit Acknowledge minimum
time
(2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 1020 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 100 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 44: Receive Digit Acknowledge maximum
time
(2) 01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 1020 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 300 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 49: Transmit Remove Ring time
(2) 00-98: 0-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 0 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 50: Transmit Clear Signal Send time
(2) 01-98: 32-3136 ms. (32 ms. increments)
99 : 4080 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 1008 ms.

• Y=3
(1) 51: Transmit Seizure Signal time
(2) 01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)
99 : 2040 ms.
If no data is set, the default setting is 800 ms.

1-292
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

G DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
NOTE: The Least Cost Routing or Route (2) 100-163: Trunk Route 00-63
Advance feature is available for call
origination via the DTI.
Refer to the following feature pro-
gramming.
LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6
DIGIT Page 1-448
ROUTE ADVANCE
Page 1-724

END

1-293
 DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE

• When the setting of more than 16 Highway Channels are required for a DTI blade, reassignment of
the Highway Channel (108 ch) allocation is required to each physical slot (slot01-06/07-12/13-18).
The programming for Highway Channel reassignment is as follows. For the details of Highway
Channel reassignment, refer to “CMF7 Y=9” in Command Manual.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CMF7 Reassign Highway Channel. • Y=9

(1) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01/07/13: Lowest slot No. in each
Line/Trunk chassis (2U)
(2) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 06/12/18: Highest slot No. in each
Line/Trunk chassis (2U)

CME0 Execute the blade reset for all slots of the Unit • Y=3
accommodated the DTI blade. (1) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 1: Set the same Unit No. and Slot No. YY: 01-18: Slot No.
assigned by the first data. (2) XX YY
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
NOTE 2: “00000000-FFFFFFFF” is dis- YY: 01-18: Slot No.
played as the second data when this
command is executed.
You can confirm the port status of
the blade which is accommodated to
the specified slot by this data dis-
play.
00000000: All ports are not in use
Other than 00000000:
Ports in use are included.

NOTE 3: For the blade reset while the system

is operating, be sure to check the
port status. The blade reset must be
executed when all ports are not in
use.

END

1-294
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the ring cadence on a Direct Inward Di- (1) 180
aling. (2) 0 : For Multiline Terminal:
0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
[For North America]
Special Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344
[For other than North America]
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345
1 : As per CM35 Y=033 or CM76 Y=22

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the Direct • Y=0

Inward Dialing blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 32: Direct Inward Dialing blade

CM10 Assign the trunk numbers to the required • Y=00

Physical Port number. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

1-295
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign the data for DID to the trunk numbers • Y=00 Trunk Route Allocation
assigned by CM10 Y=00. BLADE RESET
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.

• Y=01 Tenant Allocation

(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00-63: Tenant No.
01 : Tenant No.

Assign the data for DID to the trunk numbers • Y=02 Terminating System in Day Mode
assigned by CM10 Y=00. • Y=03 Terminating System in Night Mode
• Y=40 Terminating System in Mode A
• Y=41 Terminating System in Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 31 : DID, Tie Line and any call which is
not handled by the PBX

CM35 Assign the data for DID to the trunk routes as- • Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route
signed by CM30 Y=00. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DID trunk

• Y=002 Call direction

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1: Incoming trunk

• Y=005 Release Signal from distant office

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Release Signal arrives

• Y=009 Incoming connection signaling

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 06: 2nd DT/Timing Start-Tie Line

NOTE: When 2nd data is set to “1”, the • Y=075 DID incoming LDN display on
Trunk ID number assigned by CM30 Multiline Terminal/DESKCON
Y=19 is displayed. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available NOTE

1-296
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM49 Assign the function of each Voice Response • Y=00

System, if required. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 0D00: Announcement Service when the
called station does not answer the
DID/Tie Line call
0E00: Announcement Service when the
DID/Tie Line call terminates to the
busy station

CM51 Assign the destination of DID call transferred • Y=00 No Answer

when the station is no answer/busy/unas- • Y=03 Busy
signed. • Y=06 Unassigned
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
NOTE: When Announcement Service is (2) Destination:
provided for No Answer (CM51 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Y=00) or Busy (CM51 Y=03), see E000 : Attendant Console
ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE. EB000-EB015 : Voice Response System
Page 1-12 No.
When Announcement Service is
provided for unassigned (CM51
Y=06), see INTERCEPT
ANNOUNCEMENT.
Page 1-437

END

To assign the destination tenant for Day/Night Mode and Mode A/B, when DID call terminates
(When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “D13” (TAS)):

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Assign the tenant for Day/Night Mode and • Y=05 Day Mode
Mode A/B per station number received on DID • Y=06 Night Mode
call. • Y=07 Mode A
• Y=08 Mode B
(1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) 00-63: Trunk Tenant No.

END

1-297
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)

To assign the destination tenant for Day/Night Mode and Mode A/B, when DID call terminates
(When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “station number to be terminated”):

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign a tenant number to each station as- • Y=04

signed by CM76 Y=01/02/03/04. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by
CM76 Y=01/02/03/04
(2) 00-63: Tenant No.
01 : Tenant No.

CM76 Assign the terminating station tenant for each • Y=18 Day Mode
DID number during Day/Night Mode and • Y=19 Night Mode
Mode A/B. • Y=20 Mode A
• Y=21 Mode B
(1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) 00-63 : Station Tenant No.
NONE : Trunk Tenant

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Direct Inward Dialing blade (DID Trunk)

CPU blade (VRS using a built-in Flash ROM)

1-298
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID CALL WAITING

DID CALL WAITING

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the Camp-On tone sent to a busy sta- (1) 367
tion by Camp-On Call Waiting Method. (2) 0 : Every 4 seconds
1 : Only once

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for the Call • Y=02

Waiting feature to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Waiting Answer from called side in • Y=044 Call Waiting Answer from called
Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 side
Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM35 Provide DID Call Waiting to the trunk routes • Y=059 Call Waiting for DID call
assigned by CM30. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM76 Specify Call Waiting for DID call per incom- • Y=10
ing LDN number, if required. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
NOTE: CM76 Y=10 is effective when the (2) 0 : Restricted
2nd data of CM35 Y=018 is “0” 1 : Allow
(Received Digits Conversion is to be
provided).

END

1-299
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID DIGIT CONVERSION

DID DIGIT CONVERSION

PROGRMMING SUMMARY FOR DID DIGIT CONVERSION

(1) Specify whether the DID Digit Conversion is provided for each trunk route by CM35 Y=018.

(2) To provide the DID Digit Conversion, set the following data.

STEP1: Specify the Development Table for DID Digit Conversion to each trunk route by CM35 Y=170.

STEP2: Assign the number of digits to be received on DID and the number of digits to be converted on
DID to each trunk route/each Development Table by CM35 Y=012, 078/CM35 Y=171, 172.

STEP3: Set the Number Conversion Block number for each Development Table by CM76 Y=00, 90.

STEP4: Assign the data for interpreting the received digits to each Number Conversion Block number
by CM76 Y=01-04.

DID Digit Conversion Programming Procedure

Received number=Station number

1 : Not provided DID Digit Conversion

CM35 Y=018 DID station

0: To provide DID Digit Conversion

CM35 Y=012 CM35 Y=078 CM76 Y=00

Number of Number of DID number

digits to be digits to be
received: converted: Number CM76
3 : Development Y=01-04
Table 0 1-4 digits 2-4 digits Conversion
Block number
The data setting
for interpreting
CM35 Y=170 the digits re-
ceived to each
CM35 Y=172 CM35 Y=171 CM76 Y=90 Number Con-
0: Development version Block
Table 1 Number of Number of DID number number
digits to be digits to be
received: converted: Number
1-14 digits 1-8 digits Conversion
Block number

DID station

1-300
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID DIGIT CONVERSION

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide DID Digit Conversion to the trunk • Y=018

route number assigned by CM30 Y=00. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

Specify the Development Table for DID Digit • Y=170

Conversion. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Development Table 1
NOTE: When using the Development Table 3 : Development Table 0
1, see SAMPLE DATA
PROGRAMMING.
Page 1-303

Specify the number of digits to be received on • Y=012

DID for Development Table 0. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) Number of digits
0 : 1 digit
1 : 2 digits
2 : 3 digits
3 : 4 digits

Specify the number of digits to be converted • Y=078

on DID for Development Table 0. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Leading 2-4 digits
1 : All digits of DID number are convert-
ed by CM76

Specify the number of digits to be received on • Y=172

DID for Development Table 1. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) Number of digits
01-14: 1-14 digits
15 : 4 digits

Specify the number of digits to be converted • Y=171

on DID for Development Table 1. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 01-08: 1-8 digits
15 : 4 digits

1-301
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID DIGIT CONVERSION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Assign the Number Conversion Block number • Y=00

for Development Table 0. (1) X-XXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

Assign the Number Conversion Block number • Y=90

for Development Table 1. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

Assign the data for interpreting the digits re- • Y=01 Day Mode
ceived. • Y=02 Night Mode
• Y=03 Mode A
• Y=04 Mode B
(1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be termi-
nated
DXX: Change Terminating System to:
D02: Trunk-Direct Appearances
D03: Trunk-Direct Appearances +
TAS
D04: Direct-In Termination
D09: Automated Attendant
D10: Attendant Console + TAS
D11: Attendant Console + Trunk-
Direct Appearances
D12: Attendant Console + Trunk-
Direct Appearances + TAS
D13: TAS
D14: Attendant Console
D16: Remote Access to System
(DISA)

END

1-302
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID DIGIT CONVERSION

SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING

< Example >

• The PBX provides DID lines of multiple telecommunication companies (company A, company B),
and when the PBX receives the calls that have the same lower 4 digits of DID number from each
telecommunication company, the calls are terminated to each station which have been specified.

• DID No. : X XXX 084-1234 (DID number of company A)

: X XXX 085-1234 (DID number of company B)
• Trunk Route No.: 00 (for DID line of company A)
: 01 (for DID line of company B)
• Station No. : 2000 (for DID line of company A)
: 3000 (for DID line of company B)

SV9300

DID number of company A

: X XXX 084-1234 Station No.2000

Trunk Route: 00

PSTN
DID number of company B
: X XXX 085-1234

Trunk Route: 01
Station No.3000

The lower 5 digits in DID

numbers of company A and
company B are converted by
Development Table 1.

1-303
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID DIGIT CONVERSION

< Data Programming >

COMMAND 1st DATA 2nd DATA REMARKS

CM35 Y=018 00 0 Provide DID Digit Conversion to the trunk route
number 00.
CM35 Y=018 01 0 Provide DID Digit Conversion to the trunk route
number 01.
CM35 Y=170 00 0 Specify the Development Table 1 for DID digit con-
version to the trunk route number 00.
CM35 Y=170 01 0 Specify the Development Table 1 for DID digit con-
version to the trunk route number 01.
CM35 Y=172 00 07 Specify the number of digits to be received on DID
for Development Table1 as 7 digits to trunk route
number 00.
CM35 Y=172 01 07 Specify the number of digits to be received on DID
for Development Table1 as 7 digits to the trunk route
number 01.
CM35 Y=171 00 05 Specify the number of digits to be converted on DID
for Development Table1 as 5 digits to the trunk route
number 00.
CM35 Y=171 01 05 Specify the number of digits to be converted on DID
for Development Table1 as 5 digits to the trunk route
number 01.
CM76 Y=90 41234 000 Assign the Number Conversion Block number 000
to the DID number 41234.
CM76 Y=90 51234 001 Assign the Number Conversion Block number 001
to the DID number 51234.
CM76 Y=01 000 2000 Assign the station number 2000 to the Number Con-
version Block number 000.
CM76 Y=01 001 3000 Assign the station number 3000 to the Number Con-
version Block number 001.

1-304
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID NAME DISPLAY

DID NAME DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Assign the DID name to the Number Conver- • Y=24

sion Block number assigned by CM76 Y=00/ (1) 000-199: Number Conversion Block No.
90 with character or character code. assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) XX...XX: Character (Maximum 16 charac-
NOTE: Number Conversion Block No. 200- ters)
999 cannot be used for this assign- X: 0-9, A-Z
ment.

• Y=25
(1) 000-199: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) 20-7F: Character Code (Maximum 32 dig-
its, 16 characters)
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re- • Y=02

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Provide Calling Name Display for trunk in- • Y=136

coming calls in Service Restriction Class A as- (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Calling Name Display

CM08 Specify the duration of displaying the Caller (1) 580

information (Calling number/name) on Multi- (2) 0 : 6 seconds
line Terminal when the incoming trunk call is 1 : Until call is finished
answered.

CM90 Provide the Multiline Terminal with a select • Y=00

key of Calling Number Display or Calling (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
Name Display, if required. (2) F1099: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-
play or Calling Name Display

1-305
 DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID NAME DISPLAY

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Provide the DESKCON with a select key of • Y=00

Calling Number Display or Calling Name Dis- (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
play, if required. No.
(2) F6122: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-
play or Calling Name Display

Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Caller • Y=00

ID Display key for displaying the Caller ID, if (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
required. (2) F5010: Caller ID Display

END

1-306
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)

DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the data for DDD to the trunk routes • Y=000
assigned by CM30 Y=00. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DDD trunk

CM08 Assign the method to check Remote Access to (1) 217

System (DISA) Code. (2) 0: By PBX (Related to CM2A)

NOTE: If no setting has been performed for

OAI, the default setting of this data
(2nd data=1) means the same as
2nd data=0 (By PBX).

Assign the ring cadence on a DISA. (1) 180

(2) 0 : For Multiline Terminal:
0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
[For North America]
Special Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344
[For other than North America]
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345
1 : As per CM35 Y=033 or CM76 Y=22

1-307
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign the data for DISA to the required • Y=02 Terminating System in Day Mode
trunks. • Y=03 Terminating System in Night Mode
• Y=40 Terminating System in Mode A
• Y=41 Terminating System in Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 16: DISA

• Y=30 Handling of DISA destination in Day

Mode
• Y=31 Handling of busy/not available DISA
destination in Night Mode
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00 : C.O. line release
01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator
03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console
04 : Forwarded to DIT station assigned
by CM30 Y=04, 05
06 : DT connection for redial
08 : C.O. line release
15 : C.O. line release

CM41 Specify the time before answering by Auto- • Y=0

mated Attendant. (1) 59
(2) 00 : 0 second
NOTE: When this command is used for 01 : 0.5-4 seconds
Remote Access to System (DISA), all 02-04: 4-8 seconds to 12-16 seconds
the settings of the second data 05 or (4 second increments)
later become 4-8 seconds. 05-08: 4-8 seconds
If no data is set, the default setting is 4-8 sec-
onds.

CM76 When providing DISA to the DID calls, assign • Y=01 Day Mode
the data for converting the received digits to • Y=02 Night Mode
DISA. See DID DIGIT CONVERSION. • Y=03 Mode A
Page 1-300 • Y=04 Mode B
(1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
(2) D16: DISA

1-308
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM2A Assign the ID Code Development number for • Y=A0

DISA. (1) 2: DISA Code
(2) 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09
NOTE: CM2A Y=00-09 is determined by
this data.

Assign the ID Code for DISA. • Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09
(1) X-XX...XX (Maximum 16 digits): ID Code
for DISA
(2) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the desired Trunk Restriction Class for • Y=11

each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 1 : Unrestricted (RCA)
2 : Non-Restricted-1 (RCB)
3 : Non-Restricted-2 (RCC)
4 : Semi-Restricted-1 (RCD)
5 : Semi-Restricted-2 (RCE)
6 : Restricted-1 (RCF)
7 : Restricted-2 (RCG)
8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A • Y=12

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B • Y=13

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C • Y=14

to each ID Code. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Assign the valid range of ID Code for DISA. • Y=10

(1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 0: Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code/Remote Access to System (DISA)
2: Remote Access to System (DISA)

1-309
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM42 Specify the maximum number of digits for (1) 13

DISA Code with CPU. (2) 01-16 : 1-16 digits
NONE : 16 digits

END

NOTE: Approximately 3000 DISA codes including Authorization Codes and Forced Account Codes
can be defined.

Number of the codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code.
For details, refer to “BUSINESS/HOTEL/DATA FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS”.

To access the Voice Response System (VRS) via DISA, add the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM2A Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice • Y=12

Response System access to the required ID (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No. assigned
Code Pattern number. by CM2A Y=00-09
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Voice Response System access in • Y=033

Service Restriction Class A assigned by (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
CM2A Y=12. assigned by CM2A Y=12
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 To record and replay a message from an • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
outside user, assign the Voice Response (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
System access code, respectively. (2) A100: Record
A101: Replay

END

1-310
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the DISA programming, do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for this fea- • Y=02

ture to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Manual Call Forwarding set by DISA in • Y=134

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0: Allow

CM08 Assign the method to check Remote Access to (1) 217

System (DISA) Code. (2) 0: By PBX (Related to CM2A)

NOTE: If no setting has been performed for

OAI, the default setting of this data
(2nd data=1) means the same as
2nd data=0 (By PBX).

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Forwarding- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
All Calls Set and Cancel, respectively. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A010: Call Forwarding-All Calls Set
A011: Call Forwarding-All Calls Cancel

Without ID Code entry when digit

conversion on DID call is not provided
(CM35 Y=018 is set to “1”): Page 1-314
B

Without ID Code entry when digit

conversion on DID call is provided
(CM35 Y=018 is set to “0”): Page 1-313
A

With ID Code entry: Page 1-312

1-311
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM2A Assign the ID Code Development number for • Y=A0

DISA. (1) 2: DISA Code
(2) 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the ID Code for DISA. • Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09
(1) X-XX...XX: ID Code for DISA
(Maximum 16 digits)
(2) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the valid range of ID Code for DISA. • Y=10

(1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 0: Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code/Remote Access to System (DISA)
2: Remote Access to System (DISA)

Assign Service Restriction Class A assigned • Y=12

by CM15 Y=134 to the ID Code Pattern num- (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
ber. (2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Specify the setting station of Manual Call For- • Y=16

warding set by DISA, if required. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE: If the station number is set by this NONE : All stations
command, Call Forward setting is
not available for the other stations.

END

1-312
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

To abbreviate the ID Code entry when digit conversion on DID call is provided
(CM35 Y=018 is set to “0”):

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Allow the use of the calling party number as • Y=155

the ID Code for DISA, to the trunk route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Available

CM2A Assign the ID Code Development number for • Y=A0

Call Forwarding set by DISA. (1) 3: Automatic service setting by DISA
(2) 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the calling party number as the ID • Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09
Code for DISA. (1) X-XX...XX: ID Code for DISA
(Maximum 16 digits)
(2) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the valid range of ID Code for DISA. • Y=10

(1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 0: Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code/Remote Access to System (DISA)
2: Remote Access to System (DISA)

Assign Service Restriction Class A assigned • Y=12

by CM15 Y=134 to the ID Code Pattern num- (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
ber. (2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow the use of the calling party number as • Y=15

the ID Code for DISA, to the ID Code Pattern (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
number. (2) 0: Available

Specify the setting station of Manual Call For- • Y=16

warding set by DISA, if required. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE: If the station number is set by this NONE : All stations
command, Call Forward setting is
not available for the other stations.

END

1-313
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

To abbreviate the ID Code entry when digit conversion on DID call is not provided
(CM35 Y=018 is set to “1”):

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Assign the Number Conversion Block number • Y=00

to the DID number. (1) X-XXXX: DID No.
(2) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
000-999

Specify the terminating system as DISA. • Y=01 Day Mode

• Y=02 Night Mode
• Y=03 Mode A
• Y=04 Mode B
(1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00
(2) D16: DISA

Allow the use of the calling party number as • Y=14

the ID Code for DISA when the DID number (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00 is sent. assigned by CM76 Y=00
(2) 0: Available

Allow the service setting by DISA without di- • Y=15

aling the ID Code. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00
(2) 15 : Service setting without dialing the ID
Code

CM2A Assign the ID Code Development number, for • Y=A0

Call Forwarding set by DISA. (1) 3: Automatic service setting by DISA
(2) 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the calling party number as the ID • Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09
Code for DISA. (1) X-XX...XX: ID Code for DISA
(Maximum 16 digits)
(2) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

1-314
 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM2A Assign the valid range of ID Code for DISA. • Y=10

(1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 0: Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code/Remote Access to System (DISA)
2: Remote Access to System (DISA)

Assign Service Restriction Class A assigned • Y=12

by CM15 Y=134 to the ID Code Pattern num- (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
ber. (2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow the use of the calling party number as • Y=15

the ID Code for DISA, to the ID Code Pattern (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
number. (2) 0: Available

Specify the setting station of Manual Call For- • Y=16

warding set by DISA, if required. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE: If the station number is set by this NONE : All stations
command, Call Forward setting is
not available for the other stations.

END

1-315
 DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT)

DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM30 Assign the data for terminating system in Day • Y=02 Day Mode/03 Night Mode/
Mode/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B, to each 40 Mode A/41 Mode B
Loop/Ground Start trunk, respectively. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 04: Direct-In Termination

Assign the station number to be terminated by • Y=04 Day Mode/05 Night Mode/
DIT in Day Mode/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode 42 Mode A/43 Mode B
B respectively. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

Assign the destination to be rerouted when the • Y=13 Day Mode/14 Night Mode
DIT station is busy/not available in Day Mode (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
and Night Mode respectively. (2) 01 : TAS BUZZER
04 : Attendant Console
06 : Automatic Camp-On
15 : Waiting until the DIT station be-
comes idle

Assign the transfer destination for an unan- • Y=15 Day Mode/16 Night Mode
swered DIT call in Day Mode and Night Mode, (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
respectively. (2) 01 : Attendant Console
03 : TAS
15 : To be continued DIT

CM41 Specify the timing for an unanswered call to a • Y=0

DIT destination. (1) 01
(2) 01-30: 4-120 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36
seconds.

1-316
 DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the ring cadence on a DIT call. (1) 179

(2) 0 : As per CM35 Y=033
1 : For Multiline Terminal:
0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
[For North America]
Special Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344
[For other than North America]
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>07
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345

END

1-317
 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)

DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the COT/Di- • Y=0

rect Inward Dialing blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 30: COT blade
32: Direct Inward Dialing blade

CM10 Assign the trunk numbers to the required • Y=00

Physical Port number. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

CM30 Assign the data for Direct Outward Dialing to • Y=00 Trunk Route allocation
the trunk number assigned by CM10 Y=00. BLADE RESET
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00-63: Trunk Route No.

• Y=01 Tenant Allocation

(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 00-63: Tenant No.
01 : Tenant No.

• Y=08 Restriction on Night Mode

(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow

1-318
 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the data for Direct Outward Dialing to • Y=000 Kind of Route
the Route number assigned by CM30 Y=00. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00: DDD
01: FX [North America Only]
02: WATS [North America Only]
03: CCSA [North America Only]

• Y=001 Type of Signal

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2 : DP
4 : DTMF
7 : DTMF

• Y=002 OG/IC
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 2 : Outgoing
3 : Bothway

• Y=004 Answer Signal Condition

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Answer Signal by Battery Reversal
7 : No Answer Signal arrives
In case of no Answer Signal, system recognizes
the answer in timing set by CM41 Y=0>03.

• Y=005 Release Signal Condition

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : No Release Signal arrives
1 : Release Signal arrives

• Y=008 Dial Pulse Sending

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 3 : To send

• Y=009 Incoming Connection Signalling

BLADE RESET
(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 01 : Ring Down (Ground Start)
15 : Ring Down (Loop Start)

1-319
 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 According to the characteristics of each C.O. • Y=020 Sender start condition
line, assign the data for DP/DTMF Sender to BLADE RESET
each route. • Y=021 Sender Prepause Timing
• Y=023 DP Inter-Digital Pause
For the details of the command, refer to the BLADE RESET
Command Manual. • Y=024 DTMF Inter-Digital Pause
• Y=025 DP Make Ratio NOTE
NOTE: This command is available for LDT/
BLADE RESET
ODT.
• Y=026 DTMF Signal Width
• Y=046 DP/DTMF Release Timing

CM41 Specify the timing for Interdigit Pause on out- • Y=0

going C.O. call. (1) 27
(2) 03-14: 3-14 seconds
(1 second increment)
If no data is set, the default setting is 7 sec-
onds.

CM20 Assign the access code to each route. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) 100-163: Trunk Route No. 00-63

CM90 Assign the trunk appearance line key on a • Y=00

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

END

NOTE: For the Trunk Restriction Class, refer to CLASS OF SERVICE. Page 1-213

1-320
 DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE

DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD

(DSS/BLF) CONSOLE
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM04 Specify the control method of Hotel Feature. • Y=01

(1) 10
(2) 1: DSS console

Specify Handling of CPU call information. • Y=01

(1) 03
(2) 2: Available

CM08 Specify the Hotel Features. (1) 835

(2) 0: To allow

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 10: DLC blade

CM10 Assign the DSS Console number to its • Y=00

associated Physical Port number. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
(2) E100-E131: DSS Console No.

Assign the DSS Console to be equipped with • Y=01

the DT700/DT800/DT900 Series through the (1) 0000-1499: Virtual Port No.
LAN connection (Side Connection). (For IP terminal)
(2) E100-E131: DSS Console No.

CM96 Assign a single line station, Multiline Termi- (1) 00-31: DSS Console No.
nal, or DESKCON to work in conjunction with (Last two digits of E100-E131
the DSS Console. assigned by CM10 Y=00)
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No./My Line No.
of Multiline Terminal
E000-E007 : DESKCON No.

1-321
 DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM97 Assign the station and trunk numbers, as (1) DSS Console No. (00-31) + , + DSS Key
needed, to the keys on each DSS Console. No. (00-59)
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
D000-D511 : Trunk No.

Assign function keys on each DSS Console, if (1) DSS Console No. (00-31) + , + DSS Key
required. No. (57-59)
(2) F1300-F1363: Day/Night Mode Change by
Tenant 00-63 Tenant
F1048 : Room Cutoff-Set/Reset
F1049 : Message Waiting Set/Reset
F1050 : Call Recording
F1051 : Check-In/Out
F1053 : Do Not Disturb Set/Reset
F1054 : No Answer Indication for
Wake Up Call
F1055 : Function Button used for
busy out display from UCD
Group

Assign a changing Function key on each DSS (1) DSS Console No. (00-31) + , + DSS Key
Console. No. (56)
(2) F1052: Function Change

CM08 Specify the type of busy indication on the BLF (1) 269
of the DSS console as station base or extension (2) 0 : Station base
base. 1 : Extension base

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED
DSS Console
DLC blade

1-322
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DISTINCTIVE RINGING
PROGRAMMING

[For North America]

(1) For Station-to-Station calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for (1) 138

station-to-station calls. (2) For Multiline Terminal:
0 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF
1 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>06
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-323
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(2) For C.O./Tie line calls (except for Direct-in Termination/Direct Inward Dialing/DISA/CCIS calls)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the interval of ringing tones for station • Y=033

on incoming calls. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
NOTE: For incoming calls to a Trunk- 0 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF
Direct Appearances key on Multi- -0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
line Terminals, the special ringing; 1 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF
0.2 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF -0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
will be applied. 2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF
3 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
3 : As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

(3) For Direct-in Termination calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct- (1) 179
in Termination calls. (2) 0 : As per CM35 Y=033
1 : For Multiline Terminal:
0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>07
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345

END

1-324
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(4) For Direct Inward Dialing calls

• To distinguish by the trunk route

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct (1) 180
Inward Dialing calls. (2) 0 : For Multiline Terminal:
0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345
1 : As per CM35 Y=033

END

• To distinguish by the terminating DID number

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the interval of ringing tones as “As per (1) 180
CM76 Y=22”. (2) 1 : As per CM76 Y=22

CM76 Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or • Y=22

Multiline Terminal on DID calls. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal) (2) For Multiline Terminal:
or As per CM04 Y=00>06 (SLT)). 0 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
1 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
-0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF
2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-325
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(5) For DISA/Automated Attendant calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for DISA/ (1) 180
Automated Attendant calls. (2) 0 : For Multiline Terminal:
0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345
1 : As per CM35 Y=033

END

(6) For C.O. calls transferred to another station from a station/Attendant Console

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Select the kind of the ringing for station/atten- (1) 137
dant calls with trunk lines placed on Consulta- (2) 0 : Change from Internal Ringing
tion Hold. (CM08>138/CM04 Y=00>05) to
External Ringing (CM35 Y=033)
when caller goes on-hook or presses
RLS key
1 : External Ringing (CM35 Y=033)

END

1-326
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(7) For ISDN Indial calls

• To distinguish by the trunk route

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the interval of ringing tones for station • Y=033

on incoming calls. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
NOTE: For incoming calls to a Trunk- 0 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF
Direct Appearances key on Multi- -0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
line Terminals, the special ringing; 1 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF
0.2 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF -0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
will be applied. 2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF
3 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
3 : As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-327
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

• To distinguish by the terminating ISDN Indial number

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the interval of ringing tones as “As per (1) 180
CM76 Y=22”. (2) 1 : As per CM76 Y=22

CM76 Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or • Y=22

Multiline Terminal on ISDN Indial calls. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal) (2) For Multiline Terminal:
or As per CM04 Y=00>06 (SLT)). 0 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
1 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
-0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF
2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-328
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

To provide a distinctive lamp indication for Multiline Terminals during a call termination, do the following
programming:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the lamp color for an incoming exter- • Y=032

nal call. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Green (120 IPM)
NOTE: The lamp color for incoming inter- 1 : Red (120 IPM)
nal calls is red (120 IPM flashing).
For indicating the termination of a
transferred external incoming call,
the flashing lamp color depends on
CM08>137.

END

1-329
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

To provide the distinctive ringing patterns to Multiline Terminals in behind PBX, in order to distinguish
between an internal call from the main PBX and an external incoming call:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of Multiline Terminal (1) 138

ringing tones for station-to-station calls. (2) 0 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF
1 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF

Specify the interval of ringing tones until de- (1) 380

tecting a ringing frequency from the main PBX (2) 0 : As per CM08>381
(Centrex). Ringing is sent from Multiline Ter- 1 : As per CM35 Y=033
minal until detection of the ringing frequency.

(1) 381
(2) 0 : No Ringer
1 : Ringing Tone (0.5 seconds) is sent
once

Specify the lamp indication of Multiline Ter- (1) 382

minal until detecting the kind of incoming call (2) 0 : Red Steady Light
from the main PBX (Centrex). 1 : 120 IPM Flash (As per CM35 Y=032)
The lamp is lit until detection of the ringing
frequency.

NOTE 1: When the ringer is for an internal call:

Interval of ringing signal : CM08>138
Multiline Terminal lamp color : Change to red
Multiline Terminal tone ringer : CM35 Y=034, 164, CM64 Y=20-27, CM65 Y=40

NOTE 2: When the ringer is for an external call:

Interval of ringing signal : CM35 Y=033
Multiline Terminal lamp color : CM35 Y=032
Multiline Terminal tone ringer : CM35 Y=034, 164, CM64 Y=20-27, CM65 Y=40

1-330
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the lamp color for an incoming exter- • Y=032

nal call. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Green (120 IPM)
NOTE 1: The lamp color for incoming inter- 1 : Red (120 IPM)
nal calls is red (120 IPM flashing).

NOTE 2: For indicating the termination of a

transferred external incoming call,
the flashing lamp color depends on
CM08>137.

Specify the interval of ringing tones to a • Y=033

Multiline Terminal on an incoming call. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-
NOTE: For incoming calls to Trunk Line 0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
Appearance Key on Multiline Ter- 1 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-
minal, the special ringing; 0.2 sec- 0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF
onds ON-0.2 seconds OFF will be 2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF
applied. 3 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF

Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi- • Y=034, 164

line Terminal to each trunk route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) See the table below.

: Default
Y=034 Y=164: 0 Y=164: 1
0 Ringer Tone Pattern 3 Ringer Tone Pattern 0
1 Ringer Tone Pattern 6 Ringer Tone Pattern 1
2 Ringer Tone Pattern 5 Ringer Tone Pattern 2
3 Ringer Tone Pattern 4 Ringer Tone Pattern 7

1-331
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM65 Specify the ring frequency of the Multiline • Y=40

Terminal corresponding with the ringer tone (1) 00-63: Tenant No. assigned by CM30
pattern number. Y=01/CM12 Y=04
(2) See the table below.

: Default
Ringer Tone Pattern No. Y=40: 0 Y=40: 1
1 Ringer Tone 1 520 + 660 [Hz]/8 [Hz] Modulating Signal
2 Ringer Tone 2 660 + 760 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal
3 Ringer Tone 3 1100 [Hz] Envelop
4 Ringer Tone 4 540 [Hz]
5 Ringer Tone 5 1100 [Hz]
6 Not used 1400 + 1100 [Hz]
7 Not used 520 + 660 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal

NOTE 1: When using music ring with DT500/DT900 Series, use CM13 Y=99 and CM64 Y=20-27.
NOTE 2: When this data is set or changed, a reset of the terminal is required to reflect the settings
of CM64 Y=20-27 for DT500/DT900 Series.

CM64 Specify the ring frequency of DT500/DT900 • Y=20-27

Series corresponding with the ringer tone pat- (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
tern number. (2) 15 : Music Ring 1 Note 2
[9300V7 software required] 16 : Music Ring 2 Note 2
17 : Music Ring 3 Note 2
NONE : As per CM65 Y=40

NOTE 1: This command is effective only for DT500/DT900 Series. For other Multiline Terminals,
use CM65 Y=40.
NOTE 2: For music ring unsupported terminals, follow the setting of CM65 Y=40.
NOTE 3: A reset of the terminal is required when this data is set or changed for DT500/DT900 Se-
ries.

1-332
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Assign the music ring feature to each station. • Y=99

[9300V7 software required] (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available

NOTE 1: This command is effective only for DT500/DT900 Series.

NOTE 2: Be sure to set this data to “1” (Not available) for music ring unsupported terminals.
NOTE 3: When music ring is not used, set this data to “1” (Not available) even for music ring sup-
ported terminals.
NOTE 4: Music ring can be used regardless of this command when music ring is set by the terminal
operation (Feature key + 3) or on a terminal menu.

CM35 Provide the distinctive ringing patterns to a • Y=087

Multiline Terminal in behind PBX. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM30 Specify the terminating system for incoming • Y=02 in Day Mode
C.O. calls. • Y=03 in Night Mode
• Y=40 in Mode A
• Y=41 in Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 02: Trunk-Direct Appearances
03: Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS

Provide the Trunk-Direct Appearances on • Y=18

Multiline Terminal. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM41 Assign the ringing detect timer for incoming • Y=2

trunk calls. (1) 50
BLADE RESET (2) 01-99: 8-792 ms.
(8 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 224 ms.

CM90 Assign the Trunk Line Appearance key to a • Y=00

Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

END

1-333
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

[For other than North America]

(1) For Station-to-Station calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for sta- (1) 138
tion-to-station calls (2) For Multiline Terminal:
0 : External Ringing
1 : Internal Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multi-
line Terminal by CM08>392/396/
397) Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>06
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

(2) For C.O./Tie line calls (except for Direct-in Termination/Direct Inward Dialing/DISA/CCIS calls)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the interval of ringing tones for station • Y=033

on incoming calls. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
NOTE: For Multiline Terminal, the special 0 : Ringing NOTE
ringing; 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 1 : Special Ringing
seconds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.25 2 : Internal Ringing
seconds OFF is applied. 3 : External Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multi-
line Terminal by CM08>392/396/397)
Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
3 : As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-334
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(3) For Direct-in Termination calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct- (1) 179
in Termination calls. (2) 0 : As per CM35 Y=033
1 : For Multiline Terminal:
Special Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>07
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345

END

(4) For Direct Inward Dialing calls

• To distinguish by the trunk route:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct (1) 180
Inward Dialing calls. (2) 0 : For Multiline Terminal:
Special Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345
1 : As per CM35 Y=033

END

1-335
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

• To distinguish by the terminating DID number:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones as “As per (1) 180
CM76 Y=22”. (2) 1 : As per CM76 Y=22

CM76 Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or • Y=22

Multiline Terminal on DID calls. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal) (2) For Multiline Terminal:
or As per CM04 Y=00>06 (SLT)). 0 : Rering NOTE
1 : Special Ringing
NOTE: For Multiline Terminal, the special 2 : Internal Ringing
ringing; 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 (See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multi-
seconds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.25 line Terminal by CM08>392/396/397)
seconds OFF is applied. Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-336
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(5) For DISA/Automated Attendant calls

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones for DISA/ (1) 180
Automated Attendant calls. (2) 0 : For Multiline Terminal:
Special Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Single Line Telephone by CM04
Y=00>05/06/07) Page 1-345
1 : As per CM35 Y=033

END

(6) For C.O. calls transferred to another station from a station/Attendant Console

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Select the kind of the ringing for station/atten- (1) 137
dant calls with trunk lines placed on Consulta- (2) 0 : Change from Internal Ringing
tion Hold. (CM08>138/CM04 Y=00>05) to Ex-
ternal Ringing (CM35 Y=033) when
caller goes on-hook or presses RLS
key
1 : External Ringing (CM35 Y=033)

END

1-337
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(7) For ISDN Indial calls

• To distinguish by the trunk route:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the interval of ringing tones for station • Y=033

on incoming calls. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
NOTE: For Multiline Terminal, the special 0 : Ringing NOTE
ringing; 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 sec- 1 : Special Ringing
onds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.25 2 : Internal Ringing
seconds OFF is applied. 3 : External Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multi-
line Terminal by CM08>392/396/397)
Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
3 : As per CM04 Y=00>06
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-338
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

• To distinguish by the terminating ISDN Indial number:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of ringing tones as “As per (1) 180
CM76 Y=22”. (2) 1 : As per CM76 Y=22

CM76 Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or • Y=22

Multiline Terminal on ISDN Indial calls. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal) (2) For Multiline Terminal:
or As per CM04 Y=00>06 (SLT)). 0 : Rering NOTE
1 : Special Ringing
NOTE: For Multiline Terminal, the special 2 : Internal Ringing
ringing; 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 (See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multi-
seconds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.25 line Terminal by CM08>392/396/397)
seconds OFF is applied. Page 1-344
For Single Line Telephone:
0 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
1 : As per CM04 Y=00>07
2 : As per CM04 Y=00>05
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Single
Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05/06/
07) Page 1-345

END

1-339
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

To provide the distinctive ringing patterns to Multiline Terminals in behind PBX, in order to distinguish
between an internal call from the main PBX and an external incoming call:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the interval of Multiline Terminal (1) 138

ringing tones for station-to-station calls. (2) 0 : External Ringing
1 : Internal Ringing
(See Interval of Ringing Tones for
Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344

Specify the interval of ringing tones until (1) 380

detecting a ringing frequency from the main (2) 0 : As per CM08>381
PBX (Centrex). Ringing is sent from Multiline 1 : As per CM35 Y=033
Terminal until detection of the ringing fre-
quency.

NOTE: This data is effective when the sec- (1) 381 NOTE
ond data of CM08>380 is set to (2) 0 : No Ringer
“0”. 1 : Ringing Tone (0.5 seconds) is sent
once

Specify the lamp indication of Multiline Ter- (1) 382

minal until detecting the kind of incoming call (2) 0 : Red Steady Light
from the main PBX (Centrex). 1 : 120 IPM Flash (As per CM35 Y=032)
The lamp is lit until detection of the ringing
frequency.

NOTE 1: When the ringer is for an internal call:

Interval of ringing signal : CM08>138
Multiline Terminal lamp color : Change to red
Multiline Terminal tone ringer : CM35 Y=034, 164, CM64 Y=20-27, CM65 Y=40

NOTE 2: When the ringer is for an external call:

Interval of ringing signal : CM35 Y=033
Multiline Terminal lamp color : CM35 Y=032
Multiline Terminal tone ringer : CM35 Y=034, 164, CM64 Y=20-27, CM65 Y=40

1-340
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify the lamp color for an incoming exter- • Y=032

nal call. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Green (120 IPM)
NOTE 1: The lamp color for incoming inter- 1 : Red (120 IPM)
nal calls is red (120 IPM flashing).

NOTE 2: For indicating the termination of a

transferred external incoming call,
the flashing lamp color depends on
CM08>137.

Specify the interval of ringing tones to a • Y=033

Multiline Terminal on an incoming call. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Ringing NOTE
NOTE: For SLT, Internal Ringing is 1 : Special Ringing
applied. For Multiline Terminal, the 2 : Internal Ringing
special ringing; 0.25 seconds ON- 3 : External Ringing
0.25 seconds OFF-0.25 seconds (See Interval of Ringing Tones for
ON-0.25 seconds OFF is applied. Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/
396/397) Page 1-344

Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi- • Y=034, 164

line Terminal to each trunk route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) See the table below.

: Default

Y=034 Y=164: 0 Y=164: 1

0 Ringer Tone Pattern 3 Ringer Tone Pattern 0
1 Ringer Tone Pattern 6 Ringer Tone Pattern 1
2 Ringer Tone Pattern 5 Ringer Tone Pattern 2
3 Ringer Tone Pattern 4 Ringer Tone Pattern 7

1-341
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM65 Specify the ring frequency of the Multiline • Y=40

Terminal corresponding with the ringer tone (1) 00-63: Tenant No. assigned by CM30
pattern number. Y=01/CM12 Y=04
(2) See the table below.

: Default
Ringer Tone Pattern No. Y=40: 0 Y=40: 1
1 Ringer Tone 1 520 + 660 [Hz]/8 [Hz] Modulating Signal
2 Ringer Tone 2 660 + 760 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal
3 Ringer Tone 3 1100 [Hz] Envelop
4 Ringer Tone 4 540 [Hz]
5 Ringer Tone 5 1100 [Hz]
6 Not used 1400 + 1100 [Hz]
7 Not used 520 + 660 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal

NOTE 1: When using music ring with DT500/DT900 Series, use CM13 Y=99 and CM64 Y=20-27.
NOTE 2: When this data is set or changed, a reset of the terminal is required to reflect the settings
of CM64 Y=20-27 for DT500/DT900 Series.

CM64 Specify the ring frequency of DT500/DT900 • Y=20-27

Series corresponding with the ringer tone pat- (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
tern number. (2) 15 : Music Ring 1 Note 2
[9300V7 software required] 16 : Music Ring 2 Note 2
17 : Music Ring 3 Note 2
NONE : As per CM65 Y=40

NOTE 1: This command is effective only for DT500/DT900 Series. For other Multiline Terminals,
use CM65 Y=40.
NOTE 2: For music ring unsupported terminals, follow the setting of CM65 Y=40.
NOTE 3: A reset of the terminal is required when this data is set or changed for DT500/DT900 Se-
ries.

1-342
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Assign the music ring feature to each station. • Y=99

[9300V7 software required] (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available

NOTE 1: This command is effective only for DT500/DT900 Series.

NOTE 2: Be sure to set this data to “1” (Not available) for music ring unsupported terminals.
NOTE 3: When music ring is not used, set this data to “1” (Not available) even for music ring sup-
ported terminals.
NOTE 4: Music ring can be used regardless of this command when music ring is set by the terminal
operation (Feature key + 3) or on a terminal menu.

CM35 Provide the distinctive ringing patterns to a • Y=087

Multiline Terminal in behind PBX. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM30 Specify the terminating system for incoming • Y=02 in Day Mode
C.O. calls. • Y=03 in Night Mode
• Y=40 in Mode A
• Y=41 in Mode B
(1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 02: Trunk-Direct Appearances
03: Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS

Provide the Trunk-Direct Appearances on • Y=18

Multiline Terminal. (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM41 Assign the ringing detect timer for incoming • Y=2

trunk calls. (1) 50
BLADE RESET (2) 01-99: 8-792 ms.
(8 ms. increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 224 ms.

CM90 Assign the Trunk Line Appearance key to a • Y=00

Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) D000-D511: Trunk No.

END

1-343
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Interval of Ringing Tones for Multiline Terminal

by CM08>392/396/397

Unit: seconds : Default

Pattern 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CM08>392 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
CM08>396 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
CM08>397 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Internal 1 ON 1 ON 2 ON 2 ON 0.375 ON 0.375 ON 1 ON 0.25 ON
Ringing -2 OFF -2 OFF -4 OFF -4 OFF -0.25 OFF -0.25 OFF -4 OFF -0.25 OFF
-0.375 ON -0.375 ON -0.25 ON
-2 OFF -2 OFF -4.25 OFF
External 0.375 ON 2 ON 0.375 ON 2 ON 2 ON 2 ON 0.25 ON 1 ON
Ringing -0.25 OFF -4 OFF -0.25 OFF -4 OFF -4 OFF -4 OFF -0.25 OFF -4 OFF
-0.375 ON -0.375 ON -0.25 ON
-2 OFF -2 OFF -4.25 OFF
Special 0.25 ON 0.5 ON 0.25 ON 0.5 ON 0.25 ON 0.25 ON 0.25 ON 0.25 ON
Ringing -0.125 OFF -0.5 OFF -0.125 OFF -0.5 OFF -0.125 OFF -0.125 OFF -0.125 OFF -0.125 OFF
-0.25 ON -0.5 ON -0.25 ON -0.5 ON -0.25 ON -0.25 ON -0.25 ON -0.25 ON
-0.125 OFF -1.5 OFF -0.125 OFF -1.5 OFF -0.125 OFF -0.125 OFF -0.125 OFF -0.125 OFF
-0.25 ON -0.25 ON -0.25 ON -0.25 ON -0.25 ON -0.25 ON
-2 OFF -2 OFF -2 OFF -2 OFF -2 OFF -2 OFF

NOTE 1: The above ringer patterns (5-8) are effective only when CM31 Y=0>0: 04, 15.
NOTE 2: Pattern 5 is standard setting for Brazil.
NOTE 3: Pattern 6 is standard setting for France.
NOTE 4: Pattern 7 and 8 are standard setting for EMEA.

1-344
 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Interval of Ringing Tones for Single Line Telephone

by CM04 Y=00>05/06/07

: Default
CM04 Y=00

2nd 1st Data=05

1st Data=06 1st Data=07
Data (Single Line Telephone
(Single Line Telephone (Special ringing signal for
ringing signal for
ringing signal from a trunk) Single Line Telephone ring)
Station-to-Station connection)
01 ON ON ON

02 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF

03 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF

04 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF

05 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF

06 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF
-0.5seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF -0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF -0.5seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF

07 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-5.25 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-5.25 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-5.25 seconds OFF

08 0.375 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.375 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.375 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.375 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF -0.375 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF -0.375 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF

09 0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF

10 1 second ON-4 seconds OFF 1 second ON-4 seconds OFF 1 second ON-4 seconds OFF

11 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-4.25 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-4.25 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-4.25 seconds OFF

12 1 second ON-3 seconds OFF 1 second ON-3 seconds OFF 1 second ON-3 seconds OFF

13 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.25 seconds ON-2.25 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-2.25 seconds OFF -0.25 seconds ON-2.25 seconds OFF

31 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF 0.375 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF
-0.375 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF

1-345
 DO NOT DISTURB

DO NOT DISTURB
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re- • Y=02

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Do Not Disturb in Service Restriction • Y=019

Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM13 Provide the group of stations in Do Not Dis- • Y=00

turb. Do Not Disturb is set to these stations (as- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
signed by this command) simultaneously by (2) 0: To provide
operation from an Attendant Console.

CM20 Assign the access code for Do Not Disturb Set/ • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Cancel. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A022: Do Not Disturb Set
A023: Do Not Disturb Cancel

CM51 Assign the transfer destination of incoming • Y=10

call when Do Not Disturb is set to the called (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
station (for DID/DIT/Tie line/station call). (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000 : Attendant Console
NOTE: This data is available when CM08>
240 is set to 1.

CM90 Assign a Do Not Disturb function key to the • Y=00

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0022: Do Not Disturb Set/Reset
F1080: Do Not Disturb Override

Assign Do Not Disturb and Do Not Disturb • Y=00

Override function keys to the DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6102: Do Not Disturb
F6103: Do Not Disturb Override
F6104: Reset
F6108: Do Not Disturb Override

1-346
 DO NOT DISTURB

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the operation of Call Forwarding-Busy (1) 240

Line for a station with Do Not Disturb set (for (2) 0 : Call Forwarding-Busy Line
DID/DIT/Tie Line/Station call). 1 : To transfer to the another station
(assigned by CM51 Y=10)
NOTE: Regardless of this data, Do Not
Disturb is available for Direct-In
Termination when a Pilot station of
Station Hunting group is set Do Not
Disturb.

For a system with multiple-tenant, specify the (1) 241

destination of a call transferred in CM51 (2) 0 : Tenant of called station
Y=10. 1 : Tenant of calling station or DID/Tie
Line trunk

CM48 Select the Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb. • Y=2

(1) 14: Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb
(2) 0 : Special Dial Tone (Stutter Dial Tone)
1 : Dial Tone

END

1-347
 DO NOT DISTURB

To set an outside party as a destination of transferred call:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number to the (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
required Virtual Port number. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each sta- • Y=02

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
assigned by CM11
(2) XXZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside to • Y=026

Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CME6 Assign the destination of Call Forwarding-All • Y=00 Call Forwarding-All Calls
Calls-Outside to the Virtual Line station num- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
ber assigned by CM11. assigned by CM11
(2) Destination No.: X-XXXX + , + YY···Y
X-XXXX: Outgoing Trunk/LCR Group
Access Code (1-4 digits)
, : Separate Mark
YY···Y : Called No.
(Maximum 26 digits)

CM08 For system with multiple-tenant, specify the (1) 241

tenant of calling station as the destination of a (2) 1 : Tenant of calling station
call transferred in CM51 Y=10.

CM51 Assign the transfer destination of incoming • Y=10

call when Do Not Disturb is set to the called (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
station as Virtual Line station assigned by (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
CM11 (for DID/DIT/Tie line/station call). assigned by CM11

NOTE: This data is available when CM08>

240 is set to 1.

END

1-348
 DO NOT DISTURB

To provide timer for Do Not Disturb group set/cancel:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Provide the group of stations in Do Not Dis- • Y=00

turb. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0: To provide

CM90 Assign a Do Not Disturb function key to the • Y=00

Multiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0022: Do Not Disturb Set/Reset

CM97 Assign a Do Not Disturb function key on each (1) DSS Console No. (00-31) + , + DSS Key
DSS Console, if required. No. (57-59)
(2) F1053: Do Not Disturb Set/Reset

END

1-349
 DO NOT DISTURB

To set the Do Not Disturb feature to the stations of SLT/sub line of Multiline Terminal/Virtual line stations
that are accommodated to the Multiline Terminal multiline as the sub line, and to display the Do Not Dis-
turb Set/Reset status of the stations on the lamp of Multiline Terminal:

NOTE: To make this feature available, do the programming both of the setting side (Multiline Termi-
nal) and the set side (stations of SLT, sub line of Multiline Terminal or virtual line stations).

• For Setting Side (Multiline Terminal)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to the re- • Y=07

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Allow Do Not Disturb Setting to be set in Ser- • Y=188

vice Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C assigned
Y=07. by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0: Allow

CM08 Provide the system with Message Waiting indi- (1) 140
cation on both My Line and Sub Line of Mul- (2) 0: Available
tiline Terminal.

CM12 Assign the Do Not Disturb lamp indication on • Y=62

Line/Trunk/Feature keys of Multiline Termi- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
nal. (2) 0 : Not indicated
2 : Do Not Disturb lamp indication
3 : Message Waiting lamp indication

END

1-350
 DO NOT DISTURB

• For Set Side (stations of SLT, sub line of Multiline Terminal or virtual line stations)

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re- • Y=02

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No./Sub Line
No./Virtual Line Station
No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Do Not Disturb in Service Restriction • Y=019

Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned
by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to the re- • Y=07

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No./Sub Line No./
Virtual Line Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Allow Do Not Disturb to be set in Service Re- • Y=189

striction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C assigned
by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0: Allow

CM65 Provide Do Not Disturb feature to each tenant. • Y=19

(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 1 : To provide

CM08 Provide the system with Message Waiting indi- (1) 140
cation on both My Line and Sub Line of Mul- (2) 0: Available
tiline Terminal.

CM12 Assign the Do Not Disturb lamp indication on • Y=62

Line/Trunk/Feature keys of Multiline Termi- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No./Sub Line
nal. No./Virtual Line Station
No.
(2) 0 : Not indicated
2 : Do Not Disturb lamp indication
3 : Message Waiting lamp indication

END

1-351
 DO NOT DISTURB

To provide the speech synthesis language feature for the calling party when calling a called party set Do
Not Disturb, do the following programming in addition to the programming of Do Not Disturb.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM04 Specify the combination of Language Indicat- • Y=02

ed number and speech synthesis language. (1) 1-9: Language Indicated No.
(2) 01 : Japanese announcement
NOTE: This command is required when 02 : English announcement
changing the speech synthesis lan- 06 : Chinese announcement
guage (default: English). When the 08 : Korean announcement
language is changed by this com- CCC : Clear
mand, the operation for setting NONE : English announcement
speech synthesis language from the
Multiline Terminal is required for
individual station. For the opera-
tion, refer to OPERATING PROCE-
DURE FOR SETTING SPEECH
SYNTHESIS LANGUAGE.
Page 1-355

CM08 Specify whether to replay the announcement in (1) 894

English after replaying the first announcement (2) 0 : Available
assigned by CM04 Y=02. 1 : Not available

Allow the speech synthesis language feature (1) 1400

for the Do Not Disturb. (2) 0: Allow

CM90 Assign the speech synthesis language setting • Y=00

function keys on Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1074 : Set
NOTE: This command is required when set- F1076 : Cancel
ting the speech synthesis language F1079 : Language
from the Multiline Terminal for indi- NONE : No data
vidual station. For the operation, re-
fer to OPERATING PROCEDURE
FOR SETTING SPEECH SYNTHE-
SIS LANGUAGE.
Page 1-355

1-352
 DO NOT DISTURB
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify whether to print out the language • 895

information from Printer, when the language (1) 0 : Not available
indicated number is entered by the Multiline (2) 1 : Available
Terminal.

CM04 Specify the combination of Language Indicat- • Y=03

ed number and language information display (1) 1-9: Language Indicated No.
of the Multiline Terminal/language informa- (2) 01 : JPN (Japanese)
tion to be printed out by the printer. 02 : ENG (English)
06 : CHI (Chinese)
NOTE 1: The Language Indicated number 08 : KOR (Korean)
(1-9) means the number entered by CCC : Clear
the Multiline Terminal. NONE : See NOTE 2

NOTE 2: When the second data is set to

“NONE”, the following language
information (fixed sentence) is dis-
played or printed out according to
the Language Indicated number
entered by the Multiline Terminal.
Language Indicated number 1: JPN
Language Indicated number 2: ENG
Language Indicated number 3: GER
Language Indicated number 4: FR
Language Indicated number 5: SP
Language Indicated number 6: CHI
Language Indicated number 7: RUS
Language Indicated number 8: KOR
* For language information other
than listed above, Display/Print-
out is not provided.

END

1-353
 DO NOT DISTURB
CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

To provide the Preset Do Not Disturb Override by Station dialing/Function key on Multiline terminal, do
the following programming in addition to the programming of Do Not Disturb.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Select the function to Override by preset Sta- (1) 1014

tion dialing/Function key on Multiline termi- (2) 0 : Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward-
nal. ing-All Calls
1 : Do Not Disturb (DND)

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each sta- • Y=02

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow the Preset Do Not Disturb-Override. • Y=226

(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned
by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign an access code for Do Not Disturb- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Override. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A260: Do Not Disturb-Override

CM90 Assign the Do Not Disturb-Override function • Y=00

key on the Multiline terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1080: Do Not Disturb-Override

Assign the Do Not Disturb-Override function • Y=00

keys on the DESKCON. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6103: Wake Up/Do Not Disturb-Override
F6108: Do Not Disturb-Override

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

CPU blade (Speech Synthesis using a built-in Flash ROM)

1-354
 DO NOT DISTURB

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR SETTING SPEECH SYNTHESIS LANGUAGE

When setting the speech synthesis language for individual station (Default: English), do the following op-
eration.

To set speech synthesis language from a Multiline Terminal/Front Desk Terminal (with Check In):

1. Press the Check In key.

2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the LANGUAGE key.
5. Dial the language indicated number 1-9 assigned by command (CM04 Y=02).
6. Press the SET key.
or
1. Press the Check In key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the LANGUAGE key.
5. Dial the language indicated number 1-9 assigned by command (CM04 Y=02).
6. Press the SET key. Repeat Step 2-5 for additional station.

To set speech synthesis language from a Multiline Terminal/Front Desk Terminal (without Check In):

1. Press the LANGUAGE key.

2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the LANGUAGE key.
5. Dial the language indicated number 1-9 assigned by command (CM04 Y=02).
6. Press the SET key.
or
1. Press the LANGUAGE key.
2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key.
4. Press the LANGUAGE key.
5. Dial the language indicated number 1-9 assigned by command (CM04 Y=02).
6. Press the SET key. Repeat Step 2-5 for additional station.

1-355
 DO NOT DISTURB

To confirm speech synthesis language from Multiline Terminal/Front Desk Terminal:

1. Press the LANGUAGE key.

2. Dial the desired station number.
3. Press the SET key.

1-356
 DO NOT DISTURB-GROUP

DO NOT DISTURB-GROUP
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM4A Assign the calendar number to each system. • Y=00

(1) 100
(2) 00 : Calendar No. 1
01 : Calendar No. 2
02 : Calendar No. 3
03 : Calendar No. 4
CCC : Data clear
NONE : Ineffective
Assign the week schedule number to the date • Y=01 Calendar No. 1
to change schedule, in each calendar number • Y=02 Calendar No. 2
assigned by CM4A Y=00. • Y=03 Calendar No. 3
• Y=04 Calendar No. 4
NOTE 1: The schedule not related to the (1) XX ZZ: Date
weekly schedule (such as no-busi- XX : 01-12: Month
ness day) shall be “Peculiar Day”, ZZ : 01-31: Date
and the time schedule can be set (2) 10 : Week Schedule No. 0
directory for the month and the date. 11 : Week Schedule No. 1
12 : Week Schedule No. 2
NOTE 2: This command is shared by Auto- 13 : Week Schedule No. 3
matic Day/Night Mode Change, 20 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
Automatic RC Mode Select, Room 0
Cutoff-Group, Timed Notification 21 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
and Ecology Mode. 1
22 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
2
23 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
3
24 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
4
25 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
5
26 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
6
27 : Peculiar Day Time Schedule No.
7
CCC : Data clear
NONE : Week Schedule No. 0

1-357
 DO NOT DISTURB-GROUP
OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR SETTING SPEECH SYNTHESIS LANGUAGE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM4A Assign the time schedule number to each day • Y=10 (Week Schedule No. 0)
in the week schedule assigned by CM4A • Y=11 (Week Schedule No. 1)
Y=01-04. • Y=12 (Week Schedule No. 2)
• Y=13 (Week Schedule No. 3)
NOTE: This command is shared by Auto- (1) 0: Sunday
matic Day/Night Mode Change, 1: Monday
Automatic RC Mode Select, Room 2: Tuesday
Cutoff-Group, Timed Notification 3: Wednesday
and Ecology Mode. 4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
(2) 20 : Time Schedule No. 0
21 : Time Schedule No. 1
22 : Time Schedule No. 2
23 : Time Schedule No. 3
24 : Time Schedule No. 4
25 : Time Schedule No. 5
26 : Time Schedule No. 6
27 : Time Schedule No. 7
NONE : Time Schedule No. 0

Assign the time and the kind of system service • Y=20 (Time Schedule No. 0)
for the time schedule assigned by CM4A • Y=21 (Time Schedule No. 1)
Y=10-13 or Y=01-04. • Y=22 (Time Schedule No. 2)
• Y=23 (Time Schedule No. 3)
NOTE 1: The time of time schedule is speci- • Y=24 (Time Schedule No. 4)
fied in units of 5 minutes. Set the last • Y=25 (Time Schedule No. 5)
one digit of the “Minute” of the first • Y=26 (Time Schedule No. 6)
data in units of 0 or 5 (truncation). • Y=27 (Time Schedule No. 7)
(1) XX ZZ: Time
NOTE 2: Actually, the mode is changed after XX : 00-23: Hour
4-8 seconds of the assigned time. ZZ : 00-55: Minute NOTE 1, NOTE 2
(2) 50 : System Service No. 0
NOTE 3: This command is shared by Auto- 51 : System Service No. 1
matic Day/Night Mode Change, 52 : System Service No. 2
Automatic RC Mode Select, Room 53 : System Service No. 3
Cutoff-Group and Ecology Mode. 54 : System Service No. 4
55 : System Service No. 5
56 : System Service No. 6
57 : System Service No. 7
CCC : Data clear
NONE : No system service

1-358
 DO NOT DISTURB-GROUP
OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR SETTING SPEECH SYNTHESIS LANGUAGE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM4A Set the Do Not Disturb-Group for the system • Y=50 (System Service No. 0)
service assigned by CM4A Y=20-27. • Y=51 (System Service No. 1)
• Y=52 (System Service No. 2)
• Y=53 (System Service No. 3)
• Y=54 (System Service No. 4)
• Y=55 (System Service No. 5)
• Y=56 (System Service No. 6)
• Y=57 (System Service No. 7)
(1) 01: Do Not Disturb
(2) 0: To set

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re- • Y=02

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Do Not Disturb-Group in Service Re- • Y=019

striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM13 Provide Do Not Disturb-Group to required sta- • Y=00

tions. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Do Not Disturb-Group is set to these stations (2) 0: To provide
(assigned by this command) simultaneously by
operation from an Attendant Console.

END

To provide the Preset Do Not Disturb-Group Override by Station dialing/Programmable key on Multiline
terminal, refer to “To provide the Preset Do Not Disturb Override by Station dialing/Function key on Mul-
tiline terminal”. Page 1-354

1-359
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

(1) To provide the Change Power Supply ON/OFF for Ecology Mode to each tenant:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Assign the Change Power Supply ON/OFF for • Y=79

Ecology Mode to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : To provide
NOTE: This Power Supply ON/OFF 1 : Not provided
Change function is available only
for Digital Multiline Terminals (For
an other station such as PGD(2)-
U10, set the second data to “1”).

A B C E F

To provide the To provide the To provide the To provide the To provide the
Change Power Change Power Change Power Change Power Change Power
Supply ON/OFF for Supply ON/OFF for Supply ON/OFF for Supply ON/OFF for Supply ON/OFF for
Ecology Mode Ecology Mode by Ecology Mode by Ecology Mode by Ecology Mode by
simultaneously Access Code/ System Clock. External Key. PCPro.
when Day/Night Function Key.
Mode is changed.

1-360
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM65 Specify whether to provide the Change Power • Y=55

Supply ON/OFF for Ecology Mode to each (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
tenant simultaneously when Day/Night Mode (2) 0 : To provide
is changed. 1 : Not provided

Assign the setting of Power Supply ON/OFF to • Y=56 Day Mode

each tenant for Day Mode/Night Mode/Mode • Y=57 Night Mode
A/Mode B. • Y=58 Mode A
• Y=59 Mode B
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : Power Supply OFF
1 : Power Supply ON

END

NOTE: For the data assignment of the Ecology Mode by Day/Night Mode, refer to “DAY/NIGHT
MODE CHANGE BY STATION DIALING” Page 1-663 and “DAY/NIGHT MODE
CHANGE BY SYSTEM CLOCK”. Page 1-665

1-361
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each • Y=02

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Change Power Supply ON/OFF for • Y=231

Ecology Mode to each station by Access Code/ (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
Function Key. assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0: Allow

CM08 Allow Change Power Supply ON/OFF for (1) 1041

Ecology Mode to Attendant by Access Code. (2) 0: Allow

CM20 Assign an access code for Ecology Mode. • Y=0-3

(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A272: Ecology mode for the own tenant
A273: Ecology mode for the specified
tenant

CM90 Assign the Ecology Mode Function Key • Y=00

on the Digital Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F1700-F1763: Ecology Mode for the
Tenant 00-63

CM65 Assign the password for Ecology Mode. • Y=100

(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Password for Ecology
Mode
X : 0-9, A (*), B (#)
NONE : No data

END

1-362
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM4A Assign the Ecology Mode Switching Pattern to • Y=20 Time Schedule No. 0
each time schedule. • Y=21 Time Schedule No. 1
• Y=22 Time Schedule No. 2
NOTE 1: The time of time schedule is speci- • Y=23 Time Schedule No. 3
fied in units of 5 minutes. • Y=24 Time Schedule No. 4
Set the last one digit of the • Y=25 Time Schedule No. 5
“Minute” of the first data in units of • Y=26 Time Schedule No. 6
0 or 5 (truncation). • Y=27 Time Schedule No. 7
(1) XX ZZ: Time
NOTE 2: Usually, the mode is changed after XX : 00-23: Hour
4-8 seconds of the assigned time. ZZ : 00-55: Minute NOTE 1, NOTE 2
(2) 10 : Ecology Mode Switching
NOTE 3: This command is shared by Auto- Pattern 0
matic Day/Night Mode Change, 11 : Ecology Mode Switching
Timed Notification, Do Not Disturb- Pattern 1
Group and Room Cutoff-Group. 12 : Ecology Mode Switching
Pattern 2
NOTE 4: When the target of Calendar selec- 13 : Ecology Mode Switching
tion is “System” (set by CM4A Y= Pattern 3
00>100), this data is not effective. 14 : Ecology Mode Switching
Pattern 4
15 : Ecology Mode Switching
Pattern 5
16 : Ecology Mode Switching
Pattern 6
17 : Ecology Mode Switching
Pattern 7
18 : Ecology Mode Switching
Pattern 8
19 : Ecology Mode Switching
Pattern 9
NONE : No system service

1-363
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM65 Set the Power Supply ON/OFF for the Ecology • Y=60 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 0
Mode Switching Pattern assigned by CM4A • Y=61 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 1
Y=20-27: 10-19. • Y=62 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 2
• Y=63 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 3
• Y=64 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 4
• Y=65 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 5
• Y=66 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 6
• Y=67 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 7
• Y=68 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 8
• Y=69 Ecology Mode Switching Pattern 9
(1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) 0 : Power Supply OFF
1 : Power Supply ON

END

1-364
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

E DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Specify the External Key group number. • Y=66

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-63 : External Key Group No.

CM61 To provide External Keys for the Change • Y=00

Power Supply ON/OFF for Ecology Mode, (1) XX Z
assign a Tenant number to the External Key. XX: 00-63: External Key Group No.
assigned by CM12 Y=66
Z : 0/1: Circuit No.
(2) 00-63: Tenant No.

Assign the Change Power Supply ON/OFF for • Y=08

Ecology Mode by the External Key. (1) XX Z
XX: 00-63: External Key Group No.
assigned by CM12 Y=66
Z : 0/1: Circuit No.
(2) 0 : Effective
1 : Ineffective

END

1-365
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

F DESCRIPTION DATA

CMEC Specify whether to provide Change Power • Y=C

Supply ON/OFF for Ecology Mode to each (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
tenant by PCPro. (2) 0 : Power Supply OFF
1 : Power Supply ON

END

If you want to cancel the Ecology Mode of the all terminals in a system, do the following programming.
When press the External Key, all Digital Multiline Terminal in a system is changed to Power Supply ON.
And the following method becomes ineffective to change Power Supply OFF.
• Power Supply ON/OFF Change for Ecology Mode simultaneously when Day/Night Mode is
changed
• Power Supply ON/OFF Change for Ecology Mode by Access Code/Function Key
• Power Supply ON/OFF Change for Ecology Mode by System Clock
• Power Supply ON/OFF Change for Ecology Mode by External Key
• Power Supply ON/OFF Change for Ecology Mode by PCPro

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM61 To cancel the Ecology Mode of the all • Y=30

terminals in a system, assign the External Key (1) XX Z
as the Ecology Mode Cancel Key. XX: 00-63: External Key Group No.
assigned by CM12 Y=66
NOTE: When this data is set, the power Z : 0/1: Circuit No.
supply of the all terminals in a (2) 02: Ecology Mode Cancel Key
system can be returned to Power ON
by the operation of the External Key.
However, Power ON/OFF Change
is ineffective at a power failure.

END

NOTE: For data assignment of External Keys for Ecology Mode, refer to TENANT SERVICE.
Page 1-793

1-366
 ECOLOGY
ECOLOGY MODE (POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF MODE)

(2) To provide Power Supply OFF for Ecology Mode at a power failure:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Provide Power Supply ON/OFF Change for • Y=80

Ecology Mode when switching to battery (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
powered at a power failure. (2) 0: To provide

NOTE: Assign this data to only for the

station number of Digital Multiline
Terminal to Change Power Supply
ON/OFF (The other station such as
PGD(2)-U10, set the second data to
“1”).

END

1-367
 ECOLOGY
POWER SAVING MODE

POWER SAVING MODE

If the Dterm85 (Dterm Series i)/DT300/DT400/DT500 Series are not used for a certain time, the luminosity
of a lamp on the Multiline Terminal can be lower automatically for the power saving.
To provide the power saving for the Dterm85 (Dterm Series i)/DT300/DT400/DT500 Series, do the follow-
ing programming.

NOTE: This data is effective only for the Dterm85 (Dterm Series i)/DT300/DT400/DT500 Series. For IP
Station, this data is not effective.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the time to start the power saving to the • Y=44

CM12
required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : 1 minute later
1 : 2 minutes later
2 : 4 minutes later
3 : 8 minutes later
4 : 16 minutes later
5 : 32 minutes later
6 : 64 minutes later
7 : Not use the power saving

END

1-368
 ECOLOGY

TIMER FOR LCD BACKLIGHT

To specify the LCD backlight for DT300/DT400/DT500/DT700/DT800/DT900 Series,

do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C to each sta- • Y=07

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Assign the time that LCD backlight for • Y=485

DT300/DT400/DT500/DT700/DT800/DT900 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C
Series. assigned by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0 : Always off
1 : Always on
2 : 5 seconds
3 : 10 seconds
4 : 15 seconds
5 : 30 seconds
6 : 60 seconds
NONE : 10 seconds

NOTE 1: After this data setting, the assigned data is reflected to each terminal by resetting the ter-
minal or executing CM12 Y=29.

NOTE 2: When the second data is set to 0 (Always off), the LCD backlight setting of terminal side is
set to disable. To change the time for LCD backlight again, it is necessary to set the LCD
backlight setting of terminal to enable after resetting the time for LCD backlight and
applying the settings to each terminal.

NOTE 3: For DT750, DT730CG, DT830CG, DT930CG, DT920, DT920 (Self-Labeling) and DT930
(Touch Panel) when the second data is set to 0 (Always off), the backlight setting of termi-
nal side is fixed to “Level 4 (dark)”, the screen is lit by the lowest brightness without shut-
off of the screen. To change the time for LCD backlight or the brightness again, it is
necessary to set the LCD backlight setting of terminal to other than “Level 4 (dark)” after
resetting the time for LCD backlight and applying the settings to each terminal.

CM12 Make the LCD display setting to be applied to • Y=29

Multiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) 0: To execute

NOTE: When this data is set to 0 (To execute) after changing any system data relating to the LCD
display of Multiline Terminal, the changes are reflected to the Multiline Terminal. After the
reflection is completed, this data returns to 1 (Not executed).

END

1-369
 ECOLOGY

BRIGHTNESS REDUCTION IN NUMERICAL KEYPAD BACKLIGHT FOR

DT800/DT900 SERIES
[9300V3 STEP2 software required]

To allow the brightness reduction in numerical keypad backlight for DT800 Series (except DT820) and
DT900 Series (except DT920), do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C toeach sta- • Y=07

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Allow Brightness reduction in numerical key- • Y=493

pad backlight for DT830/DT830CG/ (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C
DT830DG/DT930CG in Service Restriction assigned by CM12 Y=07
Class A assigned by CM12 Y=07. (2) 0: Allow

NOTE: A reset of the terminal (CM12 Y=

89) is required when this command is
set/changed.

END

1-370
 EMERGENCY CALL NOTIFICATION

EMERGENCY CALL NOTIFICATION

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of ISDN-PRI/ISDN-BRI/TIE LINE, do the following programming.

As for the ISDN-PRI/ISDN-BRI programming, refer to ISDN FEATURES. Page 3-1

As for the TIE LINE programming, refer to TIE LINES. Page 1-797

(1) Programming for Emergency Notification per system

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign an Area Code Development Pattern • Y=A000

number to each LCR Group. (1) 0-2: LCR Group 0-2
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-
tern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area • Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development
code for the Area Code Development Pattern Pattern No. 5-7
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000. (1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Provide Emergency Notification on the Multi- • Y=5000-5255

line Terminal/DESKCON. LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 166: Emergency Notification on Multiline
Terminal/DESKCON
(2) 0: To provide

CM51 Assign the destination Multiline Terminal/ • Y=16

DESKCON of Emergency Notification. (1) 04: Multiline Terminal/DESKCON No. 1
for Emergency Notification
NOTE: Emergency Notification can be pro- 05: Multiline Terminal/DESKCON No. 2
vided on the maximum two Multiline for Emergency Notification
Terminals/DESKCONs per system. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000-E007: ATTCON No. 0-7

1-371
 EMERGENCY CALL NOTIFICATION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign the Emergency Notification key. • Y=00

(1) For Multiline Terminal:
My Line No. + , + Key No.
For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F5025: Emergency Notification
For DESKCON:
F6124: Emergency Notification NOTE

NOTE: Do not assign this data to the

Multi-Function keys.

To allow a station/attendant to interrupt the • Y=00

emergency call, assign the Executive Over- (1) For Multiline Terminal:
ride/Busy Verification key on the Multiline My Line No. + , + Key No.
Terminal/DESKCON. For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F0006: Executive Override
For DESKCON:
F6107: Busy Verification

CM08 Specify whether to stop the Emergency Notifi- (1) 1413

cation on Multiline Terminal/DESKCON (2) 0 : To stop
when the emergency call is finished. 1 : To continue (30 sec.)
[9300V5 software required]

CM30 To display the local office code on the Multi- • Y=19

line Terminal/DESKCON when an emergency (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
call is made in tandem connection, assign the (2) XXXX: Trunk ID Code (Local Office
local office code to the incoming trunk. Code)

END

1-372
 EMERGENCY CALL NOTIFICATION

(2) Programming for Emergency Notification per location

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign an Area Code Development Pattern • Y=A000

number to each LCR Group. (1) 0-2: LCR Group 0-2
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-
tern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area • Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development
code for the Area Code Development Pattern Pattern No. 5-7
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000. (1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Provide Emergency Notification on the Multi- • Y=5000-5255

line Terminal/DESKCON. LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 166: Emergency Notification on Multiline
Terminal/DESKCON
(2) 0: To provide

CM0B Assign the location number for stations/ • Y=1XX (VOIP Port [1] + Unit No. [01-50])
VoIPDB (calling station). (1) 10
(2) 00-63: Location No. 00-63 for calling sta-
NOTE: This data is effective when the loca- tion
tion number is not assigned by
CM12 Y=39, 50.

CM12 Assign the location number of IP Station for • Y=39

local connection. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63 for calling
station
NONE : Location No. 00

Assign the location number of IP Station for • Y=50

Remote Connection, if required. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63 for calling
station
NONE : Location No. 00

1-373
 EMERGENCY CALL NOTIFICATION

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM67 Assign the destination Multiline Terminal/ • Y=32

DESKCON of Emergency Notification. (1) 00-63: Location No. 00-63 assigned by
CM0B Y=1XX>10/CM12 Y=39/50
NOTE: Emergency Notification can be pro- (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
vided on the maximum two Multiline E000-E007: ATTCON No. 0-7
Terminals/DESKCONs per loca-
tion. • Y=33
(1) 00-63: Location No. 00-63 assigned by
CM0B Y=1XX>10/CM12 Y=39/50
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000-E007: ATTCON No. 0-7

CM90 Assign the Emergency Notification key. • Y=00

(1) For Multiline Terminal:
My Line No. + , + Key No.
For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F5025: Emergency Notification
For DESKCON:
F6124: Emergency Notification NOTE

NOTE: Do not assign this data to the

Multi-Function keys.

To allow a station/attendant to interrupt the • Y=00

call, assign the Executive Override/Busy Veri- (1) For Multiline Terminal:
fication key on the Multiline Terminal/DESK- My Line No. + , + Key No.
CON. For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F0006: Executive Override
For DESKCON:
F6107: Busy Verification

1-374
 EMERGENCY CALL NOTIFICATION

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify whether to stop the Emergency Notifi- (1) 1413

cation to each location of Multiline Terminal/ (2) 0 : To stop
DESKCON assigned by CM67 Y=32/33 when 1 : To continue (30 sec.)
the emergency call is finished.
[9300V5 software required]

CM30 To display the local office code on the Multi- • Y=19

line Terminal/DESKCON when an emergency (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
call is made in tandem connection, assign the (2) XXXX: Trunk ID Code (Local Office
local office code to the incoming trunk. Code)

END

1-375
 ENHANCED 911

ENHANCED 911
[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of ISDN-PRI/ISDN-BRI/TIE LINE, do the following programming.

As for the ISDN-PRI/ISDN-BRI programming, refer to ISDN FEATURES. Page 3-1

As for the TIE LINE programming, refer to TIE LINES. Page 1-797

NOTE: In the Tie Line programming, Unit No. 01 must be assigned to CM05 Y=0, CM10 Y=00 for ODT
blade because the ODT trunk for Enhanced 911 can be accommodated in Unit01 only.

(1) Programming for transmitting a caller's emergency service identification information to an Enhanced
911 Emergency system

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide the trunk route with Enhanced 911. • Y=038

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: Available

Specify the sending method of calling number • Y=129

to the network with Enhanced 911. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 3: Enhanced 911

Set the trunk route that no answer signal ar- • Y=004

rives from the distant office for outgoing con- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
nection. (2) 3: No Answer Signal arrives (Polarity Re-
versal is ignored)

Specify incoming connection signaling. • Y=009

BLADE RESET
NOTE: To provide Enhanced 911, the in- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
coming connection signaling for (2) 15 : Ring Down
ODT blade must be set to Ring
Down.

Provide SMDR/Centralized Billing for outgo- • Y=014

ing call. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : To provide

1-376
 ENHANCED 911

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Specify sender start condition. • Y=020

BLADE RESET
NOTE: To provide Enhanced 911, the send- (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
er start condition for ODT blade (2) 15 : Timing Start
must be set to Wink Start.

Specify the trunk seizure pattern for this fea- • Y=036

ture. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: After dialing maximum number of digits

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern • Y=076

number for maximum digit analysis. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-07: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 0-7

CM85 Define the maximum number of sending digits • Y=0-7

which can be sent to the network. (1) X-XXX...: Area Code/Office Code or
its part (Maximum 8 digits)
(2) 01-24 : 1-24 digits
25-79 : 25-79 digits

CM20 Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3. • Y=0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(Maximum 4 digits)
(2) A126-A129: Access Code for LCR Group
0-3

CM8A Assign the LCR data, as needed. • Y=XXXX

(1) See CM8A in the Command Manual
(2) See CM8A in the Command Manual

1-377
 ENHANCED 911

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the calling party number (station num- • Y=12

ber) sent to the network. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) X-XXXX: Calling Party No. (Station No.)
NOTE 1: “*”, “#” are not available for the
sending number.

NOTE 2: The calling party number is sent to

the network as follows.

XXX········XXX + YYYY
Local office code Station No.
assigned by assigned by
CM50 Y=05 CM12 Y=12

Assign the Local Office Code Table number • Y=13

for sending the calling office code to the net- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
work. (2) 00-14: Local Office Code Table No. 00-14
15 : No data

CM08 Send ANI signal to the network on Enhanced (1) 474: Enhanced 911
911. (2) 0: To send

Specify whether the Sender Tone will be sent (1) 475: Sending of Sender Tone
when a call originated, or not. (2) 0 : Not sent (No tone)
1 : To send

1-378
 ENHANCED 911

To provide calling party information transfer on tandem call from CCIS with no ANI signal or a tie line
trunk:

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Assign the Local Office Code Table number • Y=003

used for tandem connection. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 00-14: Local Office Code Table No. 00-14
NOTE 1: This command must be assigned to 15 : Not send calling number
the trunk route with Enhanced 911.

NOTE 2: The selected table number must be

different from the tables selected by
CM12 Y=13.

CM50 Assign the calling party number (Local Office • Y=05

Code) for ANI function. (1) 00-14: Local Office Code Table No.
assigned by CM12 Y=13
(2) X-XXX...: Sending No.
(Maximum 12 digits)
NOTE 1: “*”, “#” are not available for the sending number.

NOTE 2: When originating from Attendant Console, assign Local Office Code as follows:
• For ATT Group No. 0: Table No. 10
• For ATT Group No. 1: Table No. 11
• For ATT Group No. 2: Table No. 12
• For ATT Group No. 3: Table No. 13

NOTE 3: For tandem connection, assign Local Office Code as follows:

• CM35 Y=003>XX: 00: Table No. 00
• CM35 Y=003>XX: 01: Table No. 01
~

• CM35 Y=003>XX: 14: Table No. 14

• CM35 Y=003>XX: 15-63: No ANI signal

To provide calling party information transfer on tandem call from CCIS with ANI signal:

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM35 Provide calling party information transfer to • Y=145

the Enhanced 911 route on tandem call from (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
CCIS. (2) 0: To provide

END

1-379
 ENHANCED 911

(2) Programming for 911 Notification to DESKCON/Multiline Terminal

To provide 911 Notification per system:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign an Area Code Development Pattern • Y=A000

number to each LCR Group. (1) 0-2: LCR Group 0-2
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-
tern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area • Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development
code for the Area Code Development Pattern Pattern No. 5-7
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000. (1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Provide 911 Notification on the Multiline Ter- • Y=5000-5255

minal/DESKCON. LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 166: Emergency Notification on Multiline
Terminal/DESKCON
(2) 0: To provide

CM51 Assign the destination Multiline Terminal/ • Y=16

DESKCON of 911 Notification. (1) 04: Multiline Terminal/DESKCON No. 1
for Emergency Notification
NOTE: 911 Notification can be provided on 05: Multiline Terminal/DESKCON No. 2
the maximum two Multiline Termi- for Emergency Notification
nals/DESKCONs per system. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000-E007: ATTCON No. 0-7

CM90 Assign the 911 Notification key. • Y=00

(1) For Multiline Terminal:
My Line No. + , + Key No.
For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F5025: Emergency Notification
For DESKCON:
F6124: Emergency Notification NOTE

NOTE: Do not assign this data to the

Multi-Function keys.

1-380
 ENHANCED 911

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 To allow a station/attendant to interrupt the 911 • Y=00

call, assign the Executive Override/Busy Veri- (1) For Multiline Terminal:
fication key on the Multiline Terminal/DESK- My Line No. + , + Key No.
CON. For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F0006: Executive Override
For DESKCON:
F6107: Busy Verification

CM08 Specify whether to stop the 911 Notification (1) 1413

on Multiline Terminal/DESKCON when the (2) 0 : To stop
911 call is finished. 1 : To continue (30 sec.)
[9300V5 software required]

CM30 To display the local office code on the Multi- • Y=19

line Terminal/DESKCON when the 911 call is (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
made in tandem connection, assign the local (2) XXXX: Trunk ID Code (Local Office
office code to the incoming trunk. Code)

END

To provide 911 Notification per location:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign an Area Code Development Pattern • Y=A000

number to each LCR Group. (1) 0-2: LCR Group 0-2
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-
tern No. 5-7

1-381
 ENHANCED 911

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign a Route Pattern number to each area • Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development
code for the Area Code Development Pattern Pattern No. 5-7
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000. (1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Provide 911 Notification on the Multiline Ter- • Y=5000-5255

minal/DESKCON. LCR Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 166: Emergency Notification on Multiline
Terminal/DESKCON
(2) 0: To provide

CM0B Assign the location number for station/ • Y=1XX (VOIP Port [1] + Unit No. [01-50])
VoIPDB (calling station). (1) 10
(2) 00-63: Location No. 00-63 for calling sta-
NOTE: This data is effective when the loca- tion
tion number is not assigned by
CM12 Y=39, 50.

CM12 Assign the location number of IP Station for • Y=39

local connection. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63 for calling
station
NONE : Location No. 00

Assign the location number of IP Station for • Y=50

Remote Connection, if required. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-63 : Location No. 00-63 for calling
station
NONE : Location No. 00

CM67 Assign the destination Multiline Terminal/ • Y=32

DESKCON of 911 Notification. (1) 00-63: Location No. 00-63 assigned by
CM0B Y=1XX>10/CM12 Y=39/50
NOTE: 911 Notification can be provided on (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
the maximum two Multiline Termi- E000-E007: ATTCON No. 0-7
nals/DESKCONs per location.
• Y=33
(1) 00-63: Location No. 00-63 assigned by
CM0B Y=1XX>10/CM12 Y=39/50
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
E000-E007: ATTCON No. 0-7

1-382
 ENHANCED 911

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM90 Assign the 911 Notification key. • Y=00

(1) For Multiline Terminal:
My Line No. + , + Key No.
For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F5025: Emergency Notification
For DESKCON:
F6124: Emergency Notification NOTE

NOTE: Do not assign this data to the

Multi-Function keys.

To allow a station/attendant to interrupt the 911 • Y=00

call, assign the Executive Override/Busy Veri- (1) For Multiline Terminal:
fication key on the Multiline Terminal/DESK- My Line No. + , + Key No.
CON. For DESKCON:
DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) For Multiline Terminal:
F0006: Executive Override
For DESKCON:
F6107: Busy Verification

CM08 Specify whether to stop the 911 Notification to (1) 1413

each location of Multiline Terminal/DESK- (2) 0 : To stop
CON assigned by CM67 Y=32/33 when the 1 : To continue (30 sec.)
911 call is finished.
[9300V5 software required]

CM30 To display the local office code on the Multi- • Y=19

line Terminal/DESKCON when the 911 call is (1) 000-511: Trunk No.
made in tandem connection, assign the local (2) XXXX: Trunk ID Code (Local Office
office code to the incoming trunk. Code)

END

1-383
 EXECUTIVE CALLING

EXECUTIVE CALLING
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Provide VIP class for Executive calling feature • Y=21

to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0: To provide

END

1-384
 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE

EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to required • Y=02

stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Executive Override in Service Restric- • Y=005 Calling Side

tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. • Y=009 Called Side
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
NOTE: The setting of data for both called assigned by CM12 Y=02
side and calling side of Executive (2) 1 : Allow
Override (CM15 Y=005 and CM15
Y=009) are required.

CM20 Assign the access code for Executive Override. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A006: Executive Override

CM90 Assign an Executive Override key to the Mul- • Y=00

tiline Terminal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0006: Executive Override

CM08 Specify the Waiting Tone sent to connected (1) 045

parties during Executive Override. (2) 0 : Only once
1 : Every 4 seconds

Specify whether the Warning Tone is sent to (1) 076

C.O. line, when a station overrides a busy sta- (2) 0 : To send
tion which is connected to a C.O. line. 1 : Not send

NOTE: Set this data when using

the Executive Override
feature, if necessary.

END

1-385
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

PROGRAMMING

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: When the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is (2) 10: DLC blade
accommodated to the Remote Unit,
execute the system data copy by
CMEC Y=8 before executing the
blade reset.
CM10 Assign the station number connected to • Y=00
PGD(2)-U10 ADP to its associated Physical (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Port number. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
BLADE RESET YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-16: Circuit No.
(2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Station No.
CM13 For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=03
ADP, set the Message Waiting/Stored Call (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
Record lamps not to be lit. (2) 1: Not provided

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=41

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=49

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=60

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=61

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

1-386
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Allow the accommodation of PGD(2)-U10 • Y=63

ADP. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
BLADE RESET (2) 0: To accommodate

NOTE 1: Set this data only for a Base Port No. (Circuit No. 01) of DLC blade.

NOTE 2: Whether the following equipment can be accommodated to the same DLC blade or not de-
pends on this data.
- When the second data is set to “0”
Accommodatable : DT300/DT400/DT500/Dterm85/PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Unaccommodatable: DESKCON
- When the second data is set to “1”
Accommodatable : DT300/DT400/DT500/Dterm85/DESKCON
Unaccommodatable: PGD(2)-U10 ADP

NOTE 3: When the second data is set to 0, and accommodating DT300/DT400 series DESI-less to
the same DLC blade to which PGD(2)-U10 ADP is accommodated, the Line Key of the
DT300/DT400 series DESI-less does not light up (however, Character Display or Icon
Display on the DESI-less screen is provided).
CM12 Assign the kind of PGD(2)-U10 station (CH1) • Y=65
for Paging. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 1: Paging
NOTE: After this data setting, a reset of the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Unplugged and
plugged in/Blade Reset) is required.

Assign the kind of paging to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=67

station (CH1). (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Calling only (not using paging answer)
NOTE: This data is valid when 2nd data: 1 1 : Non-delay answer
(Paging) is assigned in CM12 Y=65. 2 : Non-delay and delay answer
3 : Ordinary station

Specify the Paging Zone to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=68

station (CH1). (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-09 : Paging Zone No. assigned by
NOTE: This data is valid when 2nd data: 1 CM20 Y=0-3: A070-A079
(Paging) is assigned in CM12 Y=65. NONE : No data

1-387
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify whether the SST is sent to a paging (1) 732

trunk when a speaker paging is seized. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

Specify whether to provide the Paging Answer (1) 157

by PGD(2)-U10 Station Dialing (only in the (2) 0 : To provide
case of Delay and Non-delay answer). 1 : Not provided

NOTE: The Paging Answer by the following

methods is applied depending on the
setting of this command.
- When the second data is set to
“0”: PGD(2)-U10 station number
assigned by CM10 Y=00.
- When the second data is set to
“1”: Paging Zone 0-9 assigned by
CM20 Y=0-3: A070-A079.

CM20 Assign the access code for Paging Answer. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A070-A079: For Paging Answer
(Zone 0-9)

CM44 Assign the paging function to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=00

ADP. (1) XX Y
XX: 00-31: Relay Group No.
Y : 0-3: Circuit No. of PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(2) 02XX: Speaker Paging Start
XX : 00-09: Speaker Paging Zone 0-9

Associate the PGD(2)-U10 station number • Y=01

with the Relay Group number. (1) 00-31: Relay Group No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: PGD(2)-U10 Station No.
NONE : No data

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Paging • Y=02

Access to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

1-388
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM15 Allow Paging Access in Service Restriction • Y=08

Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM35 Allow Paging Access from trunk. • Y=302

(1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 1 : Allow

CM41 Assign the forced release timer when the Pag- • Y=0
ing Trunk is not released after seizing the (1) 120
trunk. (2) 00-99: 0-396 seconds (4 second incre-
ments)
NOTE: If the 2nd data is set to 00, forced If no data is set, the default setting is 180 sec-
release is not performed. onds.

Assign the time to start the Chime for Speaker • Y=0

Paging. (1) 212
(2) 01-20 : 1-20 seconds (1 second incre-
ment)
NONE : Immediate start

NOTE: In a normal operation, leave this command default because this timer does not require any
setting change. Depending on the paging equipment, the beginning of a chime sound may
not be heard because it takes time from “Calling” to “Answer”. In such cases, make an
adjustment using this timer.

END

1-389
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

To use the dual port mode, do the following programming (the following programming is not required
when using the single port mode).

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM10 Assign the station number connected to • Y=00

PGD(2)-U10 ADP (CH2) to its associated (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Physical Port number. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
BLADE RESET YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 17-32: Circuit No.
NOTE: The setting of the Dual port mode is (2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Station No.
required when using 2 paging equip-
ment on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
For details, refer to “Setting Meth-
od of Port number/Station number
in Dual port mode” in CM10 of the
Command Manual.

CM13 For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=03

ADP, set the Message Waiting/Stored Call Re- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
cord lamps not to be lit. (2) 1: Not provided

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=41

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=49

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD (2)-U10 • Y=60

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD (2)-U10 • Y=61

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

1-390
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the kind of PGD(2)-U10 station (CH2) • Y=65

for Paging. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 1: Paging
NOTE: After this data setting, a reset of the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Unplugged and
plugged in/Blade Reset) is required.

Assign the kind of paging to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=67

station (CH2). (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Calling only (not using paging answer)
NOTE: This data is valid when 2nd data: 1 1 : Non-delay answer
(Paging) is assigned in CM12 Y=65. 2 : Non-delay and delay answer
3 : Ordinary station

Specify the Paging Zone to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=68

station (CH2). (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-09 : Paging Zone No. assigned by
NOTE: This data is valid when 2nd data: 1 CM20 Y=0-3: A070-A079
(Paging) is assigned in CM12 Y=65. NONE : No data

CM20 Assign the access code for Paging Answer. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A070-A079: For Paging Answer
(Zone 0-9)

CM44 Assign the paging function to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=00

ADP. (1) XX Y
XX: 00-31: Relay Group No.
Y : 0-3: Circuit No. of PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(2) 02XX: Speaker Paging Start
XX : 00-09: Speaker Paging Zone 0-9

Associate the PGD(2)-U10 station number • Y=01

with the Relay Group number. (1) 00-31: Relay Group No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: PGD(2)-U10 Station No.
NONE : No data

1-391
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Provide the connection with Dual port mode to • Y=32

the PGD(2)-U10 ADP (CH1). (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0: To connect

Assign the port mode of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP • Y=33

(CH1) to Dual port mode. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
BLADE RESET (2) 0: Dual port mode

Assign the station connected to Dual port • Y=34

mode of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP (CH2). (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Station connected to Dual port mode
of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP
1 : Station not connected to the PGD(2)-
U10 ADP

END

1-392
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

Setting Example
• Only when using the single port mode
* PGD(2)-U10 station number (CH1) shall be “350”.

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

05 0 0101 10 DLC blade accommodation setting.
10 00 010101 F350 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number to
“350”.
13 03 350 1 Set the Message Waiting/Stored Call
Record lamps not to be lit.
13 41 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a station call.
13 49 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered station call.
13 60 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a trunk call.
13 61 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered trunk call.
13 63 350 0 Allow the accommodation of PGD(2)-U10
ADP.
NOTE: Set this data only for a Base Port
of DLC blade.
12 65 350 1 Assign the kind of PGD(2)-U10 station to
“Paging”.
12 68 350 00 Assign the Paging Zone No. to “00”.
44 00 000 0200 Assign the Speaker Paging Zone 0.
44 01 00 350 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number to
Relay Group number.
08 - 732 0 Set the SST to paging trunk.
E0 3 0101 0101 DLC blade reset.
• When not using the Paging Answer
12 67 350 0 Assign the kind of paging to “Calling only”.
20 0 3 803 Assign the Access Code for Paging.
Continued on next page

1-393
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

• When using the Paging Answer
12 67 350 1/2 Assign the kind of paging to “Non-delay
answer” or “Non-delay and delay answer”.
08 - 157 0/1 Specify whether provide the Paging
Answer by dialing PGD(2)-U10 station
number.
20 0 3 803 Assign the Access Code for Paging.
NOTE: This Access Code is used for Pag-
ing/Paging Answer when provid-
ing the Paging Answer with
PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CM08>157: 0).
20 0 XX A070 Assign the Access Code for Paging Answer
NOTE 2 (Paging Zone 0).
NOTE 1: Assign this data when not provid-
ing the Paging Answer with
PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CM08>157: 1).
NOTE 2: Assign an arbitrary number for
the first data.

1-394
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

• When using the single port mode and dual port mode
* PGD(2)-U10 station number (CH1) shall be “350” (CH1) and “370” (CH2).

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

Setting for “350” (CH1)
05 0 0101 10 DLC blade accommodation setting.
10 00 010101 F350 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CH1) to “350”.
13 03 350 1 Set the Message Waiting/Stored Call
Record lamps not to be lit.
13 41 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a station call.
13 49 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered station call.
13 60 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a trunk call.
13 61 350 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered trunk call.
13 63 350 0 Allow the accommodation of PGD(2)-U10
ADP.
NOTE: Set this data only for a Base Port
of DLC blade.
12 65 350 1 Assign the kind of PGD(2)-U10 station
(CH1) to “Paging”.
12 68 350 00 Assign the Paging Zone No. to “00”.
44 00 000 0200 Assign the Speaker Paging Zone 0.
44 01 00 350 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number to
Relay Group number.
08 - 732 0 Set the SST to paging trunk.
E0 3 0101 0101 DLC blade reset.
Continued on next page

1-395
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

• When not using the Paging Answer
12 67 350 0 Assign the kind of paging to “Calling only”.
20 0 3 803 Assign the Access Code for Paging.
• When using the Paging Answer
12 67 350 1/2 Assign the kind of paging to “Non-delay
answer” or “Non-delay and delay answer”.
08 - 157 0/1 Specify whether provide the Paging
Answer by dialing PGD(2)-U10 station
number.
20 0 3 803 Assign the Access Code for Paging.
NOTE: This Access Code is used for Pag-
ing/Paging Answer when provid-
ing the Paging Answer with
PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CM08>157: 0).
20 0 XX A070 Assign the Access Code for Paging Answer
NOTE 2 (Paging Zone 0).
NOTE 1: Assign this data when not provid-
ing the Paging Answer with
PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CM08>157: 1).
NOTE 2: Assign an arbitrary number for
the first data.
Continued on next page

1-396
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

Setting for “370” (CH2)
10 00 010117 F370 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CH2) to “370”.
13 03 370 1 Set the Message Waiting/Stored Call
Record lamps not to be lit.
13 41 370 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a station call.
13 49 370 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered station call.
13 60 370 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a trunk call.
13 61 370 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered trunk call.
12 65 370 1 Assign the kind of PGD(2)-U10 station
(CH2) to “Paging”.
12 68 370 01 Assign the Paging Zone No. to “01”.
44 00 011 0201 Assign the Speaker Paging Zone 1.
44 01 01 370 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number to
Relay Group number.
13 32 350 0 Provide the connection with dual port mode
to the PGD(2)-U10 station number (CH1).
13 33 350 0 Assign the port mode of the PGD(2)-U10
station number (CH1) to dual port mode.
13 34 370 0 Set the PGD(2)-U10 station number (CH2)
as the station connected to the PGD(2)-U10
ADP.
E0 3 0101 0101 DLC blade reset.
• When not using the Paging Answer
12 67 370 0 Assign the kind of paging to “Calling only”.
20 0 3 803 Assign the Access Code for Paging.
Continued on next page

1-397
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

• When using the Paging Answer
12 67 370 1/2 Assign the kind of paging to “Non-delay
answer” or “Non-delay and delay answer”.
20 0 3 803 Assign the Access Code for Paging.
NOTE: This Access Code is used for Pag-
ing/Paging Answer when provid-
ing the Paging Answer with
PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CM08>157: 0).
20 0 XX A071 Assign the Access Code for Paging Answer
NOTE 2 (Paging Zone 1).
NOTE 1: Assign this data when not provid-
ing the Paging Answer with
PGD(2)-U10 station number
(CM08>157: 1).
NOTE 2: Assign an arbitrary number for
the first data.

1-398
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

To use the relay circuit with an amplifier (Multiple Zone Relay), do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
NOTE: When the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is (2) 10: DLC blade
accommodated to the Remote Unit,
execute the system data copy by
CMEC Y=8 before executing the
blade reset.

CM10 Assign the station number connected to • Y=00

PGD(2)-U10 ADP to its associated Physical (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Port number. XX: 01-50: Unit No.
YY: 01-18: Slot No.
ZZ : 01-16: Circuit No.
(2) FX-FXXXXXXXX: Station No.

CM13 For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=03

ADP, set the Message Waiting/Stored Call Re- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
cord lamps not to be lit. (2) 1: Not provided

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=41

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=49

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered station call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=60

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
answering a trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

For the station connected to PGD(2)-U10 • Y=61

ADP, set the call history not to be stored when (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
handling an unanswered trunk call. (2) 1: Not stored

1-399
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Allow the accommodation of PGD(2)-U10 • Y=63

ADP. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
BLADE RESET (2) 0 : To accommodate
1 : Not accommodated

NOTE 1: Set this data only for a Base Port No. (Circuit No. 01) of DLC blade.

NOTE 2: Whether the following equipment can be accommodated to the same DLC blade or not de-
pends on this data.
- When the second data is set to “0”
Accommodatable : DT300/DT400/DT500/Dterm85/PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Unaccommodatable: DESKCON
- When the second data is set to “1”
Accommodatable : DT300/DT400/DT500/Dterm85/DESKCON

NOTE 3: When the second data is set to 0, and accommodating DT300/DT400 series DESI-less to
the same DLC blade to which PGD(2)-U10 ADP is accommodated, the Line Key of the
DT300/DT400 series DESI-less does not light up (however, Character Display or Icon
Display on the DESI-less screen is provided).

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number to the (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
required Port number. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

CM44 Assign the paging function to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=00

ADP. (1) XX Y
XX: 00-31: Relay Group No.
Y : 0-3: Circuit No. of PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(2) 02XX: Speaker Paging Start
XX : 00-09: Speaker Paging Zone 0-9

Associate the PGD(2)-U10 station number • Y=01

with the Relay Group number. (1) 00-31: Relay Group No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: PGD(2)-U10 Station No.
NONE : No data

CM12 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 Station number to • Y=71

control the relay specified by an intervening (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
Virtual Line Station. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: PGD(2)-U10 Station No.
NONE : No data

1-400
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Assign the relay when using a Paging on Call (1) 898
Forwarding. (2) 0 : To operate the relay specified by the
intervening station
NOTE: This data is effective only when the 1 : To operate the relay of the PGD(2)-
intervening station is a Virtual Line U10 Station (to use a Paging)
Station.

CM18 Assign the station numbers included in the • Y=0

station hunting group, one by one, as shown (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by
below. CM11
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by
Station Hunting-Terminal CM11
1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B
2nd Operation: (1) Station B (2) Station C

Station Hunting-Circular
1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B
2nd Operation: (1) Station B (2) Station C
3rd Operation : (1) Station C (2) Station A

Specify the kind of station included in the • Y=1

station hunting group. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by
CM11
(2) 0 : Member station of Station Hunting-
Terminal
1 : Pilot station of Station Hunting-Ter-
minal, all stations of Station Hunting-
Circular

CME5 Set make-busy to the Virtual Line Station. (1) Y=0

(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
0 : Make-busy set
1 : Make-busy cancel

1-401
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the kind of PGD(2)-U10 station. • Y=65

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE: After this data setting, a reset of the (2) 1: Paging
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Unplugged and 3: External relay/External key only
plugged in/Blade Reset) is required.

Assign the kind of paging to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=67

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Calling only (not using paging answer)
NOTE: This data is valid when 2nd data: 1 1 : Non-delay answer
(Paging) is assigned in CM12 Y=65. 2 : Non-delay and delay answer
3 : Ordinary station

Specify the Paging Zone to the PGD(2)-U10 • Y=68

station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 00-09 : Paging Zone No. assigned by
NOTE: This data is valid when 2nd data: 1 CM20 Y=0-3: A070-A079
(Paging) is assigned in CM12 Y=65. NONE : No data

CM08 Specify whether the SST is sent to a paging (1) 732

trunk when a speaker paging is seized. (2) 0 : To send
1 : Not sent

Specify whether provide the Paging Answer (1) 157

by PGD(2)-U10 Station Dialing (only in the (2) 0 : To provide
case of Delay and Non-delay answer). 1 : Not provided

CM20 Assign the access code for Paging Access and • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Answer. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A070-A079: For Paging Answer
(Zone 0-9)

END

1-402
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

Setting Example
Connect one PGD(2)-U10 to use each connection as the “Paging” and “Relay Circuit” and specify the
relay circuit using the Station Hunting feature.
The setting example is as follows.

Speaker
(1) PGD(2)-U10 (Paging)

Station 200
Station 800 (Member station of
(2)
Station Hunting Terminal)
Paging Zone 0
Relay Group 00
Relay Circuit 0 (Relay of Paging Zone 0)
(3)

Virtual Station 801 (Pilot station of

Station Hunting Terminal)
Paging Zone 1
(4) Relay Group 00
Relay Circuit 1 (Relay of Paging Zone 1)

Virtual Station 802 (Pilot station of

Station Hunting Terminal)
Paging Zone 2
Relay Group 00
Relay Circuit 2 (Relay of Paging Zone 2)

Virtual Station 803 (Pilot station of

Station Hunting Terminal)
Paging Zone 3
Relay Group 00
Relay Circuit 3 (Relay of Paging Zone 3)

(1) If dialing to Station 800 from Station 200, the Relay Circuit 0 (Paging Zone 0) of Station 800
functions.
(2) If dialing to Virtual Station 801 from Station 200, the Relay Circuit 1 (Paging Zone 1) of Station 800
functions.
(3) If dialing to Virtual Station 802 from Station 200, the Relay Circuit 2 (Paging Zone 2) of Station 800
functions.
(4) If dialing to Virtual Station 803 from Station 200, the Relay Circuit 3 (Paging Zone 3) of Station 800
functions.

1-403
 EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

05 0 0101 10 DLC blade accommodation setting.
10 00 010101 F800 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number
to “800”.
13 03 800 1 Set the Message Waiting/Stored Call
Record lamps not to be lit.
13 41 800 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a station call.
13 49 800 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered station call.
13 60 800 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
answering a trunk call.
13 61 800 1 Set the call history not to be stored when
handling an unanswered trunk call.
13 63 800 0 Allow the accommodation of PGD(2)-
U10 ADP.
E0 3 0101 0101 DLC blade reset.
12 65 800 1 Assign the kind of PGD(2)-U10 station
number 800 to “Paging”.
12 67 800 0 Assign the kind of paging of PGD(2)-
U10 station number 800 to “Calling
only”.
12 68 800 00 Assign thePGD(2)-U10 station number
800 to “Paging Zone 0”.
12 68 801 01 Assign the Virtual station number 801 to
the Paging Zone 1.
12 68 802 02 Assign the Virtual station number 802 to
the Paging Zone 2.
12 68 803 03 Assign the Virtual station number 803 to
the Paging Zone 3.
11 – 0001 801 Assign the Virtual station number 801.
11 – 0002 802 Assign the Virtual station number 802.
Continued on next page

1-404
 Chapter 1

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

11 – 0003 803 Assign the Virtual station number 803.
44 01 00 800 Assign the PGD(2)-U10 station number
800 to the Relay Group number 00.
44 00 000 0200 Assign the Paging Zone 0 to the Circuit
number 0 of the Relay Group number 00.
44 00 001 0201 Assign the Paging Zone 1 to the Circuit
number 1 of the Relay Group number 00.
44 00 002 0202 Assign the Paging Zone 2 to the Circuit
number 2 of the Relay Group number 00.
44 00 003 0203 Assign the Paging Zone 3 to the Circuit
number 3 of the Relay Group number 00.
12 71 801 800 Assign to use the relay of the PGD(2)-
U10 station number 800 to the Virtual
station number 801.
12 71 802 800 Assign to use the relay of the PGD(2)-
U10 station number 800 to the Virtual
station number 802.
12 71 803 800 Assign to use the relay of the PGD(2)-
U10 station number 800 to the Virtual
station number 803.
08 – 898 0 Set to operate the relay assigned to the
intervening station.
18 0 801 800 Assign the Station Hunting Group.
18 0 802 800 Assign the Station Hunting Group.
18 0 803 800 Assign the Station Hunting Group.
18 1 800 0 Set the Member station of Station Hunt-
ing-Terminal to the PGD(2)-U10 station
number 800.
18 1 801 1 Set the Pilot station of Station Hunting-
Terminal to the Virtual station number
801.
Continued on next page

1-405
 Chapter 1

CM Y No. 1 ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

18 1 802 1 Set the Pilot station of Station Hunting-
Terminal to the Virtual station number
802.
18 1 803 1 Set the Pilot station of Station Hunting-
Terminal to the Virtual station number
803.
E5 0 801 0 Make busy the Virtual station number
801.
E5 0 802 0 Make busy the Virtual station number
802.
E5 0 803 0 Make busy the Virtual station number
803

HARDWARE REQUIRED

PGD(2)-U10 ADP/External Relay Interface on CPU

Paging Equipment provided locally

1-406
 FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR

FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR

PROGRAMMING

Hotlines or House Phone feature assignment is used to implement this feature.

The number of facsimile station numbers and facsimile call station numbers that can be assigned varies
with each of the following cases.
• When Hotlines-Inside/Outside are used, a maximum of 100 facsimile stations can be assigned. In ad-
dition, a maximum of 100 facsimile call stations can be assigned.
• When House Phone groups are used, a maximum of four facsimile stations can be assigned. In addi-
tion, there is no limit to the number of facsimile call stations that can be assigned to each facsimile
station.

(1) Hotlines

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC/LC • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 10: DLC blade
20: LC blade

CM10 Assign the fax call station number. • Y=00

(1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
NOTE: This number is used as the fax call XX: 01-50: Unit No.
indicator button on the Multiline YY: 01-18: Slot No.
Terminal. Also this is the number to ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
which the incoming fax call is (2) X-XXXXXXXX : Single Line Station
directed. No.
FX-FXXXXXXXX: My Line No.

CM11 Assign a virtual number to be used as a fax call (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
station number. (Similar to CM10 Y=00 above (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Extension No.
but using a virtual extension instead of a real
station number.)

CM13 Assign the function of fax call station to the • Y=29

station or extension assigned above in either (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
CM10 Y=00 or CM11. (2) 0 : Fax call station
1 : Ordinary station

1-407
 FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM52 Assign the fax call station and fax station using • Y=00-99
Hotlines feature. (1) 0: Fax Call Station (calling side) NOTE1
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
NOTE 1: Fax Call Station is the extension to
which the call is directed and will be
the fax call indicator on the Multi-
line Terminal.

NOTE 2: Fax Station is the actual single line (1) 1: Fax Station (called side) NOTE2
port to be connected to the facsimile (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
machine.

CM12 Specify whether to accommodate the fax call • Y=05

station to the Multiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.
(2) 0 : Accommodated
NOTE: This data setting is required when 1 : Not accommodated
assigning a single line station as a
fax call station number by CM10
Y=00.

CM90 Assign the fax call station number as the • Y=00

arrival indicator to the Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + key No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.

END

1-408
 FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR

(2) House Phone

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC/LC • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 10: DLC blade
20: LC blade

CM10 Assign the fax call station number. • Y=00

(1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
NOTE: This number is used as the fax call XX: 01-50: Unit No.
indicator button on the Multiline YY: 01-18: Slot No.
Terminal. Also this is the number to ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
which the incoming fax call is (2) X-XXXXXXXX : Single Line Station
directed. No.
FX-FXXXXXXXX: My Line No.

CM11 Assign a virtual number to be used as a fax call (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
station number. (Similar to CM10 Y=00 above (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Extension No.
but using a virtual extension instead of a real
station number.)

CM13 Assign the function of fax call station to the • Y=29

station or extension assigned above in either (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
CM10 Y=00 or CM11. (2) 0 : Fax call station
1 : Ordinary station

CM12 Assign the fax call station numbers to a House • Y=03

Phone group. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.
(2) 00-03: Fax Call Group No.

Specify whether to accommodate the fax call • Y=05

station to the Multiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.
(2) 0 : Accommodated
NOTE: This data setting is required when 1 : Not accommodated
assigning a single line station as a
fax call station number by CM10
Y=00.

1-409
 FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM51 Assign fax station using House Phone feature. • Y=14

(1) 00-03: Fax Station NOTE
NOTE: Fax Station is the actual single line (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
port to be connected to the facsimile
machine.

CM90 Assign the fax call station number as the • Y=00

arrival indicator to the Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + key No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.

END

1-410
 FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT

FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT

PROGRAMMING

For the applicable feature programming on Flexible Line Key, refer to each feature:

• DO NOT DISTURB Page 1-346

• HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE Page 1-431
• INTERCOM Page 1-438
• MULTILINE TERMINAL Page 1-571
• SAVE AND REPEAT Page 1-725
• STATION SPEED DIALING Page 1-770
• TRUNK-DIRECT APPEARANCES Page 1-829

To indicate the busy/idle status of the extensions accommodated to the Flexible Line Keys on a Terminal
without the One Touch Speed Dial Keys, assign the following data. Station Speed Dialing memory and
One Touch Key memory assignment are used to implement this feature.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to each sta- • Y=02

tion. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Station Speed Dialing in Service Re- • Y=007

striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM73 Specify the usage of Speed Dialing memory • Y=0

for each 1000-Slot Memory Block. (1) 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
(2) 0 : System Speed Dialing (for indi-
vidual tenants)
1 : System Speed Dialing (for all
tenants) (Up to 10 blocks)
NONE : Station Speed Dialing/
One-touch Memory

1-411
 FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 Allocate a memory area for Station Speed Di- • Y=1

aling to each station when using Speed Dial- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
ing. (2) WW XX YYY Z
WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory
Block No.
XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Block No.
YYY : 001-100: Number of 10-Slot
Memory Blocks
Z : Facility for programming for the
dialed No. from the station:
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
NONE : No data

• The relation among memory areas

The memory area for storing one called number of Station Speed Dialing is called a “Memory
Parcel”.
An assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot
Memory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.

10-Slot 1000-Slot
Memory Parcel Memory Block Memory Block

0 00 00
System Speed Dialing
1 01
~

(8 digits)
19

20 Station Speed Dialing

System Speed Dialing
9 99 (2-4 digits)
~

One-Touch Keys
99 Malicious Call List

NOTE: 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19 (16000 Memory Parcels) cannot be used to pro-
vide BLF function on Multiline Terminal line key.

1-412
 FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 • How to assign a 10-Slot Memory Start Block No.

Example: If the desired number of Speed Dialing numbers is 10 for Station No. 300, 20 for Sta-
tion No. 301, 30 for Station No. 302 and 10 for Station No. 303, respectively, assign
the memory areas as below.

1000-Slot Memory 10-Slot Memory Start Number of 10-Slot

Station No. Block No. Block No. Memory Block
300 00 00 1
301 00 01 2
302 00 03 3
303 00 06 1

• About abbreviated codes

The abbreviated codes for this feature are automatically determined by assigning this command,
on a station basis.
If the number of Memory Parcels per station does not exceed 10, then Abbreviated Code=0-9.
If the number of Memory Parcels per station exceeds 10, then Abbreviated Code=00-99.
The following figure shows the relation between Abbreviated Codes and Memory Parcels.

In the case of 10 Memory Parcels In the case of 20 Memory Parcels

Memory Memory
Parcel Parcel
Number Number
(Abbreviated (Abbreviated
Code) Code)

0 0 0 00

1 1 10-Slot 1 01
Memory
Block
2 2
~

10-Slot 3 3 9 09
Memory
Block
4 4 0 10

5 5 10-Slot 1 11
Memory
Block
~

~
~

9 9 9 19

1-413
 FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM94 Allocate the memory area for Station Speed (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
Dialing to each station. (2) WW XX YYY Z
The same memory area must be assigned on WW : 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory
CM73 and CM94, to provide BLF function on Block No. NOTE
Multiline Terminal line key. XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start
Block No.
NOTE: 1000-Slot Memory Block number YYY : 001-010: Number of 10-Slot
04-19 (16000 Memory Parcels) can- Memory Blocks
not be used to provide BLF function Z : 0/1: Facility for programming
on Multiline Terminal line key. the dialed number from the
station Effective/Ineffec-
tive
NONE : No data

CM90 Assign Station Speed Dialing keys on each • Y=00

Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F11XX
For the key number and the last two digits of XX: 00-99: Station Speed Dialing 00-99
the second data, assign the same number as fol-
lows. NOTE 1: For detail of Multiline Terminal
key layout set by CM12 Y=24, re-
1st Data 2nd Data fer to the Command Manual.
XXXXXXXX, 01 F1101
XXXXXXXX, 02 F1102 NOTE 2: A station user should set the
XXXXXXXX, 03 F1103 required extension number to the
.. .. line key on Multiline Terminal.
. .
XXXXXXXX, 16 F1116

CM08 Specify the type of busy indication on the BLF (1) 269
of the Multiline Terminal line key as station (2) 0 : Station base
base or extension base. 1 : Extension base

END

1-414
 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN

FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM29 Assign a Numbering Plan Group to each (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
Tenant. (2) 710-713 : Numbering Plan Group 0-3
NONE : Numbering Plan Group 0

CM20 Specify the number of digits for station num- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
bers. (1) X: 1st digit of Station No.
(2) 801: 1 digit
Example: For setting Station No. “2XXX” 802: 2 digits
(1) 2 803: 3 digits
(2) 804 804: 4 digits
805: 5 digits
NOTE: Maximum of 6 digits station number 806: 6 digits
should be assigned when providing 807: 7 digits
PMS. 808: 8 digits

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the LC blade. • Y=0

BLADE RESET (1) XX ZZ
XX: 01-50: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 10: DLC blade
20: LC blade

CM10 Assign station numbers to the required Physi- • Y=00

cal Port number according to the Numbering (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
Plan specified by CM20. For feature and trunk XX: 01-50: Unit No.
access codes, refer to the programming of indi- YY: 01-18: Slot No.
vidual features. ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX : Station No.
FX-FXXXXXXXX: Digital Multiline
Terminal Station No.

NOTE: When Digital Multiline terminal is assigned by this command, the second data of each
office data below is automatically set to “0” (To provide/To store).
- CM13 Y=41: 0 (To store the call record when answering a station call.)
- CM13 Y=49: 0 (To store the call record when handling an unanswered call.)
- CM13 Y=60: 0 (To store the call record when answering a trunk call.)
- CM13 Y=61: 0 (To store the call record when handling an unanswered trunk call)

END

1-415
 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN

To provide Single-Digit Feature Access Code:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 To activate this feature, set the data for 050, (1) 050: * button as Switch Hook Flash.
051, 069 and 148 to “1”. (2) 1 : Ineffective

(1) 051: # button as Switch Hook Flash.

(2) 1 : Ineffective

(1) 069: Single-Digit Dialing on BT Connec-

tion
(2) 1 : Step Call

(1) 148: Same Last-Digit Redialing on BT

Connection
(2) 1 : Ineffective

Provide the System with the Single-Digit Fea- (1) 156

ture Access Code on RBT (or Voice Call Con- (2) 0: Available
nection).

Provide the System with the Single-Digit Fea- (1) 208

ture Access Code on BT Connection. (2) 0: Available

END

1-416
 FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT

FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the method of tone ringer selection. (1) 390

RESET (2) 1 : As per CM15 Y=491, CM35 Y=34,
164

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C for the ring • Y=07

tone for Multiline Terminals on internal calls (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
to required stations. (2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi- • Y=491

line Terminal for terminating calls from a sta- (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C
tion. assigned by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0 : Ringer Tone Pattern 0
1 : Ringer Tone Pattern 1
2 : Ringer Tone Pattern 2
3 : Ringer Tone Pattern 3
4 : Ringer Tone Pattern 4
5 : Ringer Tone Pattern 5
6 : Ringer Tone Pattern 6
7 : Ringer Tone Pattern 7

CM35 Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi- • Y=034, 164
line Terminal to each trunk route. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) See the table below.

: Default
Y=034 Y=164: 0 Y=164: 1
0 Ringer Tone Pattern 3 Ringer Tone Pattern 0
1 Ringer Tone Pattern 6 Ringer Tone Pattern 1
2 Ringer Tone Pattern 5 Ringer Tone Pattern 2
3 Ringer Tone Pattern 4 Ringer Tone Pattern 7

1-417
 FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM65 Specify the ring frequency of the Multiline • Y=40

Terminal corresponding with the ringer tone (1) 00-63: Tenant No. assigned by CM30
pattern number. Y=01/CM12 Y=04
(2) See the table below.

: Default
Ringer Tone Pattern No. Y=40: 0 Y=40: 1
1 Ringer Tone 1 520 + 660 [Hz]/8 [Hz] Modulating Signal
2 Ringer Tone 2 660 + 760 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal
3 Ringer Tone 3 1100 [Hz] Envelop
4 Ringer Tone 4 540 [Hz]
5 Ringer Tone 5 1100 [Hz]
6 Not used 1400 + 1100 [Hz]
7 Not used 520 + 660 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal

NOTE 1: When using music ring with DT500/DT900 Series, use CM13 Y=99 and CM64 Y=20-27.
NOTE 2: When this data is set or changed, a reset of the terminal is required to reflect the settings
of CM64 Y=20-27 for DT500/DT900 Series.

CM64 Specify the ring frequency of DT500/DT900 • Y=20-27

Series corresponding with the ringer tone pat- (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
tern number. (2) 15 : Music Ring 1 Note 2
[9300V7 software required] 16 : Music Ring 2 Note 2
17 : Music Ring 3 Note 2
NONE : As per CM65 Y=40

NOTE 1: This command is effective only for DT500/DT900 Series. For other Multiline Terminals,
use CM65 Y=40.
NOTE 2: For music ring unsupported terminals, follow the setting of CM65 Y=40.
NOTE 3: A reset of the terminal is required when this data is set or changed for DT500/DT900 Se-
ries.

1-418
 FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Assign the music ring feature to each station. • Y=99

[9300V7 software required] (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available

NOTE 1: This command is effective only for DT500/DT900 Series.

NOTE 2: Be sure to set this data to “1” (Not available) for music ring unsupported terminals.
NOTE 3: When music ring is not used, set this data to “1” (Not available) even for music ring sup-
ported terminals.
NOTE 4: Music ring can be used regardless of this command when music ring is set by the terminal
operation (Feature key + 3) or on a terminal menu.

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class B for Off- • Y=02

Hook Ringing to required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15 Allow Off-Hook Ringing for incoming calls to • Y=068

Line/Trunk Keys on Multiline Terminals in (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B
Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 assigned by CM12 Y=02
Y=02. (2) 1 : Allow

NOTE: This data is effective in the following

status.
• Hook Switch-OFF HOOK
• SPEAKER Lamp-OFF

END

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade

1-419
 FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT

To set the ringing tone setting by Day Mode/Night Mode, do the following programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the change the ringing tone depending (1) 577
on Day Mode/Night Mode Change. (2) 0: To provide

CMEC Apply Day Mode/Night Mode to all Multiline • Y=9

Terminals. (1) 0
(2) 0 : Start to apply
NOTE 1: This data is effective only when the 1 : Now applying
2nd data is set to 0. 3 : Stand by

NOTE 2: This command is executed after

CM08>577 is set, or when the
station tenant number of My Line is
changed by CM12 Y=04.

CM90 Assign the setting of Multiline Terminal ring- • Y=01

ing tone by Day Mode/Night Mode. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No. (01-24)
(2) 0 : Day Mode: No ringing/Night Mode:
Ringing
1 : Day Mode: Ringing/Night Mode:
No ringing
2 : Day Mode: No ringing/Night Mode:
No ringing
3 : Day Mode: Ringing/Night Mode:
Ringing

END

1-420
 FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Forced Account Code. (1) 216
If no setting has been performed for OAI, the (2) 0: By PBX (Related to CM2A)
default setting of this data (2nd data=1 [By
OAI]) means the same as 2nd data=0 (By
PBX).

Specify whether Service Set Tone is provided (1) 362

after dialing the access code for Forced (2) 0 : No tone
Account Code. 1 : Service Set Tone

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Forced • Y=02

Account Code to required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Forced Account Code in Service • Y=031

Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

Specify the entry of Forced Account Code • Y=401

after dialing an LCR access code and desired (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
number. assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow
NOTE: To provide this operation, the 7 : Restricted
following data assignments are
required.
- Toll restriction
(CM12 Y=01,
CM8A Y=5XXX: 000, CM81)
- LCR origination
(CM20 Y=0-3: A126/A127/A128/
A129, CM8A Y=5XXX: 180,
CM85)

CM20 Assign the access code for Forced Account • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Codes. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A087

1-421
 FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM42 Specify the maximum number of digits for (1) 12

Forced Account Code with CPU. (2) 01-16 : 1-16 digits
NONE : 10 digits

CM2A Assign the ID Code Development number for • Y=A0

Forced Account Code. (1) 1: Forced Account Code
(2) 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the ID Code for Forced Account Code. • Y=00-09

ID Code Development No. 00-09
(1) X-XX...XX (Maximum 16 digits): ID Code
for Forced Account Code
(2) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the Valid range of ID Code. • Y=10

(1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 0 : Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code/Remote Access to System (DI-
SA)
1 : Authorization Code/Forced Account
Code
3 : Invalidate the ID Code

Assign the desired Trunk Restriction Class for • Y=11

each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 1 : Unrestricted (RCA)
2 : Non-Restricted-1 (RCB)
3 : Non-Restricted-2 (RCC)
4 : Semi-Restricted-1 (RCD)
5 : Semi-Restricted-2 (RCE)
6 : Restricted-1 (RCF)
7 : Restricted-2 (RCG)
8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

1-422
 FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM2A Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A • Y=12

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B • Y=13

to each ID Code Pattern number. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C • Y=14

to each ID Code. (1) 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.
(2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

END

NOTE: Approximately 3000 Forced Account Codes including Authorization Codes and DISA codes
can be defined.

Number of the codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code. For details, refer
to “BUSINESS/HOTEL/DATA FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS”.

1-423
 GROUP CALL BY PILOT NUMBER DIALING

GROUP CALL BY PILOT NUMBER DIALING

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign the Virtual Line station number for (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
Group Call Pilot Station to the required Virtual (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
Port number.

NOTE: This Virtual Line station must be ex-

clusively used for Group Call Pilot
Station.

CM13 Provide the Virtual Line station with Group • Y=45

Call By Pilot Number Dialing function. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
assigned by CM11
(2) 0: To provide

CM12 Assign the group number which is the destina- • Y=43

tion of a call from the Group Call Pilot Station. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
assigned by CM11
(2) 00-19: Group Call No. 00-19
[9300V4 software or before]
00-59: Group Call No. 00-59
[9300V5 software or later]

CM18 To provide the Station Hunting group of the • Y=0

Group Call Pilot Stations, assign station num- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
bers, one by one, as shown below. assigned by CM11
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Another Virtual Line
(1)Virtual Line Station A Station No. assigned by
1st Operation
(2)Virtual Line Station B CM11
(1)Virtual Line Station B
2nd Operation
(2)Virtual Line Station C

NOTE: The number of Virtual Line stations

per Station Hunting group set by
CM18 becomes the maximum num-
ber of simultaneous calling in each
group of Group Call By Pilot Num-
ber Dialing.

1-424
 GROUP CALL BY PILOT NUMBER DIALING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM18 Assign the Pilot Station to required station • Y=1

number within the Station Hunting group. For (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.
the member stations, set the data to “0”. assigned by CM11
(2) 0 : Member Station
NOTE: The maximum number of stations 1 : Pilot Station
that can be included on one Station
Hunting group is 32 including the
Pilot Station.

CM57 Assign the station numbers to be included in • Y=10-29 Group Call No. 00-19
the Group Call group, and their serial numbers • Y=40-79 Group Call No. 20-59
in the group. [9300V5 software or later]
(1) 00-31: Serial No. within the Group
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by
CM10 Y=00

NOTE 1: The maximum number of simultaneous calling for single line stations is 12 per chassis.
When the number of single line stations exceeds 12, allocate the rest of stations to another
chassis. For a Multiline Terminal (My Line/Virtual Line), there is no limit as the above.

NOTE 2: Maximum of 32 stations per Group Call can be assigned.

END

1-425
 GROUP LISTENING

GROUP LISTENING
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class B for Group • Y=02

Listening to the required Multiline Terminals. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15 Allow Group Listening in Service Restriction • Y=070

Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0: Allow

END

1-426
 HOLD
AUTOMATIC HOLD

HOLD
AUTOMATIC HOLD

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Specify the operation at pressing another Line/ • Y=58

Trunk key while talking on the station/trunk (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
using Trunk-Direct Appearances. (2) 0 : Hold the call and seize the Line/Trunk
key
1 : Disconnect the call and seize the Line/
Trunk key

END

1-427
 HOLD
CALL HOLD

CALL HOLD

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re- • Y=02

quired stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Call Hold in Service Restriction Class A • Y=001

assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign the access code for Call Hold. • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A046: Call Hold

CM90 Assign a Call Hold key to the Multiline Termi- • Y=00

nal, if required. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) F0046
NOTE 1: This line key is not the same key
normally assigned to the key labeled
HOLD. The key is normally
assigned to the Non Exclusive/
Exclusive Hold feature.

NOTE 2: When a station has a Camp-on Call,

flashing the switchhook and dialing
the Call Hold feature results in the
connecting to the camped-on party.

END

1-428
 HOLD
DUAL HOLD

DUAL HOLD

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class B for this fea- • Y=02

ture to required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15 Allow Dual Hold in Service Restriction Class • Y=064

B assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

END

1-429
 HOLD

EXCLUSIVE HOLD

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Exclusive Hold. (1) 130

(2) 1 : Available

CM41 Specify the Recall timing on Exclusive Hold. • Y=0

(1) 06
(2) 01-98: 4-392 seconds
(4 second increments)
If no data is set, the default setting is 236-240
seconds.

END

1-430
 HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE

HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE
PROGRAMMING

For internal Hotline:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign the Hotline station to the required sta- • Y=03

tions. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 04: Hotline Station

CM52 Set up the Hotline pair. Bidirectional Hotlines • Y=00-99 Hotline Pair No.
should be assigned as follows: (1) 0: Calling Side
Hotline Pair No. Calling Side Called Side (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. /Data Station
00 Station A Station B No. assigned by CM12
01 Station B Station A Y=03

(1) 1: Called Side

NOTE 1: There is a maximum of 100 assign- (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. /Data Station
ments for Hotline destination. If in- No.
ternal bidirectional Hotline calling E000-E007 : Attendant Console No.
is required, two assignments (one
for each direction) must be made. A NOTE 3: Do not assign station number
maximum of 50 bidirectional Ho- with first digit “0”.
tlines can be assigned.

NOTE 2: When assigning a station number to

a Calling Side, the second data of
CM12 Y=03 must be set to “04”.

CM08 Specify the result of a Switch Hook Flash on (1) 057

each Hotline station. (2) 0 : Special Dial Tone
1 : Attendant Recall
To allow Hotline stations to transfer a call or
access a feature, set the data to “0”.

END

1-431
 HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE

For Hotline-Outside:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign a Hotline to the required stations. • Y=03

(1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 04: Hotline

CM71 Allocate the memory area for the Hotline-Out- (1) 65: For Hotline-Outside
side call. For example, to assign the 10 Ho- (2) XXX YYY
tline-Outside calls into No. 100 through No. XXX: 000-299: Starting Memory Slot No.
109 Memory Slots, 2nd data is “100010”. Ab- in blocks
breviated Codes are automatically assigned as YYY: 001-300: Number of Memory Slots
shown below: to be assigned in blocks
Abbreviated Code
Memory Slot 100 00

Memory Slot 109 09

CM72 Assign the called party number to each Mem- • Y=0

ory Slot number for Hotline. (1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXXX + , + YY...Y: Called Party No.
XXXX : Access Code (Maximum 4 dig-
its)
, : Separator Mark
YY...Y : Called Party No. (Maximum 26
digits)
NONE : No data

• Y=1
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXX...X: Called Party Name Character
Code (Maximum 32 digits: 16
characters)
NONE : No data
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.
Page A-2

1-432
 HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM72 Assign the called party number to each • Y=2

Memory Slot number for Hotline. (1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XXX...X: Called Party Name Character by
PCPro/CAT (Maximum 16 char-
acters)
NONE : No data

• Y=4
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Russian
(Maximum 16 characters) by
entering with Russian character
codes.
See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table
for Russian. Page A-3
NONE : No data

• Y=5
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in Simplified
Chinese (Maximum 8 two-byte
characters)
NONE : No data

• Y=6
(1) 000-299: Memory Slot No.
(2) XX...XX: Called Party Name in
Traditional Chinese (Maximum
8 two-byte characters)
NONE : No data

CM52 Define the Hotline pairs. • Y=00-99 Hotline pair No.

(1) 0: Calling Side
NOTE 1: When assigning a station number to 1: Called Side
a Calling Side, the second data of (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. (For Calling
CM12 Y=03 must be set to “04”. Side)
C XX (For Called Side)
XX: Abbreviated Code exclusively for
Hotline-Outside call assigned by
CM71>65

NOTE 2: Do not assign station number

with first digit “0”.

END

1-433
 HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE

For Brokerage Hotline:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign the Virtual station numbers to the re- (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
quired Virtual Port number. (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No.

CM12 Assign the Hotline to the Virtual station num- • Y=03

ber assigned by CM11. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No.
(2) 04: Hotline

CM52 Define the Hotline pairs. • Y=00-99 Hotline Pair No.

(1) 0: Calling Side
NOTE 1: When assigning a station number to (2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No.
a Calling Side, the second data of
CM12 Y=03 must be set to “04”. (1) 1: Called Side
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. (Calling
Side)
C XX (For Called Side)
XX: Abbreviated Code given by CM71
(See Hotline-Outside)

NOTE 2: Do not assign station number

with first digit “0”.

CM90 Assign the Virtual Line station number and • Y=00

Release keys on the Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No.
F1020 : Release key

END

1-434
 INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS

INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM05 Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC • Y=0

blade. (1) XX ZZ
BLADE RESET XX: 01: Unit No.
ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.
(2) 10: DLC blade
NOTE 1: DESKCON can be accommodated
to Unit01.

NOTE 2: Maximum 2 of DESKCON can be

accommodated to each DLC blade.

NOTE 3: This data assignment is not required

when DESKCON is added on to ex-
isting DLC blade.

NOTE 4: The firmware of DLC blade must be

version 2.3 or later.

CM10 Assign the DESKCON number to its • Y=00

associated Physical Port number. (1) XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.
XX: 01: Unit No.
NOTE 1: Blade reset is required when DESK- YY: 01-18: Slot No.
CON is added on to existing DLC ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.
blade. (2) E000-E007: DESKCON No.
BLADE RESET
NOTE 2: DESKCON cannot be added on to
DLC blade when PGD(2)-U10 ADP
is accommodated to existing DLC
blade.

Assign the Add-On Module to be equipped • Y=01

with the DT700/DT800/DT900 Series through (1) 0000-1499: Virtual Port No.
the LAN connection (Side Connection). (For IP terminal)
(2) EC00-EC31: Add-On Module No.

1-435
 INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for Individual Atten- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
dant Access. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A095

CM08 Allow the Individual Attendant Access from a (1) 143

station belonging to a different tenant. (2) 1 : Allowed

END

1-436
 INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT
EXCLUSIVE HOLD

INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A to the • Y=02

required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A
CM15 Allow Voice Response System access in • Y=033
Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
Y=02. signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM49 Assign the function for this feature to each • Y=00

Voice Response System. (1) 000-015: VRS No.
(2) 0A00: Call Forwarding Intercept
Announcement

CM51 Assign a Voice Response System as the desti- • Y=07

nation of the call intercepted on each Tenant. (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
(2) EB000-EB015: Voice Response System
No.

CM20 To record, replay, or delete a message, assign • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
the appropriate Voice Response System access (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
codes. (2) A100: Voice Response System access (Re-
cord)
A101: Voice Response System access
(Replay)
A102: Voice Response System access
(Delete)

END

NOTE: Only one common message can be provided for the different intercept conditions.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

CPU blade (VRS using a built-in Flash ROM)

1-437
 INTERCOM
MANUAL INTERCOM

INTERCOM
MANUAL INTERCOM

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign a Manual Intercom number to the (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
Virtual Port number. The last two digits of each (2) A200-A224
Manual Intercom number represent the A300-A324
Manual Intercom Group number. A400-A424
A500-A524
NOTE: A Manual Intercom group can A600-A624
consist of two to six Multiline Termi- A700-A724
nals. A maximum of 25 Manual In- (Manual Intercom Number)
tercom groups can be assigned per
system. A X YY
X : 2-7: Serial No. in a Group
GROUP No. INTERCOM No. YY: 00-24: Manual Intercom Group No.
00 A200, A300, A400, A500, A600, A700
01 A201, A301, A401, A501, A601, A701
~

24 A224, A324, A424, A524, A624, A724

CM12 Assign the Manual Intercom station. • Y=03

(1) A200-A724: Manual Intercom No.
assigned by CM11
(2) 06: Manual Intercom

CM56 Assign the My Line No. of each Multiline Ter- • Y=11

minal to each Manual Intercom number. (1) A200-A724: Manual Intercom No.
assigned by CM11
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

CM90 Assign the Manual Intercom key to each Mul- • Y=00

tiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) A200-A724: Manual Intercom No. of each
Multiline Terminal

CM08 Allow the Manual Intercom access when a (1) 238

called intercom station has set Do Not Disturb. (2) 1 : Ring on (Allowed)

END

1-438
 INTERCOM
AUTOMATIC INTERCOM

AUTOMATIC INTERCOM

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign an Automatic Intercom number to the (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
Virtual Port number. The Automatic Intercom (2) A000-A031
stations are paired as shown below. A100-A131
(Automatic Intercom Number)
GROUP No. INTERCOM No.
00 A000, A100 A X YY
01 A001, A101 X : 0/1 to be made one pair.
YY: 00-31: Automatic Intercom Group No.
~

31 A031, A131

NOTE: The maximum number of Automatic

Intercom paired stations per system
is 32.

CM12 Assign each Automatic Intercom station. • Y=03

(1) A000-A031, A100-A131: Automatic Inter-
com No. as-
signed by CM11
(2) 05: Automatic Intercom

CM56 Assign the My Line number to each Automatic • Y=10

Intercom number. (1) A000-A031, A100-A131: Automatic Inter-
com No. as-
signed by CM11
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

CM90 Assign the Automatic Intercom key to each • Y=00

Multiline Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + Key No.
(2) A000-A031, A100-A131: Automatic Inter-
com No. of each
Multiline Termi-
nal

CM08 Allow the Automatic Intercom access when a (1) 237

called intercom station has set Do Not Disturb. (2) 1 : Allowed

1-439
 INTERCOM
AUTOMATIC INTERCOM

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM13 Specify the busy indication on the Automatic • Y=11

Intercom LED when the other Multiline Ter- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
minal of the same Automatic Intercom Group (2) 0 : Allowed
is busy. 1 : Restricted

END

NOTE: To activate the Voice Announcement call, refer to INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING.
Page 1-443

1-440
 INTERCOM
DIAL INTERCOM

DIAL INTERCOM

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM11 Assign a Dial Intercom number to the Virtual (1) 0000-0999: Virtual Port No.
Port number. The last two digits of each Dial (2) B000-B024
Intercom number represent the Dial Intercom B100-B124
Group number. B200-B224
The first digit is the intercom code (0-9) as- B300-B324
signed to the associated virtual extension. B400-B424
B500-B524
GROUP No. INTERCOM No. B600-B624
00 B000, B100, B200 — B900 B700-B724
01 B001, B101, B201 — B901 B800-B824
B900-B924
~

24 B024, B124, B224 — B924 (Dial Intercom Number)

NOTE: A maximum of 25 Dial Intercom B X YY

groups are available per system. A X : 0-9: Intercom Code
maximum of ten Multiline Terminals YY: 00-24: Dial Intercom Group No.
can belong to a Dial Intercom
group.

CM12 Assign the Dial Intercom station. • Y=03

(1) B000-B924: Dial Intercom No. assigned by
CM11
(2) 07: Dial Intercom

CM56 Assign the My Line number to each Dial Inter- • Y=12

com number. (1) B000-B924: Dial Intercom No.
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

CM90 Assign the Dial Intercom key to each Multiline • Y=00

Terminal. (1) My Line No. + , + key No.
(2) B000-B924: Dial Intercom No. of each
Multiline Terminal

CM12 If the Private Dial Intercom is provided, assign • Y=02

Service Restriction Class A to each Dial Inter- (1) B000-B924: Dial Intercom No. assigned by
com number. CM11
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

1-441
 INTERCOM

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM15 Restrict Executive Override in Service Restric- • Y=009

tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-
signed by CM12 Y=02
(2) 0: Restricted

CM08 Allow the Dial Intercom access when a called (1) 239
intercom station has set Do Not Disturb. (2) 1 : Allowed

END

NOTE: To activate the Voice Announcement call, refer to INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING.
Page 1-443

1-442
 INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING

INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 To activate the Single-Digit Feature Access (1) 050: * button as Switch Hook Flash.
Code feature, set the data for 050, 051, 069, (2) 1 : Ineffective
148 and 543 to “1”.
(1) 051: # button as Switch Hook Flash.
(2) 1 : Ineffective

(1) 069: Single Digit Dialing on BT Connec-

tion
(2) 1 : Step Call

(1) 148: Same Last Digit Redialing on BT

Connection
(2) 1 : Ineffective

(1) 543: Step Call

(2) 1 : Allow

Provide the system with the Single-Digit (1) 156

Feature Access Code on RBT or Voice Call (2) 0: Available
connection.

Specify if Voice Call is provided when calling (1) 270

a Multiline Terminal is set to Voice First from (2) 0 : Not provided (Busy Tone)
a Single Line Telephone or a Multiline Termi- 1 : To provide
nal without an LCD.

Provide the system with the Single-Digit (1) 208

Feature Access Code on BT connection. (2) 0: Available

Specify whether the Single-Digit Feature (1) 570

Access Code are fixed or not. (2) 0 : Programmable Access Code
1 : Fixed Access Code

CM20 When using programmable access code • Y=5

(CM08>570 is set to 0), assign the Single- (1) X: Access code (0-9, A (*), B (#))
Digit Feature Access Code for the RBT con- (2) 1 : Internal Tone/Voice Signaling
nection. NONE : Single-Digit Feature Access
Code is not available

1-443
 INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class B for Voice • Y=02

Call (called side) to the required Multiline Ter- (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
minal. (2) XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

CM15 Allow Voice Call (called side) in Service • Y=067

Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02. (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class B
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class C for Voice • Y=07

Call Mike Off (called side) to the required (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
Multiline Terminal. (2) 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

CM15 Allow Voice Call Mike Off (called side) in • Y=099

Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 (1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class C
Y=07. assigned by CM12 Y=07
(2) 0: Available

CM20 Assign the Voice Call/Ring Tone Program- • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
ming access code. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A163: Voice Call/Ring Tone Programming

END

1-444
 INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME

INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME

PROGRAMMING

To provide Internal Zone Paging with Meet-Me:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for Internal • Y=02

Zone Paging to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow Internal Zone Paging for called side. • Y=049

(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign Internal Zone Paging access codes and • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Meet-Me answer codes, if required. (1) X-XXXX: 50-54, 55-59: Access code
(2) A130-A137: Group 0-7 (Paging Access)
A138-A145: Group 0-7 (Meet-Me Answer)

CM56 Assign the Multiline Terminal/Soft Phone into • Y=00-07 Paging Group Number
the required Internal Zone Paging Groups. (1) 00-15: Serial No. in a Paging Group
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 (00-07) internal
zone paging is available. Up to 16
Multiline Terminals can be grouped
per zone.

CM90 Assign Internal Zone Paging to each button on • Y=00

the Multiline Terminal. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. + , +
Key No.
(2) F1270-F1277: Internal Zone Paging Group
0-7

END

1-445
 INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME

To provide All Zone Internal Paging:

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with All Zone Internal Pag- (1) 158
ing. (2) 1 : Available

CM12 Assign Service Restriction Class A for All • Y=02

Zone Internal Paging to the required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) XX ZZ
XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

CM15 Allow All Zone Internal Paging for called side. • Y=049
(1) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A
assigned by CM12 Y=02
(2) 1 : Allow

CM20 Assign an All Zone Internal Paging access • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
code. (1) X-XXXX: Access code (1-4 digits)
(2) A164: All Zone Internal Paging

CM56 Assign Group for Internal Zone Paging to the • Y=00-05 Paging Group Number
required Multiline Terminals/Soft Phones. (1) 00-15: Serial No. in a Paging Group
(2) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.
NOTE: A maximum of 6 zones (00-05)
internal paging groups are avail-
able. Up to 16 Multiline Terminals/
Soft Phones can be grouped per
zone.

CM90 Assign an All Zone Internal Paging function • Y=00

key to a line button on the desired Multiline (1) X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. + , +
Terminals. Key No.
(2) F1299: All Zone Internal Paging

END

1-446
 LAST NUMBER REDIAL

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Last Number Redial (1) 177
for Single Line Telephone/Standard SIP sta- (2) 0: Available
tion.

CM20 Assign the access code for Last Number • Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3
Redial. (1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A069

CM90 Assign the Last Number Redial feature access • Y=00

key to each Multiline Terminal, as required. (1) My Line No. + , +Key No.
(2) F0069: Last Number Redial

Assign the Last Number Redial key to each • Y=00

DESKCON, as required. (1) DESKCON No. (E000-E007) + , + Key
No.
(2) F6121: Last Number Redial

END

1-447
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-2. • Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A126: LCR Group 0
A127: LCR Group 1
A128: LCR Group 2

CM81 Assign the Toll Restriction Patterns with eight • Y=01-13

kinds of Trunk Restriction Classes assigned by Toll Restriction Pattern No. 01-13
CM12 Y=01. (1) 1-8: Trunk Restriction Class
Toll Restriction Pattern 00-15 are preassigned (2) 0: Restricted
as shown below. 3: Allowed
If a new Restriction Pattern is required, change
the data for Restriction Pattern 01-13 (00, 14
and 15 are fixed).

TRUNK 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
RESTRICTION
CLASS TOLL RESTRICTION PATTERN NUMBER ON EACH TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

1 RCA 3 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 0

2 RCB 3 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 0

3 RCC 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

4 RCD 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0
5 RCE 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

6 RCF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

7 RCG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

8 RCH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

0: Restricted
3: Allowed

1-448
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign an Area Code Development Pattern • Y=A000

number to each LCR Group. (1) 0-2: LCR Group 0-2
(2) 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-
tern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area • Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development
code for the Area Code Development Pattern Pattern No. 5-7
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000. (1) X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Specify the order of LCR selection for the • Y=0000-0255

Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A Route Pattern No. 000-255
Y=4005-4007. (1) 1-4: Order of LCR Selection
1: 1st
2: 2nd
3: 3rd
4: 4th
(2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No. 000-255
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No. 00-63

For area code deletion, designate the digits to • Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255
be deleted. (1) 152: Deletion of all digits of the area code
To delete all digits of the area code: assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007
(2) 0: To delete

To delete the designated digit of an area code • Y=5000-5255

assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007: (1) 153: Designation of digit to be deleted for
area code assigned by CM8A
Y=4005-4007
(2) 00 : No digit deletion
01-10 : First 1-10 digits deleted
NONE : No digit deletion

1-449
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

B DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A For area code addition, designate the digits to • Y=5000-5255

be added. (1) 100: Designation of digit Addition Pattern
No.
(2) 9000-9255: Digit Addition Pattern No.
000-255
NONE : No digit addition

• Y=9000-9255
Digit Addition Pattern No. 000-255
(1) 0: Entry of digit code to be added
(2) X-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32
digits)
X=0-9, A (*), B (#), C (Fixed Pause),
D (Programming Pause)

If three-digit Toll Restriction is provided, as- • Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255
sign the Toll Restriction Pattern number to the (1) 000: Destination of Toll Restriction Pattern
LCR Pattern number. No.
(2) 00-15: Toll Restriction Pattern No. speci-
fied by CM81

1-450
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

C DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A If six-digit Toll Restriction is provided, assign

the following data to the LCR Pattern number
and set up the six-digit Toll Restriction Pattern
Tables.

(1) Specify the Trunk Restriction Classes to • Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255
which 6-digit Toll Restriction applies. (1) 021-028: Trunk Restriction Class assigned
by CM12 Y=01
Example: 412-211 021 : Unrestricted (RCA)
Area Office 022 : Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)
Code Code 023 : Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)
024 : Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)
RCA: No restrictions (three-digit TR) 025 : Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)
RCB: 412-211 is allowed (six-digit TR) 026 : Restricted 1 (RCF)
RCC: 412-211 is allowed (six-digit TR) 027 : Restricted 2 (RCG)
RCD: 412 is restricted (three-digit TR) 028 : Fully-Restricted 2 (RCH)
RCE : 412 is restricted (three-digit TR) (2) 0 : 6-digit Toll Restriction Pattern
1 : 3-digit Toll Restriction Pattern as per
CM8A
CM8A Y=5000-5255>000

TRUNK RESTRICTION
Y DATA
CLASS
5000 021 1
022 0
023 0
024 1
025 1

(2) Assign the six-digit Toll Restriction Pat- • Y=5000-5255

tern number to the LCR Pattern number. (1) 020
(2) 8000-8049: 6-digit Toll Restriction Pattern
No. 00-49

(3) Assign the Office code (three-digits) and • Y=8000-8049

the availability to access the office code to 6-digit Toll Restriction Pattern No. 00-49
the six-digit Toll Restriction Pattern num- (1) XXX: 3-digits of Office Code
ber assigned by (2). (2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allowed

1-451
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

D DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A If the prefix is to be added, assign the follow- • Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255
ing data to the LCR Pattern number. (1) 150
(2) 8050-8099: 6-digit Prefix Pattern No. 00-
(1) Assign the 6-digit Prefix Pattern number to 49
the LCR Pattern number. CCC : No Prefix

(2) Assign the office code (three-digits) requir- • Y=8000-8049

ing the Prefix to the six-digit Prefix Pattern (1) XXX: 3-digit of Office Code
number. (2) 1 : Allowed

CM85 Specify the maximum number of sending dig- • Y=5-7 Area Code Development Pattern
its to be dialed by calling party. No. 5-7 assigned by CM8A
Y=A000
NOTE: The maximum number of sending (1) X-X...X: Area Code dialed, Maximum 8
digits including the area codes digits
should be assigned to each area (2) 01-24 : 1-24 digits
code. 25-79 : 25-79 digits

CM35 Provide the Toll Restriction feature to the re- • Y=011

quired trunk routes. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0: To provide

Specify route access capability for each re- • Y=051-058 (RCA-RCH)

striction class. (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
(2) 0 : Restricted
1 : Allow

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern • Y=076

number for Toll Restriction and Maximum (1) 00-63: Trunk Route No.
Digit Analysis to each trunk route. (2) 05-07: Area Code Development Pattern
No. 5-7

END

1-452
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

To provide LCR with Time of Day Routing, add the following system data programming.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign the Date Pattern number to each area • Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development
code for the Area Code Development Pattern Pattern No. 5-7
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000. (1) X-X...X: Area Code Maximum 8 digits
(2) 3000-3003: Date Pattern No. 0-3

Assign the Time Pattern number to each day of • Y=3000-3003 Date Pattern No. 0-3
the week for the Date Pattern number assigned (1) 0: SUN
by CM8A Y=4005-4007. 1: MON
2: TUE
3: WED
4: THU
5: FRI
6: SAT
(2) 2000-2007: Time Pattern No. 0-7

1-453
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign the Route Pattern number to the re- • Y=2000-2007 Time Pattern No. 0-7
quired time of day for the Time Pattern number (1) HH MM (Time)
assigned by CM8A Y=3000-3003. HH : 00-23: Hours
To define the following Time Pattern: MM: 00/30: Minutes
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255
0:00 8:00 20:00 23:30 If Tenant Pattern is required, set 1000-1015
(Tenant Pattern No. 00-15).
Route Route Route
Pattern 00 Pattern 01 Pattern 00

Y TIME (1) ROUTE PATTERN (2)

2000 (Time Pattern No. 0) 0000 0000 (Route Pattern No. 000)
0030
0100
0130
0200
0:00 a.m.-8:00 a.m.

0730

2000
2030
8:00 p.m.-0:00 a.m.

2330
2000 (Time Pattern No. 0) 0001 (Route Pattern No. 001)
0800
0830
8:00 a.m.-8:00 p.m.

1930

If the Tenant Pattern number is assigned by • Y=1000-1015 Tenant Pattern No. 00-15
CM8A Y=2000-2007, assign the Route Pattern (1) 00-63: Tenant No.
number to the required Tenant number for the (2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255
Tenant Pattern number.

END

1-454
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

To provide C.O. operator call with LCR, assign the following system data.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM20 Assign the access code for LCR Group 0. • Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3
(1) X-XXXX: Access Code
(2) A126: LCR Group

CM81 Assign the Toll Restriction Patterns with eight • Y=01-13 Toll Restriction Pattern No. 01-13
kinds of Trunk Restriction Classes assigned by (1) 1-8: Trunk Restriction Class
CM12 Y=01. Toll Restriction Pattern 00-15 is (2) 0: Restricted
already programmed as shown below. If a new 3: Allowed
Restriction Pattern is required, change the data
of the Restriction Pattern 01-13 (00, 14 and 15
are fixed).

TRUNK 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00
RESTRICTION
CLASS TOLL RESTRICTION PATTERN NUMBER ON EACH TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

1 RCA 3 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 0

2 RCB 3 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 0

3 RCC 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

4 RCD 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0
5 RCE 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

6 RCF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

7 RCG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

8 RCH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

0: Restricted
3: Allowed

CM8A Assign the Route Pattern number to each area • Y=4010 Area Code for C.O. Operator
code for the Area Code Development Pattern (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Area Code for C.O.
number assigned by CM8A Y=A000. Operator
This data is only effective for an access
code assigned to CM20 Y=0-3: A126.
(2) 0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

1-455
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM8A Assign the 1st order of LCR selection for the • Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-255
Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A (1) 1: 1st order of LCR selection
Y=4010. (2) XXX ZZ
XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.
ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern number to • Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255
the LCR Pattern number assigned by CM8A (1) 000: Destination of Toll Restriction Pattern
Y=4010. No.
(2) 00-15: Toll Restriction Pattern No. speci-
fied by CM81

END

NOTE: See Examples in the following pages.

LCR Development Sequence

TRUNK RESTRICTION
CM8A TENANT PATTERN PATTERN 00-15

1000 5000
DIGIT DELETION
TIME PATTERN 5255
1015
9000 DIGIT
LCR ADDITION
ACCESS 2000
A000 9255
CODE 2007
AREA CODE 4005 LCR PATTERN DIGIT ADDITION
4007
3000 TRUNK ROUTE SELECTION

3003 1ST

0000 2ND

DATE PATTERN 3RD

0255
AREA CODE 4TH
DEVELOPMENT PATTERN

ROUTE PATTERN

1-456
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

Example 1:

DDD
RT00

WATS NXX-XXXX
RT01
C.O. AREA CODE
9-212- FX 212
NXX- RT02
XXXX

Conditions:
(1) Order of LCR Selection:
1st... Route 02 (FX)
2nd...Route 01 (WATS)
3rd... Route 00 (DDD)

(2) Dialed Number:

9-212-NXX-XXXX

9 : Access Code
212 : Area Code
NXX : Office Code
XXXX: Telephone Number

(3) Toll Restriction Pattern:

–: Allowed
: Restricted
CLASS RCA RCB RCC RCD RCE
ROUTE
00 – – – – –
01 – – –  
02 – –   

1-457
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

Programming for Example 1:

STEP1: Assign “9” to the access code of LCR Group 0 in Numbering Plan Group 0.
ST + 200 + DE + 9 + DE + A126 + EXE

STEP2: Assign Area Code Development Pattern No. 5 to LCR Group 0.

ST + 8AA000 + DE + 0 + DE + 4005 + EXE

STEP3: Assign Route Pattern No. 00 to area code (212) for Area code Development Pattern No. 5.
ST + 8A4005 + DE + 212 + DE + 0000 + EXE

STEP4: In Route Pattern No. 00, specify the order of LCR selection as shown below.
1st: Route 02 (FX)
ST + 8A0000 + DE + 1 + DE + 000 02 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 000
2nd: Route 01 (WATS)
ST + 8A0000 + DE + 2 + DE + 001 01 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 001
3rd: Route 00 (DDD)
ST + 8A0000 + DE + 3 + DE + 002 00 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 002

STEP5: In LCR Pattern No. 000 (for FX), delete the area code dialed.
ST + 8A5000 + DE + 151 + DE + 0 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 000 To delete

STEP6: Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern to each Route (LCR Pattern No.).
For LCR Pattern No. 000 (Route 02):
ST + 8A5000 + DE + 000 + DE + 10 + EXE
Toll Restriction Pattern No. specified by CM81
For LCR Pattern No. 001 (Route 01):
ST + 8A5001 + DE + 000 + DE + 09 + EXE

For LCR Pattern No. 002 (Route 00):

ST + 8A5002 + DE + 000 + DE + 01 + EXE

STEP7: Assign the maximum number of digits dialed.

ST + 855 + DE + 212 + DE + 10 + EXE
Area Code Area Code 10 digits (including the area code)
Development
Pattern No. 5

1-458
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

Example 2:

AREA CODE 214

236

FX
232
RT00 1-236-XXXX
WATS
RT01
C.O.
DDD
213-NXX-XXXX
RT02

AREA
CODE
213

Conditions:
(1) Order of LCR Selection:
1st... Route 02 (FX)
2nd...Route 01 (WATS)
3rd... Route 00 (DDD)

(2) Dialed Number:

• 9-214-232/236-XXXX
NOTE: 236 is a Toll Office.

• 9-213-NXX-XXXX

(3) Toll Restriction Pattern:

–: Allowed
: Restricted
CLASS RCA RCB RCC RCD RCE
ROUTE
00 – – – – –
01 – – –NOTE  
02 – –NOTE   

NOTE: Area Code 213 is restricted.

1-459
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

Programming for Example 2:

STEP1: Assign “9” to the access code of LCR Group 0 in Numbering Plan Group 0.
ST + 200 + DE + 9 + DE + A126 + EXE

STEP2: Assign Area Code Development Pattern No. 5 to LCR Group 0.

ST + 8AA000 + DE + 0 + DE + 4005 + EXE

STEP3: Assign Route Pattern Nos. 00 and 01to area codes 214 and 213 respectively.
ST + 8A4005 + DE + 214 + DE + 0000 + EXE
Route Pattern No. 00

ST + 8A4005 + DE + 213 + DE + 0001 + EXE

Route Pattern No. 01

STEP4: Specify the order of LCR selection to each Route Pattern.

For Route Pattern 00:
1st: Route 00 (FX)
ST + 8A0000 + DE + 1 + DE + 000 00 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 000
2nd: Route 01 (WATS)
ST + 8A0000 + DE + 2 + DE + 001 01 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 001
3rd: Route 02 (DDD)
ST + 8A0000 + DE + 3 + DE + 002 02 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 002

For Route Pattern 01:

1st: Route 00 (FX)
ST + 8A0001 + DE + 1 + DE + 003 00 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 003
2nd: Route 01 (WATS)
ST + 8A0001 + DE + 2 + DE + 004 01 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 004
3rd: Route 02 (DDD)
ST + 8A0001 + DE + 3 + DE + 005 02 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 005

1-460
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

–: Allowed
TOLL RESTRICTION : Restricted
AREA ROUTE ORDER LCR
ROUTE RCA RCB RCC RCD RCE
CODE PATTERN No. OF LCR PATTERN No.
1st 00 000 – – – – –
214 00 2nd 01 001 – – –  
3rd 02 002 – –   
1st 00 003 – – – – –
213 01 2nd 01 004 – –   
3rd 02 005 –    

STEP5: In LCR Pattern No. 000 and 003, delete the area code dialed.
ST + 8A5000 + DE + 151 + DE + 0 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 000 To be deleted
ST + 8A5003 + DE + 151 + DE + 0 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 003 To be deleted

STEP6: Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern to each LCR Pattern No.
For LCR Pattern No. 000:
ST + 8A5000 + DE + 000 + DE + 01 + EXE
LCR Pattern No. 000 Toll Restriction Pattern No. specified by CM81

For LCR Pattern No. 001:

ST + 8A5001 + DE + 000 + DE + 03 + EXE

For LCR Pattern No. 002:

ST + 8A5002 + DE + 000 + DE + 04 + EXE

For LCR Pattern No. 003:

ST + 8A5003 + DE + 000 + DE + 01 + EXE

For LCR Pattern No. 004:

ST + 8A5004 + DE + 000 + DE + 04 + EXE

For LCR Pattern No. 005:

ST + 8A5005 + DE + 000 + DE + 05 + EXE

1-461
 LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT

STEP7: In LCR Pattern No. 000, designate the prefix “1”, in addition to the office code 236, by the six-
digit Prefix Pattern.

• Designation of 6-digit Prefix Pattern No.

ST + 8A5000 + DE + 150 + DE + 8050 + EXE
6-digit Prefix Pattern No. 00

• Designation of office code requiring Prefix Pattern.

ST + 8A8000 + DE + 236 + DE + 1 + EXE
6-digit Prefix Pattern No. 00

STEP8: Assign the maximum number of digits dialed.

ST + 855 + DE + 21 + DE + 10 + EXE
Area Code Area Code 10 digits
Development
Pattern No. 5

1-462
 LINE LOCKOUT

LINE LOCKOUT
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Provide the system with Howler Tone sent to (1) 153
locked-out stations, if required. (2) 1 : To send

Assign the line lockout indication on the DSS (1) 274

Console. (2) 0 : Available
1 : Not available

CM13 Provide Howler Tone automatic sending to the • Y=04

required stations. (1) X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
(2) 1 : To provide

CM42 Specify the number of stations in Line Lockout (1) 01

to give a Alarm. (2) 01-99 : 1-99 stations
NONE : No “Lockout Alarm Display”

END

1-463
 LINE PRESELECTION

LINE PRESELECTION
PROGRAMMING
START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM08 Specify the operation of Line Preselection on a (1) 199

Multiline Terminal. (2) 0 : Only desired line key
1 : Off-hook/Speaker key is required after
pressing the desired line key

Provide Group Feature Key on Multiline Ter- (1) 558

minal with Line Preselection function, if re- (2) 0: To provide
quired.

NOTE: Set the second data of CM08>199 to

0 when the second data of this com-
mand is set to 0.

END

1-464
 MALICIOUS CALL BLOCK

MALICIOUS CALL BLOCK

[9300V3 software required]

PROGRAMMING

(1) Basic Data Assignment

The following programming is the basic system data to provide Malicious Call Block using PCPro
and Malicious Call List set by a user operation.

START DESCRIPTION DATA

CM73 Specify Malicious Call List for the usage of • Y=0

Speed Dialing memory for each 1000-Slot (1) 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
Memory Block. (2) 2 : Malicious Call list (Maximum 2
blocks)
NOTE: A 1000-Slot Block number assigned NONE : Station Speed Dialing/One
by this command cannot be used for Touch Memory
Station Speed Dialing/One-Touch
Memory and System Speed Dialing.

CM74 Assign a calling party number of Malicious • Y=0

Call to a Malicious Call List. (1) XX YY Z
XX: 00-99: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.
assigned by CM73 Y=0
YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.
Z : 0-9 : Memory Parcel No.
(2) Calling Party No. of Malicious Call (Maxi-
mum 16 digits)
NONE : No data

CM76 Specify whether to restrict the call termination • Y=42

for DID call with calling party number. (1) 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.
assigned by CM76 Y=00/90
NOTE: This command is assigned to restrict (2) 0 : Restricted
the call termination for DID call 1 : As per CM35 Y=303
with calling party number. To
restrict the call termination for an
incoming trunk call with calling
party number, assign CM35 Y=303/
304/305.

1-465
 MALICIOUS CALL BLOCK

A DESCRIPTION DATA

CM76 Specify the call terminating method for DID • Y=43 Day Mode
call with callin